Chlouvānem/Morphology: Difference between revisions

From Linguifex
Jump to navigation Jump to search
 
(149 intermediate revisions by the same user not shown)
Line 2: Line 2:
{{Chlouvānem sidebar}}  
{{Chlouvānem sidebar}}  
==Nouns (''halenī'') ==
==Nouns (''halenī'') ==
→ ''See [[Lahob languages#Morphology|Lahob languages § Morphology]] for diachronical tables and comparisons with sister languages.''
→ ''See [[Lahob languages#Morphology|Lahob languages § Morphology]] for diachronical tables and comparisons with sister languages.''<br/>
→ ''See also [[Chlouvānem/Syntax#Noun_phrase|Chlouvānem syntax § Noun phrase]] for discussion of case usage.''


The [[Chlouvānem]] noun (''haloe'', pl. ''halenī'') is highly inflected - it declines for:

The [[Chlouvānem]] noun (''haloe'', pl. ''halenī'') is highly inflected - it declines for:

Line 16: Line 17:
:: '''Genitive''' (''cārūkire dirūnnevya'')

:: '''Genitive''' (''cārūkire dirūnnevya'')

:: '''Translative''' (''najamarcūkire dirūnnevya'')

:: '''Translative''' (''najamarcūkire dirūnnevya'')

:: '''Exessive''' (''nenijamarcūkire dirūnnevya'')
:: '''Exessive''' (''nanijamarcūkire dirūnnevya'')
:: '''Essive''' (''jalausire dirūnnevya'')
:: '''Essive''' (''jalausire dirūnnevya'')
:: '''Dative''' (''męlyausire dirūnnevya'')
:: '''Dative''' (''męlyausire dirūnnevya'')
Line 25: Line 26:
There are a few nouns which lack number; a few are singularia tantum and lack a plural (e.g. ''hærūm'' lips), other ones are plural only - most notably these include all ethnicities (e.g. ''chlǣvānem'', which is also an irregular plural). The singular is made by using the genitive form attributed to ''lila'' (person), e.g. ''chlǣvānumi lila'' (a Chlouvānem).<br/>
There are a few nouns which lack number; a few are singularia tantum and lack a plural (e.g. ''hærūm'' lips), other ones are plural only - most notably these include all ethnicities (e.g. ''chlǣvānem'', which is also an irregular plural). The singular is made by using the genitive form attributed to ''lila'' (person), e.g. ''chlǣvānumi lila'' (a Chlouvānem).<br/>


Chlouvānem does not have grammatical gender, and there are only a few natural gender terms. There are thirteen different noun declensions, but most of them only have few small differences. Chlouvānem declensions are predictable from the ending of the direct case noun, and they're categorized depending on their endings as ''s-'', ''m-'', or ''h-nouns''<ref>These are the remnants of a former gender system present in Proto-Lahob, still evident in other Lahob languages; unlike others in the family, Chlouvānem did not become genderless because of losing gender marking on nouns, but because it lost concordance anywhere else.</ref>.
Chlouvānem does not have grammatical gender, and there are only a few natural gender terms. There are thirteen different noun declensions, but most of them only have few small differences. Chlouvānem declensions are predictable from the ending of the direct case noun, and they're categorized depending on their endings as ''s-'', ''m-'', or ''h-nouns''<ref>These are the remnants of a former gender system present in Proto-Lahob, still evident in other Lahob languages; unlike others in the family, Chlouvānem did not become genderless because of losing gender marking on nouns, but because it lost concordance anywhere else.</ref>: inside these broad categories, different declensions are distinguished by the thematic vowel of the suffix: ''a'', ''u'', or ''i'' for ''s-'' and ''m-nouns'', and ''a'', ''e'', ''u'', ''i'' for ''h-nouns''.


===S-nouns - Sasą lā halenī===
===S-nouns - Sasą lā halenī===
There are some traits which are common to all nominal declensions: the vocative is only distinct in the singular; in the dual there is also no distinction between translative and dative, essive and locative, and between exessive, ablative, and instrumental.
There are some traits which are common to all nominal declensions: the vocative is only distinct in the singular; in the dual there is also no distinction between translative and dative, essive and locative, and between exessive, ablative, and instrumental. In the plural, the exessive and ablative also share the same form, as do the essive plural and the ergative dual.
{{col-begin}}
{{col-begin}}
{{col-break}}
{{col-break}}
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
|+1-s (-as, -ās, -o<sup>1</sup>)
|+1-s (-as, -ās)
|-
|-
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
Line 52: Line 53:
|-
|-
! <small>Translative</small>
! <small>Translative</small>
| prātan || prātaus || prātyoh
| prātan || prātaus || prātāmān
|-
|-
! <small>Exessive</small>
! <small>Exessive</small>
| prātat || prātābhan || prātāmān
| prātat || prātābhan || prātenīs
|-
|-
! <small>Essive</small>
! <small>Essive</small>
| prātą || prātigin || prātēm
| prātą || prātigin || prātāya
|-
|-
! <small>Dative</small>
! <small>Dative</small>
Line 79: Line 80:
|-
|-
! <small>Direct</small>
! <small>Direct</small>
| '''kældus'''<br/><small>''"wax"''</small> || rowspan=2 | kældūt || rowspan=2 | kældaus
| '''haɂrus'''<br/><small>''"squid"''</small> || rowspan=2 | haɂrūt || rowspan=2 | haɂraus
|-
|-
! <small>Vocative</small>
! <small>Vocative</small>
| kældu
| haɂru
|-
|-
! <small>Accusative</small>
! <small>Accusative</small>
| kældavu || kældūṣa || kældavih
| haɂravu || haɂrūṣa || haɂravih
|-
|-
! <small>Ergative</small>
! <small>Ergative</small>
| kældave || kældūya || kældūn
| haɂrave || haɂrūya || haɂrūn
|-
|-
! <small>Genitive</small>
! <small>Genitive</small>
| kældavi || kældagva || kældǣmi
| haɂravi || haɂragva || haɂrǣmi
|-
|-
! <small>Translative</small>
! <small>Translative</small>
| kældun || kældugus || kælduyoh
| haɂrun || haɂrugus || haɂromān
|-
|-
! <small>Exessive</small>
! <small>Exessive</small>
| kældut || kældobhan || kældomān
| haɂrut || haɂrobhan || haɂruṇīs<sup>1</sup>
|-
|-
! <small>Essive</small>
! <small>Essive</small>
| kældą || kældugin || kældavēm
| haɂrą || haɂrugin || haɂrūya
|-
|-
! <small>Dative</small>
! <small>Dative</small>
| kældavom || kældugus || kældusām
| haɂravom || haɂrugus || haɂrusām
|-
|-
! <small>Ablative</small>
! <small>Ablative</small>
| kældų || kældobhan || kældunīs
| haɂrų || haɂrobhan || haɂruṇīs<sup>1</sup>
|-
|-
! <small>Locative</small>
! <small>Locative</small>
| kældave || kældugin || kældulīm
| haɂrave || haɂrugin || haɂrulīm
|-
|-
! <small>Instrumental</small>
! <small>Instrumental</small>
| kældup || kældobhan || kældunīka
| haɂrup || haɂrobhan || haɂruṇīka<sup>1</sup>
|}
|}
{{col-break}}
{{col-break}}
Line 136: Line 137:
|-
|-
! <small>Translative</small>
! <small>Translative</small>
| ḍhogin || ḍhogigus || ḍhogyoh
| ḍhogin || ḍhogigus || ḍhogemān
|-
|-
! <small>Exessive</small>
! <small>Exessive</small>
| ḍhogit || ḍhogebhan || ḍhogemān
| ḍhogit || ḍhogebhan || ḍhogenīs
|-
|-
! <small>Essive</small>
! <small>Essive</small>
| ḍhogę || ḍhogigin || ḍhogayēm
| ḍhogę || ḍhogigin || ḍhogīya
|-
|-
! <small>Dative</small>
! <small>Dative</small>
Line 158: Line 159:
{{col-end}}
{{col-end}}
Table notes:
Table notes:
# Mostly toponyms of Toyubeshian origin (e.g. ''Paramito'').
# The ending is ''-unīs/-unīka''; the '''n''' → '''''' shift is a case of regular saṃdhi.
Also note that modern borrowings ending in [s] typically add a further case ending, e.g. Skyrdagor ''valtasz'' (nunatak) becomes Chlouvānem ''valtasas'' (same meaning), declining as ''valtasau'', ''valtasu'', ''valtasei''...
Also note that modern borrowings ending in [s] typically add a further case ending, e.g. Skyrdagor ''valtasz'' (nunatak) becomes Chlouvānem ''valtasas'' (same meaning), declining as ''valtasau'', ''valtasu'', ''valtasei''...


===M- and N-nouns - Mamą naną no lā halenī===
===M-nouns - Mamą lā halenī===
{{col-begin}}
{{col-begin}}
{{col-break}}
{{col-break}}
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
|+1-m (-am, -ām, (-an, -ān, -en, -ēn))
|+1-m (-am, -ām)
|-
|-
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
|-
|-
! <small>Direct</small>
! <small>Direct</small>
| rowspan=2 | '''yujam'''<br/><small>''"lotus"''</small> || rowspan=2 | yujivā || rowspan=2 | yujāk
| '''yujam'''<br/><small>''"lotus"''</small> || rowspan=2 | yujivā || rowspan=2 | yujāk
|-
|-
! <small>Vocative</small>
! <small>Vocative</small>
| yujā
|-
|-
! <small>Accusative</small>
! <small>Accusative</small>
Line 184: Line 186:
|-
|-
! <small>Translative</small>
! <small>Translative</small>
| yujaman || yujmį || yujmēt
| yujaman || yujmį || yujamān
|-
|-
! <small>Exessive</small>
! <small>Exessive</small>
| yujamat || yujabhan || yujamān
| yujamat || yujabhan || yujmenīs
|-
|-
! <small>Essive</small>
! <small>Essive</small>
| yujmą || yujmenne || yujmēm
| yujmą || yujmenne || yujmyan
|-
|-
! <small>Dative</small>
! <small>Dative</small>
Line 206: Line 208:
{{col-break}}
{{col-break}}
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
|+2-m (-um, -ūm, (-un, -ūn))
|+2-m (-um, -ūm)
|-
|-
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
Line 226: Line 228:
|-
|-
! <small>Translative</small>
! <small>Translative</small>
| tūluman || tūlvį || tūlūt
| tūluman || tūlvį || tūlumān
|-
|-
! <small>Exessive</small>
! <small>Exessive</small>
| tūlumat || tūlubhan || tūlumān
| tūlumat || tūlubhan || tūlvenīs
|-
|-
! <small>Essive</small>
! <small>Essive</small>
| tūlų || tūlunne || tūlugēm
| tūlų || tūlunne || tūlvyan
|-
|-
! <small>Dative</small>
! <small>Dative</small>
Line 248: Line 250:
{{col-break}}
{{col-break}}
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
|+3-m (-im, -īm, (-in, -īn))
|+3-m (-im, -īm)
|-
|-
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
Line 268: Line 270:
|-
|-
! <small>Translative</small>
! <small>Translative</small>
| jāyiman || jāyį || jāyīt
| jāyiman || jāyį || jāyimān
|-
|-
! <small>Exessive</small>
! <small>Exessive</small>
| jāyimat || jāyibhan || jāyimān
| jāyimat || jāyibhan || jājñenīs<sup>1</sup>
|-
|-
! <small>Essive</small>
! <small>Essive</small>
| jāyį || jāyinne || jājñēm<sup>1</sup>
| jāyį || jāyinne || jāyiyan
|-
|-
! <small>Dative</small>
! <small>Dative</small>
Line 289: Line 291:
|}
|}
{{col-end}}
{{col-end}}
{
Table notes:
# Such forms with ''-jñ-'' are underlyingly ''-y-y-'' (e.g. ''jāy-y-es'' → ''jājñes'').
===H-nouns - Hahą lā halenī===
{{col-begin}}
{{col-begin}}
{{col-break}}
{{col-break}}
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
|+1-m (n-paradigm)
|+1-h (-a, -ā, (-ah, -āh), -o<sup>1</sup>)
|-
|-
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
|-
|-
! <small>Direct</small>
! <small>Direct</small>
| rowspan=2 | '''lilvan'''<br/><small>''"sash, belt"''</small> || rowspan=2 | lilvivā || rowspan=2 | lilvan
| '''māra'''<br/><small>''"mango"''</small> || rowspan=2 | mārāt || rowspan=2 | mārai
|-
|-
! <small>Vocative</small>
! <small>Vocative</small>
| māre
|-
|-
! <small>Accusative</small>
! <small>Accusative</small>
| lilvanu || lilunes<sup>2</sup> || lilunaih<sup>2</sup>
| māru || mārāṣa || māraih
|-
|-
! <small>Ergative</small>
! <small>Ergative</small>
| lilunæ<sup>2</sup> || lilunian<sup>2</sup> || lilvanūn
| mārei || mārāra || mārān
|-
|-
! <small>Genitive</small>
! <small>Genitive</small>
| lilvani || liluneva<sup>2</sup> || lilvaṃrān
| māri<sup>2</sup> || māreva || mārumi
|-
|-
! <small>Translative</small>
! <small>Translative</small>
| lilvanan || lilunį<sup>2</sup> || lilunēt<sup>2</sup>
| māran || mārarį || māremān
|-
|-
! <small>Exessive</small>
! <small>Exessive</small>
| lilvanat || lilvabhan || lilvanān
| mārat || mārabhan || mārenīs
|-
|-
! <small>Essive</small>
! <small>Essive</small>
| liluną<sup>2</sup> || lilunenne<sup>2</sup> || lilunēm<sup>2</sup>
| māręs || māranne || mārāra
|-
|-
! <small>Dative</small>
! <small>Dative</small>
| lilvanom || lilunį<sup>2</sup> || lilvaṃsām
| mārom || mārarį || māresām
|-
|-
! <small>Ablative</small>
! <small>Ablative</small>
| lilvanų || lilvabhan || lilunenīs<sup>2</sup>
| mārų || mārabhan || mārenīs
|-
|-
! <small>Locative</small>
! <small>Locative</small>
| lilvaṃrye || lilunenne<sup>2</sup> || lilunilīm<sup>2</sup>
| māre || māranne || mārelīm
|-
|-
! <small>Instrumental</small>
! <small>Instrumental</small>
| lilvanap || lilvabhan || lilvaṃrīka
| mārap || mārabhan || mārenīka
|}
|}
{{col-break|valign=middle|gap=1em}}
The ''n-paradigms'' follow the exact same rules as the corresponding ''m-'' ones, with the exception of having the direct plural identical to the singular. All other inflections (including the dual) are the same as the other nouns. Thus e.g. '''samin''' may be either ''child'' or ''children'', and it is usually the verb that marks the number - compare ''samin mālchē'' "the kid runs" and ''samin mālchāhai'' "the kids run". They are de facto undistinguishable out of context in forms where singular and plural have the same verb form, e.g. in the perfect - ''samin amālcha'' can mean either "the kid has run" or "the kids have run" depending on context.
The noun ''yaltan'' (the currency of the Chlouvānem Inquisition) has, outside of legal texts, an irregularity in the exessive singular, being ''yaltat'' instead of ''yaltanat'' (the latter, regular form is used in very formal styles). This shortening arose in one of its most common uses, the exessive case used to state an amount paid, as in e.g. ''māmei yalta(na)t ulgutaṃte'' "I bought it for twelve yaltan."
{{col-end}}
Table notes:
# Such forms with ''-jñ-'' are underlyingly ''-y-y-'' (e.g. ''jāy-y-es'' → ''jājñes'').
# This stem is the result of regular saṃdhi, i.e. *lilvn- → ''lilun-''.
===H-nouns - Hahą lā halenī===
{{col-begin}}
{{col-break}}
{{col-break}}
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
|+1-h (-a, -ā, (-ah, -āh))
|+2-h (-ē, -eh, -ǣh<sup>3</sup>)
|-
|-
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
|-
|-
! <small>Direct</small>
! <small>Direct</small>
| '''māra'''<br/><small>''"mango"''</small> || rowspan=2 | mārāt || rowspan=2 | mārai
| '''javileh'''<br/><small>''"apple"''</small> || rowspan=2 | javilyāt || rowspan=2 | javilyai
|-
|-
! <small>Vocative</small>
! <small>Vocative</small>
| māre
| javilei
|-
|-
! <small>Accusative</small>
! <small>Accusative</small>
| māru || mārāṣa || māraih
| javilyu || javilēṣa || javileih
|-
|-
! <small>Ergative</small>
! <small>Ergative</small>
| mārei || mārāra || mārān
| javilei || javilyāra || javilyān
|-
|-
! <small>Genitive</small>
! <small>Genitive</small>
| māri<sup>1</sup> || māreva || mārumi
| javili || javileva<sup>4</sup> || javilyumi
|-
|-
! <small>Translative</small>
! <small>Translative</small>
| māran || mārarį || mārēt
| javilen || javilerį || javilemān
|-
|-
! <small>Exessive</small>
! <small>Exessive</small>
| mārat || mārabhan || māremān
| javilet || javilebhan || javilenīs
|-
|-
! <small>Essive</small>
! <small>Essive</small>
| māręs || māranne || mārēm
| javilęs || javilenne || javilyāra
|-
|-
! <small>Dative</small>
! <small>Dative</small>
| mārom || mārarį || māresām
| javilyom || javilerį || javilesām
|-
|-
! <small>Ablative</small>
! <small>Ablative</small>
| mārų || mārabhan || mārenīs
| javilyų || javilebhan || javilenīs
|-
|-
! <small>Locative</small>
! <small>Locative</small>
| māre || māranne || mārelīm
| javilye || javilenne || javilelīm
|-
|-
! <small>Instrumental</small>
! <small>Instrumental</small>
| mārap || mārabhan || mārenīka
| javilep || javilebhan || javilenīka
|}
|}
{{col-break}}
{{col-break}}
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
|+2-h (-ē, -eh, -ǣh<sup>2</sup>)
|+3-h (-uh, -ūh, -u<sup>5</sup>)
|-
|-
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
|-
|-
! <small>Direct</small>
! <small>Direct</small>
| '''javileh'''<br/><small>''"apple"''</small> || rowspan=2 | javilyāt || rowspan=2 | javilyai
| '''ñaɂuh'''<br/><small>''"fruit skin"''</small> || rowspan=2 | ñaɂūt || rowspan=2 | ñaɂūvi
|-
|-
! <small>Vocative</small>
! <small>Vocative</small>
| javilei
| ñaɂū
|-
|-
! <small>Accusative</small>
! <small>Accusative</small>
| javilyu || javilēṣa || javileih
| ñaɂunu || ñaɂūṣa || ñaɂuyih
|-
|-
! <small>Ergative</small>
! <small>Ergative</small>
| javilei || javilyāra || javilyān
| ñaɂuyei || ñaɂura || ñaɂun
|-
|-
! <small>Genitive</small>
! <small>Genitive</small>
| javili || javileva<sup>3</sup> || javilyumi
| ñaɂuyi || ñaɂuva || ñaɂūmi
|-
|-
! <small>Translative</small>
! <small>Translative</small>
| javilen || javilerį || javilēt
| ñaɂun || ñaɂurį || ñaɂumān
|-
|-
! <small>Exessive</small>
! <small>Exessive</small>
| javilet || javilebhan || javilemān
| ñaɂut || ñaɂubhan || ñaɂunīs
|-
|-
! <small>Essive</small>
! <small>Essive</small>
| javilęs || javilenne || javilēm
| ñaɂųs || ñaɂunne || ñaɂura
|-
|-
! <small>Dative</small>
! <small>Dative</small>
| javilyom || javilerį || javilesām
| ñaɂuvom || ñaɂurį || ñaɂusām
|-
|-
! <small>Ablative</small>
! <small>Ablative</small>
| javilių || javilebhan || javilenīs
| ñaɂuvų || ñaɂubhan || ñaɂunīs
|-
|-
! <small>Locative</small>
! <small>Locative</small>
| javilye || javilenne || javilelīm
| ñaɂuve || ñaɂunne || ñaɂulīm
|-
|-
! <small>Instrumental</small>
! <small>Instrumental</small>
| javilep || javilebhan || javilenīka
| ñaɂup || ñaɂubhan || ñaɂunīka
|}
|}
{{col-break}}
{{col-break}}
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
|+3-h (-uh, -ūh, -u<sup>4</sup>)
|+4-m (-ih, -īh, -i<sup>6</sup>)
|-
|-
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
|-
|-
! <small>Direct</small>
! <small>Direct</small>
| '''ñaɂuh'''<br/><small>''"fruit skin"''</small> || rowspan=2 | ñaɂūt || rowspan=2 | ñaɂūvi
| '''ghārṭih'''<br/><small>''"arrow"''</small> || rowspan=2 | ghārṭīt || rowspan=2 | ghārṭeyi
|-
|-
! <small>Vocative</small>
! <small>Vocative</small>
| ñaɂū
| ghārṭī
|-
|-
! <small>Accusative</small>
! <small>Accusative</small>
| ñaɂunu || ñaɂūṣa || ñaɂuyih
| ghārṭyu || ghārṭīṣa || ghārṭeyih
|-
|-
! <small>Ergative</small>
! <small>Ergative</small>
| ñaɂuyei || ñaɂura || ñaɂun
| ghārṭyei || ghārṭira || ghārṭin
|-
|-
! <small>Genitive</small>
! <small>Genitive</small>
| ñaɂuyi || ñaɂuva || ñaɂūmi
| ghārṭīyi || ghārṭiva || ghārṭyumi
|-
|-
! <small>Translative</small>
! <small>Translative</small>
| ñaɂun || ñaɂurį || ñaɂūt
| ghārṭin || ghārṭirį || ghārṭimān
|-
|-
! <small>Exessive</small>
! <small>Exessive</small>
| ñaɂut || ñaɂubhan || ñaɂumān
| ghārṭit || ghārṭibhan || ghārṭinīs
|-
|-
! <small>Essive</small>
! <small>Essive</small>
| ñaɂųs || ñaɂunne || ñaɂugem
| ghārṭįs || ghārṭinne || ghārṭira
|-
|-
! <small>Dative</small>
! <small>Dative</small>
| ñaɂuvom || ñaɂurį || ñaɂusām
| ghārṭyom || ghārṭirį || ghārṭisām
|-
|-
! <small>Ablative</small>
! <small>Ablative</small>
| ñaɂųu || ñaɂubhan || ñaɂunīs
| ghārṭyų || ghārṭibhan || ghārṭinīs
|-
|-
! <small>Locative</small>
! <small>Locative</small>
| ñaɂuve || ñaɂunne || ñaɂulīm
| ghārṭye || ghārṭinne || ghārṭilīm
|-
|-
! <small>Instrumental</small>
! <small>Instrumental</small>
| ñaɂup || ñaɂubhan || ñaɂunīka
| ghārṭip || ghārṭibhan || ghārṭinīka
|}
|}
{{col-end}}
{{col-begin}}
{{col-break}}
{{col-break}}
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
|+4-m (-ih, -īh, -i<sup>5</sup>)
|+1-h (h-paradigm)
|-
|-
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
|-
|-
! <small>Direct</small>
! <small>Direct</small>
| '''ghārṭih'''<br/><small>''"arrow"''</small> || rowspan=2 | ghārṭīt || rowspan=2 | ghārṭeyi
| '''raiṇah'''<br/><small>''"(piece of) cloth"''</small> || rowspan=2 | raiṇāt || rowspan=2 | raiṇai
|-
|-
! <small>Vocative</small>
! <small>Vocative</small>
| ghārṭī
| raiṇe
|-
|-
! <small>Accusative</small>
! <small>Accusative</small>
| ghārṭyu || ghārṭīṣa || ghārṭeyih
| raiṇu || raiṇāṣa || raiṇaih
|-
|-
! <small>Ergative</small>
! <small>Ergative</small>
| ghārṭyei || ghārṭira || ghārṭin
| raiṇei || raiṇāra || raiṇān
|-
|-
! <small>Genitive</small>
! <small>Genitive</small>
| ghārṭīyi || ghārṭiva || ghārṭyumi
| raiṇi<sup>2</sup> || raiṇeva || raiṇumi
|-
|-
! <small>Translative</small>
! <small>Translative</small>
| ghārṭin || ghārṭirį || ghārṭīt
| raiṇan || raiṇarį || raiṇamān
|-
|-
! <small>Exessive</small>
! <small>Exessive</small>
| ghārṭit || ghārṭibhan || ghārṭimān
| raiṇat || raiṇabhan || raiṇenīs
|-
|-
! <small>Essive</small>
! <small>Essive</small>
| ghārṭįs || ghārṭinne || ghārṭiyem
| raiṇęs || raiṇanne || raiṇāra
|-
|-
! <small>Dative</small>
! <small>Dative</small>
| ghārṭyom || ghārṭirį || ghārṭisām
| raiṇom || raiṇarį || raiṇasām
|-
|-
! <small>Ablative</small>
! <small>Ablative</small>
| ghārṭyų || ghārṭibhan || ghārṭinīs
| raiṇų || raiṇabhan || raiṇanīs
|-
|-
! <small>Locative</small>
! <small>Locative</small>
| ghārṭye || ghārṭinne || ghārṭilīm
| raiṇe || raiṇanne || raiṇalīm
|-
|-
! <small>Instrumental</small>
! <small>Instrumental</small>
| ghārṭip || ghārṭibhan || ghārṭinīka
| raiṇap || raiṇabhan || raiṇanīka
|}
|}
{{col-break|valign=middle|gap=1em}}
The ''h-paradigm'' used by nouns in ''-ah'' and ''-āh'' is substantially identical to the regular 1-h one, except for the exessive, dative, ablative, locative, and instrumental plural which have ''-a-'' instead of ''-e-'' as a linking vowel and, for some nouns, the genitive singular ''(see table note 2)''.
{{col-end}}
{{col-end}}
Table notes:
# ''-o'' nouns are mostly toponyms of Toyubeshian origins; they decline like ''-a'' nouns, with their ending being treated as *-a-u, with the -a part of the stem; e.g. ''Paramito'', locative ''Paramitai'' (underlying form Paramit-a-e).
# ''-ya'', and ''-yā'' nouns form the genitive singular in ''-ei'' (e.g. ''lalyā'' "night" → ''lalei''). Nouns in ''-yah'', and ''-yāh'', however, have the regular ending (e.g. ''yamyah'' "fog" → ''yamyi'').
# All ''-ǣh'' nouns are of Lällshag origin, and are mostly toponyms (like ''Laikunanǣh''), with some exceptions like the two lunar days ''kælyaunænǣh'' and ''yeicapænǣh''. Note that such nouns have their genitive singular in ''-ǣyi'' and not in ''-ī''.
# In older texts ''-eiva'' (e.g. ''javileiva''), today only used in literature for an archaïzing effect or to mark a character speaking with a Northern Plain pronunciation (where this form survives in the spoken language).
# Mostly regional Western words of Dabuke origin.
# Non-productive with borrowings, but common in native words.
===Special declensions===
{{col-begin}}
{{col-begin}}
{{col-break}}
{{col-break}}
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
|+1-h (h-paradigm)
|+Ablaut declension
|-
|-
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
|-
|-
! <small>Direct</small>
! <small>Direct</small>
| '''raiṇah'''<br/><small>''"(piece of) cloth"''</small> || rowspan=2 | raiṇāt || rowspan=2 | raiṇai
| rowspan=2 | '''lila'''<br/><small>''"person"''</small> || rowspan=2 | lilāt || rowspan=2 | lelyē
|-
|-
! <small>Vocative</small>
! <small>Vocative</small>
| raiṇe
|-
|-
! <small>Accusative</small>
! <small>Accusative</small>
| raiṇu || raiṇāṣa || raiṇaih
| lilu || lilāṣa || lelyu
|-
|-
! <small>Ergative</small>
! <small>Ergative</small>
| raiṇei || raiṇāra || raiṇān
| lilei || lilāra || lelyei
|-
|-
! <small>Genitive</small>
! <small>Genitive</small>
| raiṇi<sup>1</sup> || raiṇeva || raiṇumi
| leli || lileva || laili
|-
|-
! <small>Translative</small>
! <small>Translative</small>
| raiṇan || raiṇarį || raiṇēt
| lilan || lilarį || lelyan
|-
|-
! <small>Exessive</small>
! <small>Exessive</small>
| raiṇat || raiṇabhan || raiṇamān
| lilat || lilabhan || lelyat
|-
|-
! <small>Essive</small>
! <small>Essive</small>
| raiṇęs || raiṇanne || raiṇēm
| liląs || lilanne || lailąs
|-
|-
! <small>Dative</small>
! <small>Dative</small>
| raiṇom || raiṇarį || raiṇasām
| lilom || lilarį || lelyom
|-
|-
! <small>Ablative</small>
! <small>Ablative</small>
| raiṇų || raiṇabhan || raiṇanīs
| lilų || lilabhan || lelyų
|-
|-
! <small>Locative</small>
! <small>Locative</small>
| raiṇe || raiṇanne || raiṇalīm
| lile || lilanne || laile
|-
|-
! <small>Instrumental</small>
! <small>Instrumental</small>
| raiṇap || raiṇabhan || raiṇanīka
| lilap || lilabhan || lelyap
|}
|}
{{col-break|valign=middle|gap=1em}}
The ''h-paradigm'' used by nouns in ''-ah'' and ''-āh'' is substantially identical to the regular 1-h one, except for the exessive, dative, ablative, locative, and instrumental plural which have ''-a-'' instead of ''-e-'' as a linking vowel and, for some nouns, the genitive singular ''(see table note 1)''.
{{col-end}}
Table notes:
# ''-ya'', and ''-yā'' nouns form the genitive singular in ''-ei'' (e.g. ''lalyā'' "night" → ''lalei''). Nouns in ''-yah'', and ''-yāh'', however, have the regular ending (e.g. ''yamyah'' "fog" → ''yamyi'').
# All ''-ǣh'' nouns are of Lällshag origin, and are mostly toponyms (like ''Laikunanǣh''), with some exceptions like the two lunar days ''kælyaunænǣh'' and ''yeicapænǣh''. Note that such nouns have their genitive singular in ''-ǣyi'' and not in ''-ī''.
# In older texts ''-eiva'' (e.g. ''javileiva''), today only used in literature for an archaïzing effect or to mark a character speaking with a Northern Plain pronunciation (where this form survives in the spoken language).
# Mostly regional Western words of Dabuke origin.
# Non-productive with borrowings, but common in native words.
===Special declensions===
{{col-begin}}
{{col-break}}
{{col-break}}
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
|+Ablaut declension
|+-oe declension
|-
|-
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
|-
|-
! <small>Direct</small>
! <small>Direct</small>
| rowspan=2 | '''lila'''<br/><small>''"person"''</small> || rowspan=2 | lilāt || rowspan=2 | lelyē
| rowspan=2 | '''haloe'''<br/><small>''"name"''</small> || rowspan=2 | halenāt || rowspan=2 | halenī
|-
|-
! <small>Vocative</small>
! <small>Vocative</small>
|-
|-
! <small>Accusative</small>
! <small>Accusative</small>
| lilu || lilāṣa || lelyu
| halenu || halenāṣa || halenaih
|-
|-
! <small>Ergative</small>
! <small>Ergative</small>
| lilei || lilāra || lelyei
| halenei || halenāya || halenān
|-
|-
! <small>Genitive</small>
! <small>Genitive</small>
| leli || lileva || laili
| haleni || halemva || haloemi
|-
|-
! <small>Translative</small>
! <small>Translative</small>
| lilan || lilarį || lelyan
| halenan || halenaus || haloemān
|-
|-
! <small>Exessive</small>
! <small>Exessive</small>
| lilat || lilabhan || lelyat
| halenat || haloebhan || haloenīs
|-
|-
! <small>Essive</small>
! <small>Essive</small>
| liląs || lilanne || lailąs
| halen || haloegin || halenāya
|-
|-
! <small>Dative</small>
! <small>Dative</small>
| lilom || lilarį || lelyom
| halenom || halenaus || haloesām
|-
|-
! <small>Ablative</small>
! <small>Ablative</small>
| lilų || lilabhan || lelyų
| halenų || haloebhan || haloenīs
|-
|-
! <small>Locative</small>
! <small>Locative</small>
| lile || lilanne || laile
| halenye || haloegin || halenilīm
|-
|-
! <small>Instrumental</small>
! <small>Instrumental</small>
| lilap || lilabhan || lelyap
| halenap || haloebhan || haloenīka
|}
|}
{{col-break}}
{{col-break}}
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
|+-oe declension
|+-ai declension
|-
|-
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
|-
|-
! <small>Direct</small>
! <small>Direct</small>
| rowspan=2 | '''haloe'''<br/><small>''"name"''</small> || rowspan=2 | halenāt || rowspan=2 | halenī
| rowspan=2 | '''lunai'''<br/><small>''"tea"''</small> || rowspan=2 | lunaiva || rowspan=2 | lunāye
|-
|-
! <small>Vocative</small>
! <small>Vocative</small>
|-
|-
! <small>Accusative</small>
! <small>Accusative</small>
| halenu || halenāṣa || halenaih
| lunāyu || lunāyes || lunāyaih
|-
|-
! <small>Ergative</small>
! <small>Ergative</small>
| halenei || halenāya || halenān
| lunǣ || lunāyēn || lunāyūn
|-
|-
! <small>Genitive</small>
! <small>Genitive</small>
| halenyes || halemva || haloemi
| lunāyi || lunaiva || lunāyān
|-
|-
! <small>Translative</small>
! <small>Translative</small>
| halenan || halenaus || halenyoh
| lunain || lunāyį || lunaimān
|-
|-
! <small>Exessive</small>
! <small>Exessive</small>
| halenat || haloebhan || haloemān
| lunait || lunaibhan || lunǣnīs
|-
|-
! <small>Essive</small>
! <small>Essive</small>
| halen || haloegin || haloem
| lunąis || lunainne || lunāyēn
|-
|-
! <small>Dative</small>
! <small>Dative</small>
| halenom || halenaus || haloesām
| lunāyom || lunāyį || lunaisām
|-
|-
! <small>Ablative</small>
! <small>Ablative</small>
| halenų || haloebhan || haloenīs
| lunāyų || lunaibhan || lunǣnīs
|-
|-
! <small>Locative</small>
! <small>Locative</small>
| halenye || haloegin || halenilīm
| lunāye || lunainne || lunailīm
|-
|-
! <small>Instrumental</small>
! <small>Instrumental</small>
| halenap || haloebhan || haloenīka
| lunaip || lunaibhan || lunainīka
|}
|}
{{col-break}}
{{col-end}}
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
The ablaut declension is in the singular (except for the vocative and essive) and dual the same as the 1-h one, including the ''-ei'' rule for the genitive singular (e.g. ''rinya'' "ceiling", gen.sg. ''renei''), except for the fact that the genitive singular has a middle-grade vowel. The plural has mostly the same endings as the singular but with middle-grade vowels in most forms (genitive, essive, and locative have a higher-grade one). ''-y-'' is inserted between the stem and the ending, but not for nouns ending in ''-ya'' (''rinya'' → ''renyē'').<br/>
|+-ai declension
The vowel that undergoes ablaut is usually the penultimate (e.g. ''plušamila'' "Office of the Inquisition", plural ''plušamelyē''), but in some cases it's the first (e.g. ''kimeda'' (a type of panther), plural ''kemedyē'').
|-
 
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
Hypocoristic forms of male names, which end in ''-em'' and are only used in the singular, are declined following a mix of the 1-m and 1-h patterns. In fact, they follow the 1-m pattern (the ''-am'' paradigm) except for the ergative (in ''-emei'' instead of *-(e)mæ) and the essive (in ''-ęs'' instead of *-(e)mą). For example the hypocoristicon ''Kælem'' has ergative ''Kælemei'' and essive ''Kælęs''.
|-
 
! <small>Direct</small>
===Singularia and pluralia tantum===
| rowspan=2 | '''lunai'''<br/><small>''"tea"''</small> || rowspan=2 | lunaiva || rowspan=2 | lunāye
'''Pluralia tantum''' in Chlouvānem include the following words or categories of words:
|-
# many collective nouns:

! <small>Vocative</small>
#: ''pārāk'' "hair", ''kāraṇḍhai'' "guts", ''yūgure'' "limbs", ''agṇyaucai'' "sons and daughters", ''vailašaus'' "cutlery", ''šūlyakāše'' "dishes"
|-
# things that are heterogeneous in form but considered as a single entity:
! <small>Accusative</small>
#: ''katanai'' "clutter", ''dūḍhvai'' "banquet, buffet", ''vārṇaigīk'' (a type of sandals made from straw rope), ''ḍheṃlatiryai'' "streaming"<ref>The word ''latiryai'' is the plural of ''latirē'' (wave, ray), but this compound does not have a singular form.</ref>, ''ltælime'' "magic", ''ṣrūḍhais'' "savings", ''dāyārṣe'' "resin", ''ḍåtvāk'' "fat", ''tadmāltsāk'' "controller"
| lunāyu || lunāyes || lunāyaih
# certain actions and processes that involve multiple people:
|-
#: ''vāgdilanai'' "elections", ''viṣlonai'' "protest, riot", ''jāṃrice'' "traffic jam", ''grembātatālunai'' "hide-and-seek" (sometimes also found as dual)
! <small>Ergative</small>
# nouns denoting certain time spans, festivals, or holidays:
| lunǣ || lunāyēn || lunāyūn
#: ''saṃlallai'' "afternoon", ''Bhaivyāvāṣaryai'' (the most important Yunyalīlti festivity), ''Kūlħanarai'' (a winter festival of Kenengyry origin)
|-
# a few illnesses and health conditions or disorders:
! <small>Genitive</small>
#: ''nirganai'' "urticaria", ''nañvai'' "autism", ''paṣadårbhai'' "influenza"
| lunāyi || lunaiva || lunāyān
# some locations, including large delimited areas as well as many toponyms:
|-
#: ''aryai'' "square", ''cahåtaibāk'' "tropics"
! <small>Translative</small>
#: ''Rīkalīnai'', ''Mūnnakṣalte''
| lunain || lunāyį || lunāyēt
# all ethnonyms:
|-
#: ''chlǣvānem'' "Chlouvānem", ''ṣurṭāgyai'' "Skyrdegan(s)", ''bronyai'' "Bronic(s)", ''sairghīṭyai'' "Cerian(s)", ''nivrahīrai'' "Nivarese"                                                
! <small>Exessive</small>
A few nouns do not have a singular, but can have a dual and a plural form. Their citation form is usually the dual:
| lunait || lunaibhan || lunaimān
: ''maihadhūt'' "parents", ''grembātatālunāt'' "hide-and-seek" (most commonly a plurale tantum)
|-
Counted among pluralia tantums are certain words which are not defective in number, but whose plural forms have an additional meaning alongside the one of the singular form, like in the following examples:
! <small>Essive</small>
: ''hamvyenī'' "nursery" (''hamvyoe'' "cradle"), ''įsmirte'' "playground" (''įsmirtas'' "swing"), ''nacai'' "clothes" (''naca'' "cloth"), ''garaṇai'' "clock, watch" (''garaṇa'' "hour), ''lairusī'' "galaxy" (''lairē'' "sky, air"), ''ilēneyi'' "universe" (''ilēni'' "space, invisible sky").
| lunąis || lunainne || lunaigem
Unlike ethnonyms, nouns formed with the suffix ''-yūs'', generally identifying a person from a certain city (e.g. ''līlasuṃghāṇyūs'', ''ajāɂilbādhyūs'') – but note ''yacvānyūs'' "Westerner" – are not pluralia tantum and have regularly-formed plurals (in ''-yaus'').
 
Some words are '''singularia tantum''':
# many collective nouns:
#: ''nūlastām'' "money", ''maula'' "breasts [pair of]", ''mæchlišam'' "leafy greens" (and particular types, e.g. ''mæcichā'' "spinach), ''bågras'' "legumes" (and particular types, e.g. ''dīlla'' "peas", ''mahīra'' "lentils"), ''lāsīm'' "cereals", ''båltis'' "free time"
# feelings and sensations:
#: ''lācāh'' "romantic love", ''læchlyoe'' "fun", ''ǣlna'' "sadness"
# nouns denoting certain uncountable things:
#: ''paɂeh'' "dust", ''kanai'' "spices", ''nāmvāvi'' "powder, dust made from crushing something", ''ḍolam'' "ice", ''narmis'' "ash"
# certain illnesses and health conditions:
#: ''badarauga'' "blue plague", ''kloppa'' "cough" (cf. pluralizable ''kloppukāram'' "a single instance of coughing"), ''nadirṣas'' "runny nose"
# proper nouns referring to certain concepts:
#: ''yunya'', ''lillamurḍhyā'', ''mulipenai'' "the Eastern Bloc's 'Internet'", ''tulbaiganim'' "the Eastern Bloc's 'Olympics'"
#: individual sports, such as ''tēyakaitsūh'', ''ḍaṣaras'', ''lairhiṃħa'', ''yalkhaitah''
#: cardinal points, ''pūrjayuñca'' "North", ''nalejñuñca'' "East"..., including relative ones such as ''smrāṇyuñca'' "upstream" or ''memājñuñca'' "downstream"
#: musical genres, such as ''laneika'', ''mūṃjas'', ''kerachomā'', ''tūnisus''
#: specialistic terminology made with suffixes and related to sciences (''-tarlā'', ''-nātra''), diseases (''-ræṣka'', ''-yūtam'', ''-ītsun'', ''-gulas''), and political/philosophical currents (''-nātra'', ''-lija'')
# Most toponyms:
#: ''Murkadhānāvi'' "the Inquisition", ''Kaiṣamā'', ''Ṣurṭāgah'' "Skyrdagor", ''Sairghīṭa'' "Ceria", ''Kuyugvajitava'' "Kŭyŭgwažtov"
 
===Irregular plurals===
A few Chlouvānem nouns have irregular plurals:
* The word ''chlǣvānem'' itself is plural-only (like all ethnonyms) and irregular; direct and vocative are in ''-em'', but all other cases decline as a standard plural 1h noun (e.g. accusative ''chlǣvānānu'', ergative ''chlǣvānān'', genitive ''chlǣvānumi'');
* ''hulineh'' "woman" has the suppletive plural ''hulūne'' "women", which is declined as a regular 1s declension noun.
* ''maila'' “water” does not have a dual form outside of colloquial use (where ''mailāt'' is used with the meaning of “two glasses of water”) and has the irregular plural ''mailusī'', declined as the plural of an ''-oe'' noun, with ''-us-'' instead of ''-en-'' or ''-oe-'' throughout the declension (but note genitive ''mailūsmi'' and not ''mailusmi''). This plural form is actually common, used when talking about bodies of water in an area, water layers, glasses of water, and a few minor idiomatic uses (e.g. ''taili mailusilīm hilælulke'', lit. “to arrive by crossing many waters”, meaning “to have had much experience”).<br/>The ''-usī'' semantic plural is also used for the word ''damītah'' when used for "petals" (''damītusī''; the meaning of "nails" has the regular plural ''damītai''), and ''lairē'' (''lairusī'', which does not mean "skies" or "days" but "galaxy").
* Nouns with non-standard final endings (except ''chlǣvānem'') are declined by unpacking the vowel through regular saṃdhi and applying the resulting declension to the newfound root, with regular saṃdhi. The most common such nouns are ''gos'' "ford, crossing of a small river" (ga-us; gen.sg. ''ge'' (ga-i), pl. ''gaus'' (ga-aus)) and ''khaim'' "goose" (khā-im; pl. ''khaik'' (khā-īk)).
* ''švas'' "animal (including humans)" pluralizes as ''švai'', as if it were a h-noun; all cases except for direct and vocative are however regular.
 
===Irregular vocatives===
Five very common words have common, irregular, vocative forms:
* ''ñæltah'' "(male's) sister" — ''ñæli'' or ''ñæl''
* ''glūkam'' "(female's) brother" — ''galū''
* ''meinā'' "mother" — ''mā'' or ''mē''
* ''bunā'' "father" — ''bā'' or ''vā''
* ''udhyāras'' "Comrade" — ''udhyā'' (rarely ''udhyār'')
 
===Use of the plural===
Chlouvānem sometimes uses the singular in contexts where English uses the plural:
* Nouns are always singular after numerals (except, optionally, ''dani'' (two), which they can also be dual after), ''sora'' (some), ''grāṇa'' (any), ''gu'' (no), ''guviṣam'' (no other), ''taili'' (many, much), ''širē'' (more), ''kaili'' (most), and ''ṣubha'' (few, little).
** After ''yaiva'', the difference in the noun's number expresses a distinction much like the one between English "every" and "all": ''yaiva kita'' "every house", ''yaiva kitai'' "all houses".
* When referring to existence or availability of something, that something is always singular, e.g. ''dvārma širēmįs virā'' "there are chairs in the room". It may be plural if topicalized, but the overall meaning of the sentence changes - e.g. ''širēmeyi mæn dvārma virā'' "the chairs are in the room".
* When referring to a single person, ''dhāna'' (hand), ''mešīn'' (eye), and ''minnūlya'' (ear), and often also ''junai'' (foot) (more rarely for ''pājya'' (leg) and ''molnya'' (arm)) are typically singular and not dual - e.g. ''nanau mešīp mešute'' "I see it with my eyes" (lit. "with my eye"). In fact, they might be translated as "a person's hands/eyes/ears", given that dual forms are often used to mean e.g. "both hands of two people" and the plural ones for e.g. "many people's hands".
* ''junyoe'' (indoor slippers), ''rapūda'' ((thick) shoes), ''mæska'' (boots), and all types of shoes are also used in the singular to refer to a pair of them. The main exception is ''varṇaigīk'' (straw rope sandals), which is a plurale tantum.
Duals and plurals of given names have the meaning of an associative plural, i.e. ''Kālomījñai'' "Kālomīyeh and people in/of her group".
 
==Verbs (''daradhaus'')==
: ''Main article: [[Chlouvānem/Verbs|Chlouvānem verbs]]''
 
The Chlouvānem verb (''daradhūs'', pl. ''daradhaus'') is the most inflected part of speech; its most basic forms are fusional, but many more specific formations are more agglutinative due to their origin from old Proto-Lahob particles or participles.
 
==Pronouns (''hailihalenī'')==
The system of personal pronouns of modern Standard Chlouvānem is quite complex due to the honorific system. In modern Chlouvānem, the category of "pronouns" isn't actually syntactically differentiated from other nouns (except for being used anaphorically), and only some of them - the inherited pronouns from Proto-Lahob and Archaic Chlouvānem - follow a declension different from the one of nouns.
 
The main reason for the complexity of the pronominal system is that there are many possible variants for each person, depending on the formality of the context, the two-way rank difference between speaker and listener, or the three-way rank difference between the speaker, the listener, and the addressee. Some particular forms are also chosen depending on gender.
 
The fact that there is no syntactical difference between the morphological pronouns and those that are nouns also means that every word used pronominally, including given names, requires that person's verbal concord, i.e. a given name used as a second-person pronoun will be used in concordance with a second-person verb. In the following list, words not marked as being inflected according to pronominal declension are inflected as nouns. However, '''yamei''' and '''lāma''' are honorific adpositions which do not decline; the title or given name used with them declines instead.
 
===List of personal pronouns and pronoun-equivalents===
====First person singular (I, me)====
* '''lili''' (pronominal declension): the morphological inherited pronoun and the most neutral. It is overall the most used, especially in the non-direct cases, but there are alternatives for very informal, childish, slang, and humble speech.
* '''emmā''': the humble speech word for "person", sometimes used in humble speech.
* '''demi''' (pronominal declension): literally "oneself", the reflexive pronoun; used in informal speech but conveying a sense of distance.
* Given name: used in childish speech and in certain slang forms, considered rude or uneducated otherwise.
* '''lilyā hulineh''': literally "my woman", informal or semi-formal, implies superiority.
* '''paralonį emmā''': literally "the person [humble] who is a disciple" or "I, [your] disciple". Used almost exclusively in writing, by students or pupils when talking to their professors or teachers.
* '''lilyā jāyim''' (in Archaic Chlouvānem only); literally "my girl", implying humbleness. Notably used by the Chlamiṣvatrā to refer to herself throughout the Holy Books.
 
====Second person singular (You)====
* Given name plus '''lāma''': the general polite form. '''lāma''' can be replaced by an appropriate title.
* '''yamei''' + given name + '''lāma''': similar to the above, but more polite, typically used for people of much higher rank or public officials.
* '''yamei''' + title: very polite, alternative to the above two.
* Appropriate honorific formula: the most polite usage, usually progressively reduced to (''yamei'') given name + ''lāma'' or ''yamei'' + title during the course of a conversation<ref>This is due to many honorific formulae being quite long - for example, the standard honorific formula when talking to an Inquisitor is (''lallāmaha'') [matronymic] ''yamei murkadhāna'' [given name] ''lāma''.</ref>.
* Given name + '''tanta''': same politeness as ''lāma'', used respectfully towards lower-ranked people, for example workers and colleague with less experience, soldiers of lower rank, employees, apprentices, and (from seventh class onwards) by teachers towards their students.
* Given name alone: used in semi-formal speech between (equal ranked) colleagues and friends with a moderate degree of acquaintance. Can be or is rude otherwise. Note that it is considered especially rude to use the given name (or any other form of the personal name) towards older family members, or family members of the same generation who are not siblings (e.g. brothers/sisters-in-law, unless they're close friends).
* [[Chlouvānem/Names#Informal_names_.28laltihalen.C4.AB.29|Informal name]]: used in informal speech among friends, siblings (and possibly cousins<ref>With cousins, whether the informal or the given name is used depends on how close they are; with first cousins using the informal name is nearly universal, while with farther cousins the given name may be more common.</ref>), partners, and all family members of a younger generation.
* Kinship term alone: used for older family members or non-siblings (excluding cousins) of the same generation.
* '''sāmi''' (pronominal declension): the morphological pronoun used in informal speech. Often replaced by the given name or by the hypocoristic form.
* '''nami''' (pronominal declension): the morphological pronoun of formal speech towards higher ranked people. Often used (and even more often in non-core forms such as the genitive '''namyā'''), but it is also common to use the given name + ''lāma'' formula instead.
* '''tami''' (pronominal declension): morphological pronoun of formal speech towards equal ranked people. Often used alternatively to the given name (with or without ''lāma''), even in the same conversation.
* '''rami''' (pronominal declension): morphological formal pronoun for lower ranked people; same usage pattern as ''tami''.
* '''udhyāras''': translatable as "Comrade" and introduced during the Kaiṣamā era, it is a formal second-person pronoun used for people in situations transcending social rank. It is particularly used among political activists, volunteers in any organization, or in cooperative activities distinct from one's usual work. It is also the preferred option when one has no information about the addressed person, or as a general second person pronoun not referring to any particular person.
* '''ṣari''': quite old-fashioned (but still actively used by older people), used by guests towards homeowners (or innkeepers) and by soldiers towards their superiors.
* '''ūttuka''' (mostly historical except for the Northeast): similar to '''ṣari''' but mostly used by servants towards their superiors or landowners; rapidly disappeared because of the Kaiṣamā era reforms except for the Northeast, where it was used in most contexts ''ṣari'' was elsewhere.
* '''blikā'''; an endearing term for "girl", used by sisters among themselves.
* '''lorkhās'''; male counterpart to ''blikā''.
* Informal name + '''cuca''': endearing form used in informal speech by parents towards their children.
* '''nūrya''', literally "kid, child": used in formal instances by parents towards their children.
 
The following pronouns are mostly used for specific people, and only as reductions of other formulae:
* '''aveṣyotariri nami''': literally "You excellent one"; extremely formal locution for non-religious superiors several ranks ahead.
* '''gopūrṭham''': used for public/religious and military officials.
* '''gopūrṭhami brausa''': used for the highest ranked Inquisitors, bishops, head monks, and the Baptist.
* '''yobrausa''': same as ''gopūrṭhami brausa''.
* '''lalla yobrausa''': used for the Great Inquisitor.
 
With second-person pronouns, the possessives used are in nearly every case those of the corresponding morphological pronouns; however, in very informal speech, it is not uncommon to use the genitive of the informal name or of pronoun-equivalents such as ''blikā'' or ''lorkhās''.
 
====Third person singular====
Chlouvānem does not have any morphological third person pronoun; the demonstratives are used instead for non-human referents. For human referents, however, it is considered extremely rude to address them using a demonstratives. The choice of pronoun in the third person is especially complex because not just the relative rank of speaker and listener should be kept in mind, but also the rank of the addressee relative to both the speaker and the listener.
 
All titles listed in the section [[#Honorific titles|"Honorific titles"]] may be freely used with and without names. Furthermore, it is common in not excessively formal speech to use ''nāḍima'' (honorific word for "mother") for all female older relatives - of previous generations, not older siblings - of the interlocutor and similarly ''tamvāram'' (honorific for "father") for male older relatives.
 
'''udhyāras''', equivalent to "Comrade", is in contemporary Chlouvānem the least controversial third person pronoun, at least the only one that is never considered rude to use. However, depending on the situation, other pronouns may be more appropriate.
 
=====Reference table=====
The following table is meant as a ''non-exhaustive'' reference for the ''most common'' ways used to refer to third person human referents in different situations, excluding titles:
 
{| class="redtable lightredbg" style="textalign:center"
|-
|-
! <small>Dative</small>
! colspan=2 | If... !! Speaker is higher than Listener !! Speaker is equal to Listener !! Speaker is lower than Listener
| lunāyom || lunāyį || lunaisām
|-
|-
! <small>Ablative</small>
! rowspan=3 | 3SG is higher than... !! both Speaker and Listener
| lunāyų || lunaibhan || lunǣnīs
| ''yamei'' (name) ''lāma''<br/>''yamei'' (name) ''suntam/sintam'' || ''(yamei)'' (name) ''suntam/sintam(/lāma)'' || ''yamei'' (name) ''suntam/sintam''
|-
|-
! <small>Locative</small>
! Listener,<br/>but lower than or equal to Speaker
| lunāye || lunainne || lunailīm
| ''udhyāras''<br/>''yamei lātiṃṣin''<br/>(name) ''lāma'' || / || /
|-
|-
! <small>Instrumental</small>
! Speaker,<br/>but lower than or equal to Listener
| lunaip || lunaibhan || lunainīka
| / || / || ''yamei'' (name) ''lāma''
|-
! rowspan=3 | 3SG is equal to... !! Listener
| ''udhyāras''<br/>''yamei'' (name) ''tanta''<br/> (name) ''lāma'' || / || ''yamei'' (name) ''suntam/sintam''
|-
! both Speaker and Listener
| / || ''udhyāras''<br/>''lātiṃṣin''<br/> (name) ''lāma''<br/>''yamei'' (name) ''tanta'' || /
|-
! Speaker
| ''udhyāras''<br/>''lātiṃṣin''<br/> (name) ''lāma'' || / || ''yamei'' (name) ''lāma''<br/>''udhyāras''<br/>''lātiṃṣin''
|-
! rowspan=3 | 3SG is lower than...  !! Listener
| ''udhyāras''<br/>(name) ''tanta'' || / || /
|-
! both Speaker and Listener
| / || ''udhyāras''<br/>(name) ''tanta'' || /
|-
! Speaker
| / || / || (name) ''lāma''<br/> ''udhyāras''
|}
|}
{{col-end}}
The ablaut declension is in the singular (except for the vocative and essive) and dual the same as the 1-h one, including the ''-ei'' rule for the genitive singular (e.g. ''rinya'' "ceiling", gen.sg. ''renei''), except for the fact that the genitive singular has a middle-grade vowel. The plural has mostly the same endings as the singular but with middle-grade vowels in most forms (genitive, essive, and locative have a higher-grade one). ''-y-'' is inserted between the stem and the ending, but not for nouns ending in ''-ya'' (''rinya'' → ''renyē'').<br/>
The vowel that undergoes ablaut is usually the penultimate (e.g. ''plušamila'' "Office of the Inquisition", plural ''plušamelyē''), but in some cases it's the first (e.g. ''kimeda'' (a type of panther), plural ''kemedyē'').


===Irregular plurals===
====Dual pronouns====
A few Chlouvānem nouns have irregular plurals:
====Plural pronouns====
* The word ''chlǣvānem'' itself is plural-only and irregular; direct and vocative are in ''-em'', but all other cases decline as a standard plural 1h noun (e.g. accusative ''chlǣvānānu'', ergative ''chlǣvānān'', genitive ''chlǣvānumi'');
====Other personal pronouns====
* ''maila'' “water” does not have a dual form outside of colloquial use (where ''mailāt'' is used with the meaning of “two glasses of water”) and has the irregular plural ''mailtvąa''. It declines as a ''singular'' 1h noun, with two exceptions, namely accusative in ''-ąu'' instead of expected *-ahu and genitive in ''-ąi'' instead of expected *-ahi. This plural form is actually common, used when talking about bodies of water in an area, water layers, glasses of water, and a few minor idiomatic uses (e.g. ''taili mailtvahe hilælulke'', lit. “to arrive by crossing many waters”, meaning “to have had much experience”).<br/>The ''-tvąa'' semantic plural is also used for the word ''damītah'' when used for "petals" (''damītvąa''; the meaning of "nails" has the regular plural ''damītai''), and ''lairē'' (''lairtvąa'', which does not mean "skies" but "galaxy").
 
* ''resan'' "pig" and ''liken'' "arm" both have irregular plurals with vowel change: ''ryasan'' and ''læcin'' respectively.
====Pronominal declension====
* ''ås'' "ford, crossing of a small river" has the stem ''av-'' in all pre-vocalic forms (e.g. plural ''ave'').
The pronominal declension has two variants: one used for the first person pronouns and another for the 2nd person ones. First person pronouns are the most archaic: they have a single-phoneme stem in all cases bar the direct, and a different stem in the direct case ('''lili''', derived from the original pronoun *li, in the singular, and suppletive '''amūt''' and '''amūvi''' in the dual and plural respectively).<br/>The second person pronouns are a Pre-Chlouvānem innovation, from the original short stem attached to the demonstrative ''ami'', and therefore they follow that word's declension. However, the original short stems are kept as alternative, shorter forms, for the accusative, ergative, and dative cases. Second-person plural pronouns exist, but are virtually unused outside of Archaic Chlouvānem.
* ''švas'' "animal (including humans)" pluralizes as ''švai'', as if it were a h-noun; all cases except for direct and vocative are however regular.
* There are some pluralia tantum: ''pārāk'' “hair”, ''kāraṇḍhai'' “guts”, also ''agṇyaucai'' “sons and daughters”, ''aryai'' "square", ''katanai'' "clutter", ''vailašaus'' "cutlery", ''šūlyakāše'' "dishes", and all ethnonyms.
** Some pluralia tantum are the plural forms of nouns with other (usually related) meanings - when they are used as semantic plurals, they're counted with cardinal numerals (and are singular); when they are used as pluralia tantum, with collective numerals (and are plural). Examples are ''hamvyenī'' "nursery" (''hamvyoe'' "cradle"), ''įsmirte'' "playground" (''įsmirtas'' "swing"), ''nacai'' "clothes" (''naca'' "cloth"), ''garaṇai'' "clock, watch" (''garaṇa'' "hour"), ''lairtvąa'' "galaxy" (''lairē'' "sky").
*** This is often used in poetry, with words like ''mešanāt'' "eyes" - dual of ''mešanah'' "view". In many set phrases, ''læcin'' "arms" is used with the meaning of "work, effort".
** Many toponyms in the Inquisition and a few ones abroad are only ever used in the plural. Island groups are an obvious example, but this also includes descriptive names of dioceses such as ''Vīdhyašaṇṭrē'' ("regions of the Vīdhyai"), ''Samvālšaṇṭrē'' (lit. "the Western Regions"), and many cities even with originally non-Chlouvānem names such as ''Kašikanye'' (episcopal seat of Saṃhayolah), ''Rīkalīnai'' (episcopal seat of Dārṭijātia), or ''Kareñjoklai'' (episcopal seat of Yūgarthāma).
* A few nouns are singularia tantum: ''hærṣūs'' “lips”, ''maula'' “breasts”, ''kanai'' “spices”, ''paɂeh'' “dust”, ''nāmvāvi'' “dust (made by crushing something)”, ''narmis'' “ash”, ''ñailūh'' “ice”; ''lāsīm'' "cereals" (individual terms for cereals may have duals and plurals meaning "two/more varieties of ..."), ''mæchlišam'' "leafy greens", ''mæcichā'' "spinach", and ''bågras'' "legumes" with all types of legumes (''dīlla'' "peas", ''mahīra'' "lentils", ''miltai'' "soybeans"...)
* Dvandva compounds are usually all dual and pluralizable - like ''yāṇḍamaišñukivā'' “genitals”, or also many dyadic kinship terms (e.g. ''maihāmeināt'' “daughter and mother”) - but some of them are inherently “singular” and therefore are dual only, like ''lillamurḍhyāyunyāt'' (how some philosophical Yunyalīlti currents refer to the ''yunya'' “nature” and the ''lillamurḍhyā'' “natural harmony” as two aspects of the same thing).
* Toponyms (except inherently dual or plural ones), personal names, and miscellaneous things that are semantically only singular (like many Yunyalīlti concepts, e.g. ''yunya'' or ''lillamurḍhyā'') are found exclusively in the singular.


===Irregular vocatives===
All ergative singular forms in ''-ei'' have literary variants in ''-eis'' (cf. ''emeis'', ergative of ''emibe'' "one").
Five very common words have common, irregular, vocative forms:
* ''ñæltah'' "(male's) sister" — ''ñæli'' or ''ñæl''
* ''glūkam'' "(female's) brother" — ''galū''
* ''meinā'' "mother" — ''mā'' or ''mē''
* ''bunā'' "father" — ''bā'' or ''vā''
* ''udhyāras'' "Comrade" — ''udhyā'' (rarely ''udhyār'')


===Use of the plural===
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
Chlouvānem sometimes uses the singular in contexts where English uses the plural:
|-
* Nouns are always singular after numerals (except, optionally, ''dani'' (two), which they can also be dual after), ''sora'' (some), ''læti'' (any), ''gu'' (no), ''guviṣam'' (no other), ''taili'' (many, much), ''nanū'' (more), ''kaili'' (most), and ''ṣubha'' (few, little).
! colspan=4 | !! Direct !! Accusative !! Ergative !!  Genitive !! Translative !! Exessive !! Essive !!  Dative !! Ablative !! Locative !! Instrumental
** After ''yaiva'', the difference in the noun's number expresses a distinction much like the one between English "every" and "all": ''yaiva kita'' "every house", ''yaiva kitai'' "all houses".
|-
* When referring to existence or availability of something, that something is always singular, e.g. ''dvārma læjlęs virā'' "there are chairs in the room". It may be plural if topicalized, but the overall meaning of the sentence changes - e.g. ''læjlai mæn dvārma virā'' "the chairs are in the room".
! rowspan=5 | Singular !! colspan=3 | 1st person
* When referring to a single person, ''dhāna'' (hand), ''mešīn'' (eye), and ''minnūlya'' (ear), and often also ''junai'' (foot) (more rarely for ''pājya'' (leg) and ''liken'' (arm)) are typically singular and not dual - e.g. ''nanau mešīp mešute'' "I see it with my eyes" (lit. "with my eye"). In fact, they might be translated as "a person's hands/eyes/ears", given that dual forms are often used to mean e.g. "both hands of two people" and the plural ones for e.g. "many people's hands".
| '''lili''' || lū || lei || lyai<br/>lilyā || lan || lat || lįs || lum || ląu || lēn || lāni
* ''junyoe'' (indoor slippers), ''rapūda'' ((thick) shoes), ''mæska'' (boots), and all types of shoes are also used in the singular to refer to a pair of them. The main exception is ''varṇaigīk'' (straw rope sandals), which is a plurale tantum.
|-
 
! rowspan=4 | 2nd person !! colspan=2 | Informal
==Verbs (''daradhaus'')==
| '''sāmi''' || sāmyū<br/>sū || sāmī<br/>sei || sāmī || sāmīn || sāmīt || sāmįs || sāmūm<br/>som || sāmų || sāmǣ || sāmūni
The Chlouvānem verb (''daradhūs'', pl. ''daradhaus'') is the most inflected part of speech; its most basic forms are fusional, but many more specific formations are more agglutinative due to their origin from old Proto-Lahob particles or participles.
|-
 
! colspan=2 | Form. sup.
The first and most important division we can find in Chlouvānem verbs is the distinction - a category called, with noticeable metaphorical use, '''''chlærim''''' (light) by native grammarians - between '''exterior '''(''kauyāva'') and '''interior''' (''nañyāva'') verbs. This may at first seem a voice system, but it must be distinguished from the true voices in Chlouvānem conjugation. The difference between them is mostly lexical: native grammarians distinguish exterior verbs as describing "activities or states that involve interactions with outside the self", and interior verbs as affecting principally the self. Exterior verbs are those we could most easily compare to active verbs in English, while interior verbs are a somewhat "catch-all" category including many distinct meanings, most notably middle-voice, reflexive and reciprocal ones, but also all adjectival verbs as well as peculiar and somewhat independent meanings for some verbs. Many verbs can be conjugated both as exterior and as interior and they often have differences in meaning - e.g. ''gṇyauke ''means “to give birth” when exterior and “to be born” when interior - commonly, the interior has the intransitive meaning and the exterior the transitive one - cf. ''lęlširu'' "I shake" vs. ''lęlšute'' "I shake (something)".
| '''nami''' || namyū<br/>nū || namī<br/>nei || namī || namīn || namīt || namįs || namūm<br/>num || namų || namǣ || namūni
 
|-
: ''→ See [[Chlouvānem/Exterior_and_interior_verbs|Chlouvānem exterior and interior verbs]] for a more thorough explanation of these forms.''
! colspan=2 | Form. equal
 
| '''tami''' || tamyū<br/>tū || tamī<br/>tei || tamī || tamīn || tamīt || tamįs || tamūm<br/>tum || tamų || tamǣ || tamūni
Potentially every Chlouvānem verb form, no matter if exterior or interior, has a '''causative''' (''drildyāva'') conjugation which is considered an inflection and not a derivation, even if the meanings may vary: ''mišake'' is an extreme example as each form has a different meaning (with particularly interior forms having many meanings) - non-causative exterior ''mešu'' "I am seen", interior ''meširu'' "I know; I see myself"; and causative exterior ''maišildu'' "I am shown", interior ''maišīldru'' "I learn; I show myself <small>(trans.)</small>".
|-
! colspan=2 | Form. inf.
| '''rami''' || ramyū<br/>nū || ramī<br/>nei || ramī || ramīn || ramīt || ramįs || ramūm<br/>rum || ramų || ramǣ || ramūṇi
|-
! colspan=4 | Reflexive pronoun
| '''demi''' || jū || jei || jai<br/>demyā || jen || jet || jįs || jum || jąu || jēn || jāni
|-
! rowspan=5 | Dual !! colspan=3 | 1st person
| '''amūt''' || lūṣa || lūra || lūva || lūh || lūbhan || lūnne || lūh || lūbhan || lūnne || lūbhan
|-
! rowspan=4 | 2nd person !! colspan=2 | Informal
| '''sāmīt''' || sāmīṣa<br/>seṣa || sāmīra<br/>sera || sāmīva || sāmirį || sāmibhan || sāminne || sāmirį<br/>seh || sāmibhan || sāminne || sāmibhan
|-
! colspan=2 | Form. sup.
| '''namīt''' || namīṣa<br/>nīṣa || namīra<br/>nira || namīva || namirį || namibhan || naminne || namirį<br/>nih || namibhan || naminne || namibhan
|-
! colspan=2 | Form. equal
| '''tamīt''' || tamīṣa<br/>tīṣa || tamīra<br/>tira || tamīva || tamirį || tamibhan || taminne || tamirį<br/>tih || tamibhan || taminne || tamibhan
|-
! colspan=2 | Form. inf.
| '''ramīt''' || ramīṣa<br/>rīṣa || ramīra<br/>rira || ramīva || ramirį || ramibhan || raminne || ramirį<br/>rih || ramibhan || raminne || ramibhan
|-
! Plural !! colspan=3 | 1st person
| '''amūvi''' || laih || lān || lumi || lemān || lenīs || lāra || lisām || lenīs || lelīm || lenīka
|}


Chlouvānem verbs also conjugate for seven '''voices''' (''tadgeroe'', pl. ''tadgerenī''), each one putting one of seven different core elements as the ''direct-case argument'', usually for means of topicalization or definiteness; they reflect the Austronesian-type morphosyntactical alignment of the language. The seven voices are, for exterior verbs:
====Honorific titles====
* '''patient-trigger''' (''dṛṣokire tadgeroe'') (unmarked);
''→ See also: [[Chlouvānem/Names#Using_names|Chlouvānem names § Using names]]''
* '''agent-trigger''' (''darīnūkire tadgeroe'') (transitive and ditransitive verbs only);
* '''benefactive-trigger''' (''hulābādmęlīnūkire tadgeroe'');
* '''antibenefactive-trigger''' (''tatalunsusūkire tadgeroe'');
* '''locative-trigger''' (''yuñcūkire tadgeroe'');
* '''dative-trigger''' (''męliausire tadgeroe'') (mostly ditransitive verbs);
* '''instrumental-trigger'''  (''drausire tadgeroe'') (morphologically possible for all verbs, but not always meaningful).
Interior verbs only have six voices, as they do not have an agentive voice; the patientive, unmarked voice, is here called '''common voice''' (''tailcārē tadgeroe'')<ref>For simplicity's sake, voices' names are most often rendered as ''patientive'', ''agentive'', ''benefactive'' ''antibenefactive'', ''locative'', ''dative'', ''instrumental'', and ''common''.</ref>.


Chlouvānem (realis) verbs encode six different types of '''evidentiality''' (''tarlāsmrāṇa''), actually a combination of evidentiality and epistemic modality: '''experiential''' (''šukilenūkire tarlāsmrāṇa'', unmarked<ref>This same marker (-∅- or -a-), is also used for historically attested facts and scientific truths.</ref>), '''first inferential''' (''lahīla paratṛlūkire tarlāsmrāṇa'', trustworthy), '''second inferential''' (''hælinaika paratṛlūkire tarlāsmrāṇa'', doubted), '''assumptive''' (''demitṛlūkire tarlāsmrāṇa''), '''first reportative''' (''lahīla tatikilenūkire tarlāsmrāṇa'', trustworthy) and '''second reportative''' (''hælinaika tatikilenūkire tarlāsmrāṇa'', doubted).
Chlouvānem uses many honorific titles, which are always used in non-familiar speech. The "honorific" adjective ''yamei'' is often added to many of them - especially ''lāma'' - and is mandatory in other ones.
* '''lāma''' - used after the noun, it is the most common honorific title; almost every time someone is being addressed, ''lāma'' is used - the only exceptions being when it is already known another honorific should be used, or in familiar situations. It usually follows the given name alone (e.g. ''Namihūlša lāma''); if the matronymic is added (sometimes done in order to disambiguate), then ''lāma'' comes between matronymic and noun (e.g. ''Līṭhaljāyimāvi lāma Namihūlša''). All three names matronymic, surname, and given name together with ''lāma'' (e.g. ''Līṭhaljāyimāvi Kaleñchokah Namihūlša lāma'') are only used in very formal addressing from a list of nouns; should matronymic+noun be not enough to distinguish two people, simply surname+noun is used.
* '''tanta''' - used for people in a lower position, e.g. used towards one's employees or (usually from seventh class onwards) by teachers and professors towards their students. Also used by militars towards lower-ranked soldiers.
* '''suntam''' (regionally also ''sintam'') - used for people in a higher position in certain situations, most commonly towards older and more experienced colleagues (but not teachers or professors, nor work bosses if they're roughly the same age as the speaker).
* '''lallāmaha''' - an extremely formal honorific, used for public authorities and all Inquisitors. Most often used together with ''yamei''. Inquisitors may also be referred to as ''lallāmaha + <small>matronymic</small> + yamei + <small>given name</small> + murkadhāna (lāma)''
* '''jūlin''' - less formal than ''lāma'', used for people who work in one's home but are not part of the family.
* '''tallam''' - less formal than ''lāma'', used by men for unmarried women whom they know somewhat well. Currently less frequently used than it was up to about 10 years ago.
* '''jāmilšīreh''' - used in military contexts towards higher-ranked people, or by common people towards military commanders in service.
* '''udhyā(ras)''' - neutral but respectful title of address, often used when generally speaking and without knowing who the listener is. Sometimes used, when in a plural sense, in the form '''yamei dāvudhyāre'''. In its neutralness relative to rank, it can be compared with the Soviet-era use of ''товарищ''. It is also how high-ranked Inquisitors and most monks address the general public.<br/>Note that ''udhyāras'' is the direct form, ''udhyā'' the irregular vocative.
* '''pūrivāla''' - an impersonal term of address used in written language, towards unfamiliar people never met personally. Often used as ''yamei'' [name] ''pūrivāla''.
* '''cuca''' is not strictly an honorific, as it pertains to more colloquial forms of speech, but it works the same way. It has a diminutive and endearing meaning, not unlike Japanese ''-chan''. In formal speech, it is often used towards and when speaking about children.


Chlouvānem verbs also conjugate for five different '''tense-aspect combinations''' (simply ''tenses'' (''avyāṣa'' - pl. ''avyāṣai'')): '''present''' (''kaminænikire avyāṣa''), '''past''' (''dāṃdenire avyāṣa''<ref>Sometimes ''ēktami avyāṣa''.</ref>), '''perfect''' (''mīraṃnajausire avyāṣa''), '''(general) future''' (''lallāmiti avyāṣa''), and '''future intentional''' (''osmešē lallāmiti avyāṣa''); other distinctions may be built periphrastically (most notably ''imperfect'', ''pluperfect'' and ''future perfect''). Tenses are the “basic unit” verbs conjugate in: all tenses conjugate for nine persons (1st-2nd-3rd in singular, dual and plural; note though that 3rd singular and 3rd plural are identical in the perfect). Note that some moods do only distinguish between imperfective and perfective aspect.
=====Occupations commonly used as titles=====
* '''camitorai''' — head of a company (usually as [matronymic] ''yamei'' [name] ''camitorai lāma'')
* '''kauchlærīn''' (voc.: ''kauchlærī'') — professor (in universities, seminaries, institutions, and work schools)
* '''tatnāmęlīn''' (voc.: ''tatnāmęlī'') — teacher (in first and basic schools)


The last inflectional category of Chlouvānem verbs is the '''mood''' (''darišam'', pl. ''darišye''). Chlouvānem grammarians traditionally distinguish only three moods, which are those that cannot be combined:
=====Official titles=====
* '''indicative''' (''chlåñjausire darišam'') - the realis mood;
Where not noted, the formula is [matronymic] ''yamei'' [name] [title] ''lāma''.
* '''optative''' (''purmanūkire darišam'') - used to express wishes or hopes, as well as orders or commands;
* '''subjunctive''' (''milkausire darišam'') - used to express general advices (jussive use), purpose (supine use), unreal things that may happen or might have happened, and also syntactically conditioned by some particles.


There are a few more forms that can't be strictly considered moods because they can appear in all of the five actual moods, and are thus called '''''junya''''', pl. '''''junyai''''' (literally "shade, hue, dye") by Chlouvānem grammarians: they are actually regular derivational patterns, that are considered inflectional due to them being possible for all verbs. There are five ''junyai'':
* '''brausamailenya''' — Baptist — rendered as ''aveṣyotārire lallāmaha'' [matronymic] ''yamei'' [surname + given name] ''brausamailenia lāma''.
* '''desiderative''' (''daudyūkire junya'') - used to express a desire or will (e.g. I want to X);
* '''camimurkadhāna''' — Great Inquisitor — rendered as ''širē aveṣyotārire lallāmaha'' [matronymic] ''yamei'' [surname + given name] ''camimurkadhāna lāma''.
* '''necessitative''' (''rileyūkire junya'') - used to express need or obligation (e.g. I have to X);
* '''camitorai''' — president (of diocesan parliaments or executives or of foreign countries). Rendered as ''aveṣyotārire'' [matronymic (if Chlouvānem)] ''yamei'' [name] ''camitorai lāma''.
* '''potential''' (''novire junya'') - used to express the ability to do something (e.g. I can [= am able to] X, also "I may [= it is possible that I] X")
* '''plušamelīs''' (voc.: ''plušamelī'') — Prefect (head of an Office (''plušamila'') of the Inquisition). Rendered as ''aveṣyotārire'' [matronymic] ''yamei'' [name] ''plušamelī(s) lāma''.
* '''permissive''' (''drippūkire junya'') - used to express the permission to do something (e.g. I can [= I’m allowed to] X)
* '''gatvā''' — leader/head/president/mayor — preceded by the genitive of the respective administration (''ṣramāṇa'' "province", ''lalka'' "circuit", ''hālgāra'' "district", ''marta'' "city"…).
* '''intensive''' (''caṃliven junya'') - typically denotes emphasis on a stronger effort for/in an action, or on its contrastive nature, or on its completeness and exhaustiveness.
* '''hurdagīn''' — Head Monk (head of a monastery) — rendered as ''kaili brausire yamei [name] hurdagīn lāma'' (+ monastery name-<small>GEN</small>)<ref>Many head monks have their own unique titles based on their monastery. For example the head monk of the Vādhaṃšvāti Lake Monastery is not referred as ''[…] hurdagīn lāma vādhaṃšvāti ga gūltayi'' but as ''[…] laliājuniāmiti jāṇi camilālta lāma'', literally "Great Guardian of the Field of the Night Bloom".</ref>
* '''rākṣaṇa''' — Bishop (head of a diocese) — rendered as ''aveṣyotārire'' [matronymic] ''yamei'' [(surname +) name] ''rākṣaṇa lāma'' (+ diocese name-<small>GEN</small>).
* '''lallaplušamelīs''' (voc.: ''lallaplušamelī'') — High Prefect (head of the Table of Offices (''flušamaili eṇāh'', the executive branch of the Inquisition). Usually rendered as ''taili aveṣyotārire'' [matronymic] ''yamei'' [name] ''lallaplušamelī(s) lāma''.
* '''lallamurkadhāna''' — High Inquisitor (one of the 612 members of the Inquisitorial Conclave (''murkadhānumi lanedāmeh'', the legislative branch of the Inquisition). Usually rendered as ''aveṣyotārire'' [matronymic] ''yamei'' [name] ''lallamurkadhāna lāma''.
* '''ñæltryam''' — monk.
* '''nīrvakṣari''' (voc.: ''nīrvakṣarī'') — Eparch (head of an Eparchy).


Finally, there are a further two forms which are called "secondary moods" (''šudarišam'', pl. ''-šye''). They are two '''consequential moods''', the first one expressing ''cause'' (e.g. “because X”), and the other ''opposition'' (e.g. “although X”).<br/>
Note that the full titles are used generally at the first mention only. For example, ''Martayināvi yamei murkadhāna Læhimausa lāma'' becomes afterwards either ''yamei murkadhāna'' or ''yamei Læhimausa lāma''. With the Great Inquisitor, this does not usually get shorter than ''širē aveṣyotārire yamei lallāmaha'' ([Her] Respectable Most Excellent Highness) or ''širē aveṣyotārire lallāmaha camimurkadhāna'' ([Her] Most Excellent Highness, the Great Inquisitor).
Chlouvānem furthermore also have a '''non-finite form''' (''emibąukire daradhūs'') (the '''-ke''' form, called '''infinitive''' hereafter).


The high degree of synthesis of the Chlouvānem verb is often mentioned through examples such as ''įstayamāmālvisuɂutsa'', meaning "even if, apparently, (s)he regularly wanted to tie up something...", a form of the verb ''įsmāmalveke'' "to regularly tie up something", itself derived from the verb ''įsmālke'' "to tie up", ultimately from the single root ''māl-'' "to unite".
===Correlatives===
 
Chlouvānem has a fairly regular system of correlatives, distinguishing ten types (proximal, medial, distal, interrogative, negative, assertive existential, elective existential, universal, positive alternative, and negative alternative) in eleven categories (attributive, thing, person, time, place, destination, origin, way, reason, quality, quantity).
===Verb classes===
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
When talking about the regularity in the conjugation of Chlouvānem verbs, most Chlouvānem linguists consider the vast majority of verbs as regular. In fact, the same suffixes are used in conjugating almost all verbs and highly irregular verbs are often only small exceptions (''jalle'' "to be" and ''lulke'' "to go on foot (monodirectional)" are the most notable ones, having many suppletive stems). However, despite this regularity, Chlouvānem verbs are divided into lots of small classes, each one having only a few members, that have different stem vowels in various forms - typically, the 3SG forms of the present, past, and perfect are used as principal parts (with the infinitive often - but not always! - having the same vowel as the present).
|-
 
! Category ↓ / Type → !! Proximal !! Medial !! Distal !! Interrogative !! Negative !! Ass. exist. !! Elect. exist. !! Universal !! Positive altern. !! Negative altern.
A Chlouvānem verb's conjugation is determined by two factors: whether it is ''thematic'' and whether - and if it does, how - its root vowel changes among the different stems.<br/>
|-
The thematic and athematic distinction is the easiest: '''thematic verbs''' add an ''-a-'' (''-e-'' in the 3SG visual past and in all present indicative causative exterior terminations) between its root and every consonantic termination; '''athematic verbs''' don't. All verbs with vowel-ending roots are athematic.
! Attributive
 
| rowspan=2 | ''nenē''<br/><small>(and others; see below)</small><br/>this (one) || rowspan=2 | ''nunū''<br/><small>(and others; see below)</small><br/>that (one) (near you) || rowspan=2 | ''nanā''<br/><small>(and others; see below)</small><br/>that (one) (over there) || rowspan=2 | ''yanū?''<br/>what?, which (one) ? || ''gu''<br/>no || ''sora''<br/>some || ''grāṇa''<br/>any || rowspan=2 | ''yaiva''<br/>every(thing) || ''viṣam''<br/>another, other || ''guviṣam''<br/>no other
Root vowel changes are, however, more complex, and up to twelve verb classes may be distinguished depending on how the various stems are formed. The first two classes comprise about 90% of all (primary) verbs:
|-
# The verbs of the first class do not change its vowel in any form. About 45% of verbs belong to this class, including all those whose root vowel is any of '''ā, ą, e, ē, ę, ǣ, oe, ai, ąi, au, ąu''', as well as most verbs with root vowel '''a, æ, å, o, ei''', or '''ęi'''. An example is ''męlike'' (athematic) "to give": pres. ''męlyē'', past ''męlik'', perfect ''emęlya''.
! Thing
# Also called the '''basic ablauting class''', these verbs have the most basic ablaut alteration: in their present exterior forms and in the singular present interior ones, '''i ī''' become '''e''' (''širṣṭake'' "to dip, soak": ''šerṣṭē — širṣṭek — iširṣṭa''), '''u ū''' usually become '''o''' (''dhūlte'' "to write": ''dholtē, dhūltik, udhūlta''), but '''i''' in a few verbs (''kulke'' "to say": ''kilē — kulik — ukula''), and '''ṛ ṝ''' become '''ar''' (''dṛke'' "to do": ''darē — dṛk — (irr.) dadrā'')
| ''gomi''<br/>nothing || ''sorami''<br/>something || ''grāṇami''<br/>anything || ''viṣāmi''<br/>something else || ''guviṣāmi''<br/>nothing else
# Also called ''strong ablauting class'', it is a subgroup of the ablauting class where instead of becoming middle-grade, the vowels ablaut to the maximum grade ('''ai, au, ār''') respectively. This class is somewhat rare: the three most common verbs in it are ''mulke'' (''mun-'') "to be able to": ''maunē — munik — umuna'', ''dīdake'' "to know a person": ''daidē — dīdek — idīda'', and ''kirake'' "to love": ''kairē — kirek — ikira''.
|-
# Also called ''inverse ablauting class'', these verbs have either ''va'' or ''ya'' in the present (and infinitive; note that the initial semivowel may be "hidden" in a consonant!) that gets reduced to ''u'' or ''i'' respectively in the past. An easy example is ''valde'' "to open": ''valdē — uldik — vulda''; one with a hidden consonant is ''calyake'' "to harvest plums": ''calyē — kilyek — ikilda''. In verbs with ''r-va'', the '''v''' disappears, but the conjugation is otherwise regular, e.g. ''ranyake'' "to untie, loosen, dismantle": ''ranyē — runyek — urunya''.
! Person
# Verbs of this class (and the following ones) typically have a vowel change in the ''past'' form and not in the present one. This class has ''''' in the infinitive, present, and perfect, and '''e''' in the past, for example ''påndake'' "to punch": ''påndē — pendek — apånda''). Verbs whose roots begin in ''y-'' lose it in the past, e.g. ''yåjyake'' "to float in the air; to go with a zeppelin, hot air balloon, or helicopter (monodirectional)": ''yåjyē — ejyek — ayåjya''.
| ''·evita''<br/>this one || ''·utvita''<br/>that one (near you) || ''·ātvita''<br/>that one (over there) || ''yavita?''<br/>who? || ''guvita''<br/>no one || ''soraita''<br/>someone || ''grāmvita''<br/>anyone || ''yaivita''<br/>everyone || ''viṣvita''<br/>someone else || ''guviṣvita''<br/>no one else
# These verbs have '''ei''' in the present, '''a''' in the past, and '''a+ i''' in the perfect; e.g. ''heimake'' "to blow, to play (wind instruments)" ''heimē — hamek — ahima''.
|-
# Verbs with '''e''' in the present, '''ya''' in the past, and '''i+ i''' in the perfect (and infinitive!); e.g. ''miṃsake'' "to risk" ''meṃsē — myaṃsek — imiṃsa''.
! Time
# Verbs with '''æ''' in the present, '''o''' in the past, and '''e+ i''' in the perfect; e.g. ''næljake'' "to turn, to screw": ''næljē — noljek — enilja''.
| ''emiya''<br/>now || ''utiya''<br/>then || ''ātiya''<br/>then (remote) || ''yamiya?''<br/>when? || ''gumiya''<br/>never || ''soramiya''<br/>sometime, somewhen || ''grāmiya''<br/>anytime, whenever || ''yaivmiya''<br/>always, everytime || ''viṣmiya''<br/>sometime else || ''guviṣmiya''<br/>never else
# Verbs with '''o''' in the present, '''ei''' in the past, and '''a+ ā''' in the perfect; e.g. ''volkake'' "to stab, to sting (esp. insects), to hit with something pointy": ''volkē — veilkek — avālka''.
|-
# Verbs with '''æ''' in the present, '''ya''' in the past, and '''e+ ī''' in the perfect; e.g. ''kællake'' "to sew": ''kællē — kyallek — ekīlla''.
! Place
# Verbs with ''''' in the present, '''yau''' in the past, and '''u+ u''' in the perfect; e.g. ''nætte'' "to hold": ''nættē — nyauttek — unutta''.
| ''·ejulā''<br/>here || ''·uñjulā''<br/>there || ''·āñjulā''<br/>over there || ''yajulā?''<br/>where? || ''gujulā''<br/>nowhere || ''sorajulā''<br/>somewhere || ''grāñjulā''<br/>anywhere || ''yavijulā''<br/>everywhere || ''viñjulā''<br/>elsewhere || ''guviñjulā''<br/>nowhere else
# Also called '''-ah verbs''', these verbs actually never modify their root vowel, but have different present endings. ''hæṃdike'' "to dream", ''jānake'' "to feel", and ''lilke'' "to live" are the most common verbs of this class.
|-
 
! Destination
Moods apart from the indicative mainly just follow root structure, with different allomorphs depending on whether the root ends in a consonant or in a vowel.
| ''·ejulyom''<br/>hither || ''·uñjulyom''<br/>thither || ''·āñjulyom''<br/> thither (remote) || ''yajulyom?''<br/>whither? || ''gujulyom''<br/>nowhither || ''sorajulyom''<br/>somewhither || ''grāñjulyom''<br/>anywhither || ''yavijulyom''<br/>everywhither || ''viñjulyom''<br/>elsewhither || ''guviñjulyom''<br/>nowhither else
 
|-
====Vocalic stems====
! Source
Vocalic stems are those whose stems end in a vowel; most of them are class 1 (without any vowel change), but some are class 2 (ablauting), more rarely of other classes. They are anyway somewhat rare in Chlouvānem, but a few common verbs have vocalic stems. These stems often do not behave as in normal vowel saṃdhi when vocalic terminations are added:
| ''·ejulų''<br/>hence || ''·uñjulų''<br/>thence || ''·āñjulų''<br/> thence (remote) || ''yajulų?''<br/>whence? || ''gujulų''<br/>nowhence ||  ''sorajulų''<br/>somewhence || ''grāñjulų''<br/>anywhence || ''yavijulų''<br/>everywhence || ''viñjulų''<br/>elsewhence || ''guviñjulų''<br/>nowhence else
* The diphthongs '''ai, ei, au''', and their breathy-voiced versions mute the second element in a semivowel; in '''ai''' and '''au''' the vowel is naturally lengthened to '''ā''' - e.g. ''gṇyauke'' "to give birth", pres. exterior ''gṇyāvu, gṇyāvi, gṇyāvē''...; past exterior ''gṇyāvau, gṇyāvei, gṇyauk''...
|-
* The short vowels '''i, u, ṛ''' and long '''ṝ''' change into their corresponding semivowels if it forms an accepted cluster - e.g. ''vike'' "to rest" (ablauting stem ''ve-'' in the present), past exterior ''vyau, vyei, vik''...
! Manner
* '''æ''' and '''ǣ''' become '''ev''' and '''oe''' becomes '''en''' - e.g. ''gæke'' "to stretch", pres. exterior ''gevu, gevi, gevē''...; past exterior ''gevau, gevei, gæk''...
| ''elīce''<br/>thus, hereby || ''ūlīce''<br/>thereby || ''ālīce''<br/>thereby; that other way || ''yalīce?''<br/>how? || ''gulīce''<br/>no way || ''soralīce''<br/>somehow || ''grāṃlīce''<br/>anyhow || ''yaivlīce''<br/>everyway || ''viṣlīce''<br/>otherwise || ''guviṣlīce''<br/>no other way
Other vowels add different epenthetic consonants depending on their quality:
|-
* '''a''', '''e''' (and long versions), and '''å''' always add '''n''', e.g. ''lyēke'' "to clap", pres. exterior ''lyēnu, lyēni, lyēnē''...; past exterior ''lyēnau, lyēnei, lyēk''.
! Reason
* All other oral vowels add '''y''' (note that '''o''' contracts with '''e''' or '''ē''' to '''oe'''), e.g. ''khlūke'' "to search, look for" (abl. stem ''khlo-''), pres. exterior ''khloyu, khloyi, khloe''...; past exterior ''khlūyau, khlūyei, khlūk''...
| ''emena''<br/>herefore || ''utmena''<br/>therefore || ''ātmena''<br/>therefore; for that other reason || ''yamenat?''<br/>why? || ''gumena''<br/>for no reason || ''soramena''<br/>somewhy || ''grāmena''<br/>whyever, for any reason || ''yaivmena''<br/>for every reason || ''viṣmena''<br/>for another reason || ''guviṣmena''<br/>for no other reason
* Breathy-voiced vowels dissimilate to vowel + '''h''': e.g. ''švęke'' "to point at": pres. ext. ''švehu, švehi, švehē<ref>Written ''švęe'' in some older texts.</ref>''...; past ext. ''švehau, švehei, švęk''...
|-
 
! Quality
In four basic verbs, ''-yā-'' in the infinitive and most stems becomes ''-im-'' in the present and in the subjunctive. These are:
| ''esmā''<br/>this kind || ''utsmā''<br/>that kind || ''ātsmā''<br/>that other kind || ''yasmāt?''<br/>which kind? || ''gusmā''<br/>no kind || ''sorasmā''<br/>some kind || ''grāṇismā''<br/>any kind || ''yavismā''<br/>every kind || ''viṣasmā''<br/>another kind || ''guviṣasmā''<br/>no other kind
* ''-tyāke'' (all verbs meaning "to stay", such as ''tatyāke'') — ''-timē, -tyāk, -(ɂ)atyā''
|-
* ''vjyāke'' (to grate, grind) — ''vjimē, vjyāk, avjyā''
! Quantity
* ''myāke'' (to carefully look, examine) — ''mimē, myāk, amyā''
| ''enūḍa''<br/>this much || ''utnūḍa''<br/>that much || ''ātnūḍa''<br/>that much (remote) || ''yanūḍat?''<br/>how much? || ''gunūḍa''<br/>none || ''soraṇūḍa''<br/>some of it || ''grāṇūḍa''<br/>any much || ''yaivnūḍa''<br/>all of it || ''viṣṇūḍa''<br/>another quantity || ''guviṣṇūḍa''<br/>no other quantity
* ''sklyāke'' (to store, spare) — ''sklimē, sklyāk, asklyā''
|}
 
===The causative and perfect stems===
Causative stems are easy to form: they are formed by attaching the stem extension ''-ild-'' (see below) to the infinitive stem; however, ablauting verbs always have the highest grade vowel, while inverse ablaut verbs have the "lowered" vowel in front of the normal stem (e.g. ''miš-'' → ''maiš-ild-'').
 
The perfect stem (used for the perfect and for the intentional future) formed by prefixing the root vowel (shortened, oral, and with the basic root ablaut) to the stem - but note that verb classes 5 to 10 have their own vowel patterns that diverge from this general one. Examples:
* ''nāmvake'' “to crush, press” = ''nāmv- → anāmv-''
* ''khluke'' “to search, look for” = ''khlu- → ukhlu-''
* ''hilkake'' “to dye, colour” = ''hilk- → ihilk-''
* ''męlike'' “to give” = ''męly → emęly-''
'''æ''', '''o''', '''å''', and '''ṛ''' all use '''a''' (except for ''ṛ-'' initial verbs, which have ''ṝ-''); diphthongs usually only take their first component:
* ''dældake'' “to speak” = ''dæld- → adæld-''
* ''kolkake'' “to be acid” = ''kolk- → akolk-''
* ''tṛlake'' “to know, understand” = ''tṛl- → atṛl-''
* ''ṛṣme'' "to plan to, to have the intention of" = ''ṛṣm- → ṝṣm-''
* ''yaudake'' “to catch” = ''yaud- → ayaud-''
* ''laitake'' “to row” = ''lait- → alait-''
* ''leike'' "to stick, press into something" = ''lei- → elei-''
 
Causative stems with ablaut have a full reduplication, using the first consonant plus the basic vowel grade, like ''miš- → maiš- → mimaiš-''. The causative interior forms have ''-ildr-'' with a short vowel, unlike for the past and present.<br/>''i-'' and ''u-'' initial stems have ''yai-'' and ''vau-'' respectively (e.g. ''ta-ut-'' → ''ta-vaut-'').
 
===The infinitive===
The '''infinitive''' (''emibąukire daradhūs'') or ''ke-form'' is a non-finite form used in certain construction (like with certain verbs (e.g. ''daudike'' (to want)) or particles). It is also the citation form, and it is simple to recognize and form:
* The infinitive is always based on the root, thus with either a basic-grade vowel for ablauting verbs or an unreduced sequence for inverse-ablauting ones.
* Thematic verbs add '''-ake''';
* All other verbs just add '''-ke'''. There are a few cases where this is not always how it surfaces:
** verbs ending in ''-y-'' turn it into the vowel ''-i-'' (e.g. ''męly-ke'' → ''męlike'' (to give));
** verbs whose roots end in any single or postnasal unvoiced dental, retroflex, or palatal stop or affricate, assimilate the ''-k-'' of the suffix (e.g. ''kit-ke'' → ''kitte'' (to put, place));
** verbs whose roots end in any single or postnasal voiced, non-velar stop, assimilate the voicing of the suffix ''-k-'' (e.g. ''dįb-ke'' → ''dįbge'' (to kick));
*** note that, due to regular saṃdhi, *-jg- resulting by this further changes to ''-jñ-'' (e.g. ''taj-ke'' → ''tajñe'' (to rub));
** verbs whose roots end in single ''-g'' or ''-gh'' assimilate the ''-k-'', with the regular saṃdhi change from double voiced stop to nasal + voiced stop (e.g. ''dig-ke'' → ''dilge'' (to pour));
*** This also happens with the cluster ''-nd'', where the assimilation ''-nd-k'' makes it ''-lg'' (e.g. ''mind-ke'' → ''milge'' (to hear));
** verbs whose roots end in any other consonant cluster only add ''-e'' (e.g. ''pudbh-ke'' → ''pudbhe'' (to sleep)).


Knowing the root form of the verb is necessary as two different roots may have the same infinitive, e.g. ''mulke'' for both ''mul-'' "to drink" (''molu'', ''mulau'', ''umulim'') and ''mun-'' "to be able to" (''maunu'', ''munau'', ''umunim'').
Note that in common speach ''ālīce'' and ''ūlīce'' as well as ''ātmena'' and ''utmena'' are basically interchangeable. The <small>QUALITY</small> correlatives may take an essive argument, e.g. ''lajlęs grāṇismā'' "any kind of chair".<br/><small>THING</small> and <small>PERSON</small> correlatives decline for case and, in the case of ''evita'', ''utvita'', and ''ātvita'', also for number (1h declension: ''evita'', acc. sg. ''evitu'', dir. pl. ''evitai'', dat. pl. ''evitesām''). <small>QUALITY</small> and <small>QUANTITY</small> correlatives also decline for case.


The infinitive can also be used as a noun, declining as ''-eh'' ones and getting a final ''-h'' in the direct case. Compared to derived ''-anah'' nouns, which denote a process, the nominalized infinitive is often more gnomic or perfective in meaning (''dhūlti baucanah'' makes sense, meaning "learning to write", while ''dholtani baucanah'' is grammatically correct but meaningless), but it can also be synonymous in some expressions (e.g. ''nenyai naviṣyi dholtanęs væse'' or ''nenyai naviṣyi dhūltęs væse'', both meaning "while writing this book" — if a distinction should be rendered in English, the first one would be translated "during the writing process of this book").
Not to be confused with their literal English translations are ''yaivemibe'' (or ''yaiva emibe'') "each, every" (literally "everyone") - which is most often attributive only in Chlouvānem - and especially ''sora emibe'', literally "someone", which has a completely different meaning: ''sora emibe'' denotes "some single subjects, considered as single entities, hence inherently plural and taking plural verbs: ''sora emibe draikate'' "some single subjects did it" ≠ ''soraita dṛkte'' "someone did it".


===Hues (''junyai'')===
Negatives, elective existentials, universals, and positive alternatives for thing and person correlatives may also take dual number:
Chlouvānem verbs are typically defined by the three (four) stems detailed above in the verb class section: present, past, perfect, and infinitive stem.
: ''gomīt~guvitāt'' "neither";
: ''grāṇamīt~grāmvitāt'' "either";
: ''yaivāt~yaivitāt'' "both";
: ''viṣāmāt~viṣvitāt'' "the other one".


The five "hues" (better known by their native term of ''junyai'', sg. ''junya'') are regularly formed verb forms with different meanings: desiderative, necessitative, potential, permissive, and intensive. They are not considered moods because each of them may be found in all three Chlouvānem moods, even though they lack an infinitive form. All of them are built starting from the infinitive stem.
Further correlatives not included in the above table:
: ''yambā?'' (whose?)
: ''smāmi'' (such a...) <small>(archaic, literary)</small>


====General consonant reduplication rules====
====Positional demonstratives====
The following rules are used in reduplicating the initial consonant while forming ''junya'' stems, as well as in the derivation of frequentative verbs. Variations on these rules are explained when referring to a particular ''junya''.
Chlouvānem has a large number of demonstratives, as they are integrated with the system of [[Chlouvānem/Positional_and_motion_verbs#Positional_verbs_.28jalyadaradhaus.29|positional verbs]], combining a general proximal-medial-distal distinction with positional prefixes, further localizing them in space. Only a subset of 10 out of the 24 positional prefixes are used to build demonstratives; the ones with a ∅- prefix correspond to most of the unused ones, and may be translated as "this/that one in front/ahead/in the middle" when a disambiguation from another one is needed. The same ten prefixes (except for ''įs-'') are also used together with the <small>PERSON</small> series (with the same logic), and with the <small>PLACE</small>, <small>DESTINATION</small>, and <small>SOURCE</small> correlatives, which act as adverbial anaphoras of positional and motion verbs. This results in forms like ''kamyejulā'' "here, around" or ''māhāñjulyom'' "thither (remote), rightwards".


Reduplication adds the first consonant of the verb (except prefixes) and its first vowel (always oral short).There are however some special rules followed in reduplicating:
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
* Aspirated stops are always reduplicated as unaspirated;
* '''g-''' is always reduplicated as '''h-''', except for a few irregular verbs;
* '''h-''' is reduplicated as '''k-''';
* '''k-''' as '''š-''';

* '''ƾ-''' as '''ƾ-''', but in the root it becomes '''ɂ'''.
* '''l-''' in the initial clusters '''lk-''', '''lkh-''', '''lg-''', or '''lgh-''' reduplicates as '''n-'''.
** Some roots beginning with '''l''' have '''ħ''' as their reduplication, most notably ''lun-'' → ''ħuloṃs-'' (to go on foot, walk (monodirectional)). This is because these roots began with the Pre-Chlouvānem cluster *ħl, which was then simplified to just '''l'''; originally, the reduplication was also regular (e.g. *ħlun → *ħuħloṃs-).
* Initial clusters which begin with '''s-''', '''ṣ-''', '''š-''', or '''v-''' use the first consonant which is not one of them (but '''šv-''' reduplicates as '''š-''');
* Verbs with ablautable vowels almost always have middle-grade ablaut (there are a few exceptions, such as ''khlu-''); '''ṛ''' reduplicates as '''a''';
* Inverse-ablaut verbs have the consonant of the unreduced root but the reduced vowel;
* Roots beginning with vowels are regular, reduplicating the otherwise allophonic initial '''ɂ'''.
* Prefixes are added before the reduplicated root.
 
====The desiderative ''junya''====
The '''desiderative''' '''''junya''''' is formed by reduplicating of the root and suffixing '''-s'''. The vowel used in the reduplication is the base grade (always oral short), while the one in the original root position shifts to the middle grade (if possible). Inverse-ablauting roots have the reduced vowel in the root position and the original consonant (''y-'' or ''v-'') at the beginning, with saṃdhi applied as needed.
 
Final added '''-s''' has some special saṃdhi rules, too (in addition to the usual ones):
* '''-d-s''' and '''-dh-s''' both become '''-ts''';
* After voiced stops, '''-s''' becomes '''-r''' and aspirated stops lose aspiration. '''-j-s''' and '''-jh-s''' both become '''-jl''';
* '''-š-s'', '''-c-s-''', and '''-ch-s-''' become '''-kṣ''';
* '''-y-s''' becomes '''-š''';
* '''-l-s''' becomes '''-ly''' when prevocalic and '''-lš''' when preconsonantal, but '''-rl-s''' always becomes '''-rely-'''.
 
The resulting stem, athematic, is used as the present and past stem. The perfect stem vocalic augment is short if the vowel in the root is long (or ''o, å'', or a diphthong), otherwise it is long (cf. ''nanāmusute'' "I want to crush", ''ananāmusaṃte'' "I have wanted to crush" vs. ''šukhlusute'' "I want to search", ''ūšukhlusaṃte'' "I have wanted to search").
 
Desiderative examples:
* ''peithake'' “to go (multid.)”, root ''peith-'' → ''pe-peith-s'' → ''pepeits-'' (pf. stem ''epepeits-'')
* ''lgutake'' “to buy”, root ''lgut-'' → ''nu-lgot-s'' → ''nulgots-'' (pf. stem ''unulgots-'')
* ''khluke'' “to search, look for”, root ''khlu-'' → ''šu-khlu-s'' → ''šukhlus-'' (pf. stem ''ūšukhlus-'')
 
Four verbs have irregular stems:
* ''jalle'' "to be" → ''jijāl-''
* ''lilke'' "to live" → ''lēlikṣ-''
* ''męlike'' "to give" → ''mimęñ-''
* ''milke'' "to take" → ''mūṃchl-''
 
====The necessitative ''junya''====
The '''necessitative''' '''''junya''''' is formed and conjugates much like the desiderative; it uses a stem formed by reduplication, and adding '''-sū-''', with the same saṃdhi changes found in the desiderative. There are a few differences in the reduplication:
* They have higher-grade or lenghthened vowel in the ''reduplication'' and not the stem;
* Verbs with non-ablauting vowels always have ''ī'';
* Inverse-ablauting verbs have ''va'' or ''ya'' as reduplication, followed by the root with the reduced vowel (''va-u-'' and ''ya-i-'' regularly become ''vo-'' and ''e-'')
The resulting stem is a regular vocalic stem.
 
The perfect stem always has a short vowel; quality is still based on the root vowel.
 
Necessitative examples:
* ''peithake'' “to go (multid.)” → ''pīpeitsū-'' (pf. stem. ''epīpeitsū-'')
* ''khlunāke'' “to search, look for” → ''šokhlusū-'' (pf. stem. ''ušokhlusū-'')
* ''nilyake'' “to think” → ''nenilšū-'' (pf. stem. ''inenilšū-'')
* ''valde'' “to open” → ''voltsū-'' (pf. stem. ''uvoltsū-'')
 
====The potential ''junya''====
The '''potential''' '''''junya''''' also conjugates in all tenses and aspects and has a stem formed with initial reduplication. It is formed by adding '''-(e)nā-''' to the root and behaves as a fourth conjugation verb, adding an epenthetic -n before vocalic endings. Note that ''-r-nā-'' becomes '''-rṇā-''' due to saṃdhi. Formation of the perfect stem follows the same rules as in the desiderative.
 
Potential examples:

* ''peithake'' “to go (multid.)” → ''pepeithnā-'' (pf. stem. ''epepeithnā-'')
* ''khlunāke'' “to search, look for” → ''šukhlunā-'' (pf. stem. ''ūšukhlunā-'')
* ''nilyake'' “to think” → ''ninelyenā-'' (pf. stem. ''īninelyenā-'')
 
A special case of saṃdhi occurs in roots which end in a single '''-g''' or '''-k''': this consonant becomes '''-gh''' and the '''-n''' in the suffix becomes retroflex, e.g. ''mūmikke'' "to dance", root ''mūmik-'' > ''mumūmighṇā-'' ; ''dilge'' “to pour", root ''dig-'' > ''dideghṇā-''.
 
The potential is used both for the sense of "may" (to be possible that) and "can" (to be able to): two sentences such as "I may (it is possible that I) do it" and "I can (I'm able to) do it" would be both translated as ''dadrenānute''. To avoid ambiguity, the "may" sense may be rephrased with the verb ''širgake'' plus subjunctive - e.g. ''dratite šergē'' - while the "can" sense may be rephrased with ''novake'' plus subjunctive - e.g. ''dratite novē'' - or (less commonly) with the infinitive - e.g. ''dṛke novute''.
 
====The permissive ''junya''====
The '''permissive''' '''''junya''''' also conjugates in all tenses and aspects and is formed with a reduplication with ''-ī-'' as the only possible vowel - except for verbs with a reduplicated non-nasal labial consonant, which have ''ū'' - and ''-ūd-'' after the root. The perfect stem always has a short vowel, and is formed as in the necessitative.
 
Permissive examples:
* ''mišake'' “to see”, → ''mīmišūd-'' (pf. stem. ''imīmišūd-'')
* ''peithake'' “to go (multid.)”, → ''pūpeithūd-'' (pf. stem. ''epūpeithūd-'')
* ''nilyake'' “to think” → ''nīnilyūd-'' (pf. stem. ''inīnilyūd-'')
 
====The intensive ''junya''====
The '''intensive ''junya''''' is formed by reduplication with diachronical lengthening and the base vowel in the root, plus suffixed ''-ī-'':
* ''khluke'' "to search, look for" → *šūkhluī- → ''šūkhlī-'' (pf. ''ušūkhlī-'')
* ''męlike'' "to give" → ''myamęlī-'' (pf. ''emyamęlī-'')
* ''nilyake'' "to think" → ''nīnilī-''
* ''valde'' "to open" → ''vauldī-'' (morph. ''vā-uld-ī-''; pf. stem avauldī-)
* ''nāmvake'' "to crush" → ''nānamvī-''
* ''milke'' "to take" → ''mīmilkī-''
* ''daudike'' "to want" → ''dādaudī-''
''jalle'' "to be" has a partial irregularity, deleting the root vowel entirely – ''jā-j∅l-ī-'' → ''jājlī-''.<br/>Intensives conjugate as vocalic stems, but always insert an epenthetic ''-n-'' consonant regardless of the following vowel, instead of undergoing regular saṃdhi.
 
The intensive, while theoretically formed from all verbs, may have different meanings depending on the verb, and some verbs are practically never used with it. Particularly, intensive forms of verbs of motion are often semantically identical to frequentatives.<br/>
Quite often, the intensive is not easily translatable into English, as it may range from simple emphatic forms (''dṝdīnaute'' "I really did it"; ''cīchlisire'' "it's fucking amazing"<ref>Intensive of ''chlisake'' (''chlaisire, chlisirek, ichlisirā''), Eastern Jade Coastal (Līlti, Līlasuṃghāṇi, Kūmanabūruyi, Līṭhalyināmi) slang for "amazing".</ref>; ''sēn mbinē dam? / mīmbunīnē!'' "do you like it? / of course I like it!"), to emphasis on the contrastive nature of an action (''pūni, pūpūnīnu ni'' "you work, but I work-<small>INT</small>." (i.e. "I work much more than you"); ''læchlyūyiri ni dā! / lǣlæchlīru!'' "come on, have some fun! / I am [already/indeed] having fun!"), or on the completeness and exhaustiveness of an action (''spṛšāvih ušūkhlīṃte'' "I've been looking for my keys in every single place"). Some verbs may be translated in different ways compared to the non-intensive form, e.g. ''læmyu jālejildekte'' "(s)he won the race" vs. ''læmyu jālejījildīkte'' "(s)he dominated the race".
 
===Stem extensions and terminations===
Stem extensions are bound morphemes that may be placed after the stem, and mark five different categories. Up to one for each category may be present:
# The first stem extension is the evidential category (actually combining evidentiality and epistemic modality):
#* Experientials (direct evidentiality) is the default and considered to be marked by the thematic vowel, therefore by '''-∅-''' for athematic verbs and by '''-a-''' for thematic ones.
#* The "first inferential" marks an inferred situation likely to be true, marked by a '''-u(ɂ)-''' thematic extension;
#* The "second inferential" marks an inferred situation whose truthness is unlikely or doubted, marked by '''-eb(i)-''';
#* The assumptive marks an assumption, marked by '''-ukin(a)-''';
#* The reportative (or "first reportative") marks a reported situation likely to be true, marked by '''-emi-''';
#* The dubitative reportative (or "second reportative") marks a reported situation whose truthness is unlikely or doubted, marked by '''-enab(u)-'''.
# The second stem extension is the causative marker '''-ild-''' (non-causatives are not marked)
# The third stem extension is the interior verb marker '''-ir-''' (exterior verbs are not marked)
# The fourth stem extension is '''-(a)mo-''', which marks the optative mood.
# The fifth stem extention, which is entirely optional (i.e. there is no unmarked category), marks consequentiality: '''-(n)ār-''' for a cause ("given that...") or '''-uts-''' for an opposition.
 
Stem extensions may be stacked and may also combine in unpredictable ways. The combinations listed here are those that do <small>''NOT''</small> follow regular saṃdhi (all other ones are regular).
* -ild-ir- → ''-ildṛ-''
* -ild-ir-(n)ār- → ''-ildṝl-''
* -ild-ir-uts- → ''-ildṝts-''
* -ir-(n)ār- → ''-irāl-''
* -ir-uts- → ''-irts-''
 
Finally, note that some stem extensions may trigger a change in the personal termination (e.g. the third person plural present indicative interior ''-irāhe'', not *-ir-āhai), while there are a few special personal terminations that already have the meaning of a stem extension (e.g. third person perfect indicative exterior ''-æ'' which also has the reportative meaning, therefore *-adm-a is impossible).
 
Note, furthermore, that ''-ir-'' (when not preceded by the causative marker) becomes '''-ęr-''' in the present of class 11 ''-ah'' verbs.
 
====Personal terminations====
The following table includes an overview of the sets of personal terminations in Chlouvānem. Note that, in the indicative mood, whenever a personal termination encoding evidentiality is not included, that means that the form together with the stem extension has to be used, not that that particular form is not possible.
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
|-
|-
! colspan=2 | !! <small>1SG</small> !! <small>2SG</small> !!<small>3SG</small> !! <small>1DU</small> !! <small>2DU</small> !! <small>3DU</small> !! <small>1PL</small> !! <small>2PL</small> !! <small>3PL</small>
! Prefix ↓ / Type → !! Proximal !! Medial !! Distal
|-
|-
! rowspan=2 | Indicative<br/>and Optative !! Present<br/>Opt. Imperfective
! ∅- (ahead)
| -u || -i || -ē || -sme || -dya || -de || -mim || -šin || -āhai
| ''nenē''<br/>this one ahead || ''nunū''<br/>that one (near you) ahead || ''nanā''<br/>that one ahead
|-
|-
! Perfect<br/>Opt. Perfective
! ān- (above)
| -am || -es || -a || -ra || -ri || -a || -ima || -iša || -a
| ''āninē''<br/>this one above || ''ānnū''<br/>that one (near you) above || ''ānnā''<br/>that one above
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | Indicative<br/>only !! Past
! šu- (below)
| -au || -ei || -(e)k || -ram || -res || -dat || -ābhe || -āṣe || -aika
| ''šunē''<br/>this one below || ''šūnū''<br/>that one (near you) below || ''šonā''<br/>that one below
|-
|-
! Simple future
! įs- (hanging)
| colspan=9 style="text-align: center;" | '''''-iṣy-''''' ''plus perfect terminations''
| ''įsinē''<br/>this one hanging || ''įsunū''<br/>that one (near you) hanging || ''įsanā''<br/>that one hanging
|-
|-
! Intentional future
! na(ñ)- (inside)
| colspan=9 style="text-align: center;" | '''''-ālt-''''' ''('''-āl-''' in interior and causative forms) plus perfect terminations''
| ''najinē''<br/>this one inside || ''najunū''<br/>that one (near you) inside || ''najanā''<br/>that one inside
|-
! kau- (outside)
| ''kaunē''<br/>this one outside || ''kaunū''<br/>that one (near you) outside || ''kaunā''<br/>that one outside
|-
! kami- (around)
| ''kaminē''<br/>this one around || ''kamyunū''<br/>that one (near you) around || ''kamyanā''<br/>that one around
|-
! pri- (behind)
| ''prinē''<br/>this one behind || ''prinū''<br/>that one (near you) behind || ''prinā''<br/>that one behind
|-
! vai- (beside; in the corner)<br/><small>(''sāṭ-'' for the main meaning)</small>
| ''vainē''<br/>this one beside || ''vayunū''<br/>that one (near you) beside || ''vayanā''<br/>that one beside
|-
|-
! rowspan=2 | Subjunctive !! Imperfective
! vyā- (left)
| -ati || -īs || -ī || -īndu || -īndi || -ī || -īnam || -īnes || -ī
| ''vyāɂinē''<br/>this one to the left || ''vyāɂunū''<br/>that one (near you) to the left || ''vyāɂanā''<br/>that one to the left
|-
|-
! Perfective
! māha- (right)
| -ēta || -ēti || -ēt || -ētham || -ēthai || -ēt || -eine || -eiše || -ēt
| ''māhenē''<br/>this one to the right || ''māhonū''<br/>that one (near you) to the right || ''māhānā''<br/>that one to the right
|}
|}
The ''įs-'' forms may also be used for things lying on people's hands.


Additional notes:
The forms for the <small>PERSON</small>, <small>PLACE</small>, <small>DESTINATION</small>, and <small>SOURCE</small> series are mostly formed through regular saṃdhi (with the partial exception of the ''na(ñ)-'' and ''vyā-'' prefixes):
* The present indicative exterior terminations of ''-ah'' verbs are: ''-ah -aši -ah ; -ąsme -ardia -arde ; -ąim -ąšin -ah'', with no distinct evidential forms.
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
* The imperfective optative singular has the irregular saṃdhi forms ''-mau, -mai, -mo''.
|-
* The ''-ir-'' root extension causes the <small>3SG</small> indicative present ''-ē'' to become ''-e'' and the <small>3PL</small> indicative present ''-āhai'' to become ''-āhe''.
! Prefix ↓ / Base !! ''·evita<br/>·ejulā<br/>·ejulyom<br/>·ejulų'' !! ''·utvita<br/>·uñjulā<br/>·uñjulyom<br/>·uñjulų'' !! ''·ātvita<br/>·āñjulā<br/>·āñjulyom<br/>·āñjulų''
* The third person interior imperfective subjunctive is ''-irya'' instead of *-ir-ī.
|-
<!--====Politeness markers (''tilah'')====
! ∅- (ahead)
The verb ''tilah'' is the only Chlouvānem verb which does not have an infinitive form and is only used, attached to the ''an-form'' of a particular verb, as a marker of politeness. Its use dates from the early part of the 5th millennium, as an adaptation of Lällshag ''tiluru'' (to obey) and, in the past, of ''nuyuru'' (to serve). Apart from the lack of an infinitive, it has some particularities, namely that it only conjugates in the three basic moods (indicative, subjunctive, and optative). The ''juniai'' are not marked on ''tilah'' but on the true verb (always in its infinitive stem, modified according to the needed ''junia'') and it is also defective in lacking evidentials and consequentials (the form without ''tilah'' is used instead).
| ''evita'' || ''utvita'' || ''ātvita''
 
|-
Its conjugation is mostly regular but has some particularities:
! ān- (above)
* The indicative present exterior is as for ''ah-verbs'' but shortened: ''tilah - tilši - tilah - tilāhai - tilądia - tiląde - tiląmim - tiląšin - tilah''; the present interior is as for all regular ''ah-verbs'' (''tilęru, tilęri, tilęre...'').
| ''ānevita'' || ''ānutvita'' || ''ānātvita''
* The causative forms show haplology of *il-ild to ''ild'': ''tildu, tildi, tilde...'' interior ''tildru, tildri, tildre...''
|-
* The indicative past exterior uses a stem ''ny-'' in the singular and dual and just ''ni-'' in the plural: ''nyau - nyei - nyek - nyaram - nyares - nyadat - nībhe - nīṣe - nyaika''; the interior and the causative are regular using ''ny-er-'', ''ny-eld(r)-'' (''nyerau, nyerei, nyerek...'' ''nyeldau, nyeldei, nyeldek...'' ''nyeldrau, nyeldrei, nyeldrek...'').
! šu- (below)
* The perfect exterior has the stem ''nīl-'' and has a shortened 1PL and 2PL: ''nīlam - nīles - nīla - nīlara - nīlari - nīla - nīlьma - nīlьša - nīla''. The interior has ''nīlr-'' (''nīlram, nīlres, nīlrā...'') and the causative ''nīld-'' (''nīldam, nīldes, nīldā...'' ''nīldṛm, nīldṛs, nīldirā...'').
| ''švevita'' || ''šūtvita'' || ''švātvita''
* The future is regular, but the endings (as well as the interior and the causative forms) all start with ''e'' instead of ''i'': ''tileṣyam, tileṣyes, tileṣya...'' Note that the causative forms have dissimilation of the stem to ''tireld-'' (''tireldiṣyam...'' ''tireldirṣyam...'').
* The subjunctive imperfective exterior is regular with the stem ''til-'' in the 1SG (''tilati'') and only ''t'' in the others (''tīs, tī...''). The interior has ''tiler-'' and the causative ''tireld-''.
* The subjunctive perfective exterior always has the stem ''t-'' (''tēta, tēti, tēt...''); the interior has ''tilr-'' and the causative ''tild-'')
* The optative is completely regular, with the (regular) stem ''tamo-''.
 
All voice affixes come before ''tilah'', as if the ''an-form'' were only a verbal prefix. The honorific verb is not used where there already is a honorific suppletive verb (cf. ''moṣite'' "you (honorific) ask" (verb ''muṣke'') → ''pardhite'' (verb ''pṛdhake''), not *muṣṭetilši).
 
Note that roots ending in -Cv- and -Cy- undergo a special saṃdhi change that changes those in -Cu- and -Ci- before consonants (see first example below).
 
Examples of the use of ''tilah'':
* ''nāmvegde'' ((s)he/it crushes) → ''nāmutetilah''
* ''lå'' (I go, walk) → ''luntilah''
* ''pūni'' (you work) → ''pūntilši''
* ''pupūṃsmim'' (we want to work) → ''pupūṃstiląmim''
* ''pū pūnī'' (if (s)he/it works) → ''pū pūntī''
 
In actual usage, ''tilah'' denotes respect towards the listener, and is used whenever the action being spoken of effects the listener in some way so, even in polite speech, not all verbs will use ''tilah'' - overusing it is a common error among people learning the language, not only foreigners but also young Chlouvānem people themselves.-->
 
===Voice markers===
Chlouvānem has seven voices, marked by affixes added, in unprefixed verbs, at the end of the verb. As the patient-trigger voice (common voice in interior verbs) is unmarked, the six voice markers are:
* '''-te''' for agent-trigger voice (in exterior verbs only) — but note that ''-ē-te'' (in most 3sg verbs) becomes ''-egde'' (as ''-ē'' derives from historical *-eg);
* '''-kæ''' for benefactive-trigger voice;
* '''-tū''' ('''-tur''' non-finally) for antibenefactive-trigger voice;
* '''-rā''' for locative-trigger voice;
* '''-mǣ''' for instrumental-trigger voice;
* '''-(m)bi''' for dative-trigger voice.
Examples of voice marking are ''męlyē'' (he/she/it is given) — ''męlyegde'' (he/she/it gives) (and ''męlyu'' (I am given) → ''męlyute'' "I give") — ''męlyēkæ'' (something is given for him/her/it) — ''męlyētū'' (something is given against him/her/it) — ''męlyērā'' (something is given in him/her/it) — ''męlyēmǣ'' (something is given with him/her/it) — ''męlyēmbi'' (something is given to him/her/it).
 
In prefixed verbs, voice marking is a bit different as the voice marker is inserted between the prefix and the stem, thus forms like ''yāyųlē'' (he/she/it is eaten too much) → ''yāteyųlē'' (he/she/it eats too much). Saṃdhi is applied if needed, e.g. "something is eaten for him/her/it directly from a tree" is ''taktæyųlē'' (morphemically ''tad-kæ-yųlē'', verb ''tadyųlake'').
 
The triggered arguments are always marked with the direct case; the other roles are marked with the respective cases and/or locutions:
* Patient: accusative case
* Agent: ergative case
* Benefacted: ''nali'' (governs the direct case)
* Antibenefacted: ''ras'' (governs the direct case)
* Place: locative case
* Dative argument: dative case
* Instrument: instrumental case
Patients of intransitive and interior verbs usually require the essive case instead of the accusative. An example is the structure "there is/are ... in ...", usually cast in locative-trigger voice:
: ''keika lalāruṇęs virā.''
: garden.<small>DIR.SG</small>. lalāruṇa-<small>ESS.SG</small>. be.<small>IND.PRES.EXP.3S.EXTERIOR-LOCATIVE</small>.
: There is a lalāruṇa in the garden.
 
===Impersonal verbs===
Impersonal verbs, in Chlouvānem, are those verbs that are defective and only conjugated in third person exterior (with the partial exception of ''giṃšake'') and only used in patient-trigger voice. There are six such -basic- verbs:
* ''gårḍake'' (to be meant to)
* ''hælte'' (to be moved, touched)
* ''maṣvake'' (to feel compassion, pity)
* ''mbunake'' (to like)
* ''ñæṃħake'' (to repent, to feel remorse, to be sorry for)
* ''prābake'' (to be disgusted)
* ''giṃšake'' (to get/be bored) — usually termed “half-impersonal” because it has a full interior conjugation, but with a different meaning (to be boring).
 
These verbs all have their cause in the exessive case (or a subjunctive verb) and the affected being in the dative, except for ''gårḍake'', which usually only has a subjunctive, and ''mbunake'', whose affected being (the English subject, i.e. who likes) is in the locative. Examples:
: ''lum lūṣyi maivat hæltek'' “what Lūṣya said moved me.”
: ''sēn nanāt mbinē'' "I like that."
: ''nīdrēta lum ñæṃħē'' “I’m sorry for how I behaved.”
: ''sę nanau pryūsimęlyati gårḍek'' “you were meant to give it back to me” (literally: it was meant that you give it back to me<ref>Note that in such a phrase the perfective subjunctive would have a different meaning, namely “to have already given it back to me”.</ref>) .
 
Derived forms usually behave as impersonal too, like ''taprābake'' (to hate) — e.g. ''taprāblelyom taprābiṣya'' "haters gonna hate".
 
===Irregular verbs===
Chlouvānem has only a very small number of truly irregular verbs, as most verbs conform in some way to one of the various stem classes. Even among irregular verbs, many of them are only irregular in the formation of one of their three basic stems; only seven verbs (''lulke, milke, mṛcce, mišake, lilke, jalle'', and ''tilah'') have at least one entirely suppletive stem.
There are two true defective verbs: ''ṛṣme'' (to plan, to be going to) and the honorific ''tilah'' (not a self-standing verb).
 
Excluding the highly irregular ''jalle'' and ''tilah'', treated in the next sections, the other verbs with suppletive stems are:
* ''lulke'' (to go on foot, to walk (monodirectional)) — ''lun-, dāmek, elīsa''
** The singular present indicative forms are irregular ''lå, lin, liven'' - the other ones are regular, non-ablauting (''lunasme, lunadya...'').
** Also has the irregular optative stem ''lau-'' (instead of expected *lammo-), conjugated as a regular verb (''lāvu, lāvi, lāvē...'').
* ''milke'' (to take, seize, catch, capture, get) — ''milūk-, milkek, ilaka''
** The singular present indicative forms use the stem ''milk-'': ''milku, milki, milkē'' - the other ones are regular (''milūkṣme, milūgdya...'').
** The optative stem is irregular ''målu-'', conjugated as a regular verb (''målū, målvi, målvē...'').
** Also has the irregular stem ''mūṃchl-'' for the desiderative junya.
* ''mṛcce'' (to run (monodirectional)) — ''marcē, pañcek, amṛca''
** Suppletive in the past stem only (pañc-). The present stem is ablauting.
* ''mišake'' (to see) — ''mešē, āsmik, imiša''
** Suppletive in the past stem only (āsmy-). The present stem is ablauting.
* ''lilke'' (to live) — ''lilah, lilek, lælī''
** Suppletive in the perfect only. ''-ah'' verb in the present, non-ablauting.
** Also has the irregular stem ''lēlikṣ-'' for the desiderative junya.
 
=====Miscellaneous irregularities=====
''ṛṣme'' (to plan, to be going to) is an unmarked agentive verb, which is only conjugated as agentive, and is a regular class 3 verb (''ārṣmē, ṛṣmek, ṝṣma'') It usually only takes verbs or verbal phrases as arguments, e.g. ''keitu dhāsmike ārṣmē'' "(s)he is going/plans to save the whale". It is often a synonym of the future intentional, though it conveys lesser certainty and may also be used for imperfective actions or states.<br/>
Note that the defectiveness does not apply to its derived forms - e.g. ''švṛṣme'' (to believe): ''švārṣmu'' "I am believed", ''šutayārṣmu'' "I believe" - and ''ṛṣme'' itself has regular causative forms (with the meaning of "make X intend to do").
 
The pair ''tamišake⁓tildake'' (to look at) is not counted as one of the thirteen irregular verbs, but ''tildake'' is an unmarked agentive verb, while ''tamišake'' is used in all other voices. Note that however ''tamišake'' also has a regular agentive voice, synonymous with ''tildake'': ''teldu'' ⁓ ''tatemešu'' (I look at); also note that ''tamišake'' has the same past tense suppletion as ''mišake'', i.e. ''tamešē - tāsmik - temiša''. The verb ''najake'' "to happen" (explained below among the compounds of ''gyake'') is also sometimes considered irregular, as a verb with an unmarked dative-trigger voice.<br/>Prefixed motion verbs are also not marked for voice in the patient- and agent-trigger ones (with only cases on nouns distinguishing them), but that is considered a particular but regular behaviour of a semantically defined subset of verbs.
 
''ñoerake'' (to crawl (multidirectional)) has the stem ''ñoerg-'' in the indicative present singular (''ñoergu, ñoergi, ñoergē''), but is regular everywhere else (''ñoerasme, ñoeradia''...).
 
''vṝlke'' (to plant), in the past, may use for the 3SG visual evidential both ''vṝlik'' (regular) and ''vṝk'' (quite formal); in the perfect, both the regular stem ''avṝl-'' and the irregular, literary ''rūrl-'' are found.
 
Two verbs with '''-ur''' in the root have irregular vowels:
* ''purake'' "to powder, to break with the hands": ''parē — (pārau) pāṭ — upura''
* ''sturake'' "to fall": ''starē — (stārau) stāṭ — ustura''
 
Three verbs have ''(a+) -ut'' in the infinitive and perfect, ''-at'' in the past, and ''att'' in the present:
* ''lutake'' "to obtain, gain, take advantage": ''lattē — (latau) lak — aluta''
* ''ssutake'' "to attract, to bait, to seduce": ''ssattē — (ssatau) ssak — assuta''
* ''sprutake'' "to join, link": ''sprattē — (spratau) sprak — aspruta''
 
Two verbs have '''(a+) -agv'' but ''-avu-'' in the past:
* ''lagvake'' "to assume": ''lagvē — lavuk — alagva''
* ''ṣṭagvake'' "to carve": ''ṣṭagvē — ṣṭavuk — aṣṭagva''
 
Other various irregular verbs:
* ''leilge'' (''leig-ke'') "to concern, to be on the topic of": ''leigē — (lågau) lål — eleiga''
* ''ręiške'' "to tickle": ''ręišē — (rąšau) rąs — eręiša
* ''lårpake'' "to swing": ''lårpē — lerpek — alurpa''
 
Three vowel-ending roots have an irregular behaviour:
* ''rileike'' "to need" has the expected ''ei → ey'' change in the present, but adds ''-n-'' in the past instead: ''rileyu, rileyi, rileyē...'' but ''rileinau, rileinei, rileik''...
* ''lįke'' "to swim (monodirectional) and ''mųke'' "to jump (monodirectional)" behave before vowels as if their stems were (ablauting) *lis- and *mus-: pres. exterior ''lesu, lesi, lesē''...; past exterior ''lisau, lisei, lįk''.
 
====The verb "to be" (''jalle'')====
The verb "to be" is suppletive as it uses various different stems (from Proto-Lahob ''*jaʕʕ'', ''*wi(w)ʕ'', ''*ri'',  ''*nī'', and ''*gəna'') and irregularly — for example, the non-singular present forms are morphologically perfect.
 
Note that the indicative present, unless evidentially marked, is rarely used, as the copula is usually dropped in many cases; when used with the meaning of "to have" (e.g. ''lili mæn tulūɂa yambras jali'' "I have six pears" (lit.: I <small>TOPIC</small> six pears are)) it is considered better not to drop it, but it is often done nevertheless in common speech. It is also kept when used with the meaning "there is...".
 
Both future tenses are rarely used in colloquial and semi-formal speech, as the present tense of ''ndǣke'' (to become) is usually used as a replacement.
 
=====Indicative mood=====
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
|-
|-
! colspan=2 | Person !! Present !! Past !! Perfect !! General future !! Future intent.
! na(ñ)- (inside)
| ''naivita'' || ''notvita'' || ''nātvita''
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | Sing !! 1st
! kau- (outside)
| ū || nīvau || rem || jalṣyam || nayu
| ''kāvevita'' || ''kāvutvita'' || ''kāvātvita''
|-
|-
! 2nd
! kami- (around)
| vei || nīvei || res || jalṣyes || nayi
| ''kamyevitai'' || ''kamyutvitai'' || ''kamyātvitai''
|-
|-
! 3rd
! pri- (behind)
| vi || nīk || ri || jalṣya || nayē
| ''pryevita'' || ''pryutvita'' || ''pryātvita''
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | Dual !! 1st
! vai- (beside, in the corner)
| jella || nīram || rira || jalṣyara || nīsme
| ''vāyevita'' || ''vāyutvita'' || ''vāyātvita''
|-
|-
! 2nd
! vyā- (left)
| jelli || nīres || reri || jalṣyari || nīdya
| ''vyāɂevita'' || ''vyāɂutvita'' || ''vyāɂātvita''
|-
|-
! 3rd
! māha- (right)
| jali || nīdat || ri || jalṣya || nīde
| ''māhaivita'' || ''māhotvita'' || ''māhātvita''
|-
! rowspan=3 | Pl. !! 1st
| jalim || nyābhe || rima || jalṣīma || nīmim
|-
! 2nd
| jalis || nyāṣe || riša || jalṣīsa || nīšin
|-
! 3rd
| jali || nīkā || ri || jalṣya || nyāhai
|}
|}
Note that, in the <small>PERSON</small> series, the ''kami-'' forms are only used with a plural meaning, as reflected in the table above.


All evidential terminations (except for, obviously, the experiential) are attached to a ''∅-'' stem.
====Declensions of correlatives and possessives====
 
=====Other moods and ''junyai''=====
The present tense or imperfective aspect of all other primary moods included as examples in this table:
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
|-
|-
! colspan=2 | Person !! Subjunctive !! Optative !! Desiderative !! Necessitative !! Potential !! Permissive
! rowspan=2 | Case || ā-paradigm !! ē-paradigm !! ū-paradigm !! t-paradigm
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | Sing. !! 1st
! <small>All possessives, ''nanā'' and other distals,<br/> ''yambā?'', ''ami'', correlatives in ''-i''<ref>e.g. ''sorami'', ''grāṇami''…</ref></small> !! <small>''nenē'' and other proximals</small> !! <small>''nunū'', and other medials, ''yanū?''</small> !! <small>''yasmāt?'' and ''yanūḍat?''</small>
| gati || jamu || jijālyu || jājalšū || jelau || jījalūdu
|-
|-
! 2nd
! Direct<br/>Vocative
| gīs || jami || jijāli || jājalšūyi || jelai || jījalūdi
| '''lilyā''' || '''nenē''' || '''nunū''' || '''yasmāt'''
|-
|-
! 3rd
! Accusative
| || jame || jijālye || jājalšūyē || jelai || jījalūdē
| lilyau || nenyu || nunūyu || yasmau
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | Dual !! 1st
! Ergative
| gīndu || jamosme || jijālkṣe || jājalšūsme || jelaisme || jījalūtsme
| lilye || nenye || nunūye || yasmātei
|-
|-
! 2nd
! Genitive
| gīndi || jamodya || jijālšadya || jājalšūdya || jelādya || jījalūndya
| lilyai || neniai || nunūyai || yasmai
|-
|-
! 3rd
! Translative
| || jamode || jijālšade || jājalšūde || jelāde || jījalūnde
| lilyān || nenēn || nunūn || yasmān
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | Pl. !! 1st
! Exessive
| gīnam || jamomim || jijālmim || jājalšūmim || jelmim || jījalūdmim
| lilyāt || nenēt || nunūt || yasmātat
|-
|-
! 2nd
! Essive
| gīnes || jamošin || jijālkṣin || jājalšūšin || jelāšin || jījalūdašin
| lilyą || nenę || nunų || yasmātą
|-
|-
! 3rd
! Dative
| || jamāhai || jijālyāhai || jājalšūyāhai || jelāhai || jījalūdāhai
| lilyåh || nenǣh || nunǣh || yasmātom
|}
|-
 
! Ablative
=====In compound verbs=====
| lilyąu || nenēhu || nunūvu || yasmąu
There are some compound verbs which are formed by a "meaning stem" + ''jalle''; they conjugate just like ''jalle'' does:
|-
* ''najalle'' "to happen" morphologically conjugates like ''jalle'' but has some peculiarities:
! Locative
** Like ''jalle'', there is no agent-, dative-, and instrumental-trigger voice, but the patient-trigger voice has a dative meaning - e.g. ''nañū'' "it happens to me".
| lilǣ || neniǣ || nunūvǣ || yasmātǣ
** The basic, semantically patientive forms, are the interior ones (with a contracted stem ''nañ-j-ir''), and they only exist for the third persons - e.g. ''najire'' "it happens", ''najirde'' "they (dual) happen", ''najirāhe'' "they happen", and so on.
|-
** It uses analytic constructions for most moods, e.g. ''najallenovake'' "can happen" > ''najallenovē'' "it can happen"; ''najalledaudike'' "to be wanted to happen" > ''najalledaudiute'' "I want it to happen" — forms such as the synthetic ''najelai'' or ''najæliašute'' are found only in archaic (mostly pre-Classical) texts or with other uses - as e.g. ''najelai'' being the most common word for "maybe".
! Instrumental
 
| lileni || nenēni || nunauni || yasmaini
===Analytic constructions and auxiliary verbs===
|}
Chlouvānem uses many analytic constructions - including auxiliary and compound verbs - in order to convey some shades of meaning. Most of these use either a participle or the infinitive as the form of the lexical verb:
* ''perfective subjunctive'' in the needed voice + ''lā'' (with) + ''jalle'' in the past or future tense: compound construction used for pluperfect and future perfect. It is not wrong to use it with a present tense, but the meaning does not change from the bare perfect.<br/> Note that, for the pluperfect, the bare perfect is often used instead, both in literature as in common speech.
** ''yųlētate lā nīvau'' "I had eaten"
** ''yųlētate lā jalṣyam'' "I will have eaten"
* ''imperfective subjunctive'' in the needed voice + ''lā'' (with) + ''jalle'' in the needed tense: compound construction used for the progressive aspect in the three tenses (present, past, future). In the present, the form of ''jalle'' is omitted for the third person, or for all persons if a pronoun is present.
** ''yųlatite lā ū'' "I am eating"
** ''yųlatite lā nīvau'' "I was eating"
** ''yųlatite lā jalṣyam'' "I will be eating"
* ''infinitive'' + ''ñǣɂake'' (to be used to): compound construction used for a habitual action in present, past, or future tense. It is not used with motion verbs in the present, as the multidirectional verb already unambiguously has this meaning.
** ''yaive prājamne yahikeñǣɂute'' "I am used to read every evening"
** ''yaive prājamne yahikeñǣɂaṃte'' "I used to read every evening"
** ''yaive prājamne yahikeñǣɂiṣyaṃte'' "I will be used to read every evening"
* ''infinitive'' + ''nartaflulke'' (to reach): to come to X, to end up X-ing, to result in X-ing
** ''yųlakenartatefliven'' "(s)he ended up eating"
** ''lañšijildenartaflunirāhe'' "they ended up marrying each other"
* ''infinitive'' (or more formally ''perfective subjunctive'') + ''kitte'' (to put): to keep X-ed:
** ''valdekitē'' / ''uvaldēt kitē'' "it is kept opened"
* ''infinitive'' + either ''įstiāke'' (to hang from) or ''maitiāke'' (to be in front of): prospective aspect, to be about to X
** ''yųlakayįstetimu'' "I am about to eat"
** ''yahikemaitimē'' "it is about to be read"
* ''subjunctive'' + interior forms of ''męlike'' (to give): to do X in advance — it can also be interpreted as a (plu)perfect if with perfect subjunctive:
** ''yųlatite męliru'' "I eat in advance"
** ''yųlētate męlirau'' "I ate in advance" → "I had already eaten"
* ''infinitive'' + ''paṣmišake'' (to look further away): to let X
** ''sū yahikepaṣṭemešu'' "I let you read"
* ''infinitive'' + ''mālchake'' (to run (multidirectional)): to keep X-ing (less formal alternative to ''mai-'' prefixed verbs)
** ''nanau yahikemālchute'' "I keep reading that" (synonym of ''nanau maiteyašu'')
* ''infinitive'' + ''nūkkhe'' (to mount (unidirectional)): to be still X-ing:
** ''tatyākenūkhute'' "I'm still standing"
* ''imperfective subjunctive'' + ''daudike'' (to want): to want to X (alternative to the desiderative ''junia'' commonly used especially in the Northeast). If the triggered argument is the same and the trigger is agent-trigger on both, it can be omitted in the subjunctive verb:
** ''kulati(te) daudyute'' "I want to talk" (= ''šukiliute'')
* ''imperfective subjunctive'' + ''širgake'' (to be possible): may X (non-ambiguous alternative to the potential)
** ''dratite šergē'' "I may do (it)" (= ''dadrenānute'')
* ''imperfective subjunctive'' (less commonly ''infinitive'') + ''novake'' (to be able to): can X (non-ambiguous alternative to the potential)
** ''dratite novē'' / ''dṛkenovute'' "I can do (it)" (= ''dadrenānute'')
* ''infinitive'' + ''prigirake'' (to move backwards): to redo X, to do X again
** ''dhultepritegeru'' "I rewrite, I write again"


===Adverbs===
<!-- ==Honorifics==
Adjectival verbs may be turned into adverbs (''khladaradhausire haloe'', pl. ''khladaradhausirāhe halenī'') by simply adding '''-ęe''' (rarely ''-e'') to the stem. Thus:
===Honorific pronouns===
* ''tarlausake'' (scientific) → ''tarlausęe'' (scientifically, according to science)
====Second person====
* ''namęlyausake'' (stakanovist) → ''namęlyausęe'' (continuously; without any break)
The rules for second person pronouns are mostly fairly easy. There are usually two contexts: formal and informal.  
* ''prātūkke'' (windy) → ''prātūkęe'' (windy; like the wind)


There are also some irregular adverbs, made from other speech parts:
Formal pronouns are three and (in contemporary Chlouvānem) invariable for gender, but they vary for relative rank instead: '''nami''' is used towards a superior, '''tami''' towards one of the same rank, and '''ravi''' towards a lower ranked person (until around 6350, ''nani'' was strictly feminine and ''ravi'' strictly masculine, and the rules for all three varied also according to the relative genders). '''nanak''', '''tanak''', and '''raṇak''' are their respective dual forms.<br/>
Plural second person pronouns are usually two: '''yakaliyātam''' is used towards the representative of a specifically defined group - an institution or a company -, while '''yavyāta''' (but also, in not extremely formal styles, ''nami'') is used for less defined groups.
* ''chlærūm'' (light) → ''chlære'' (easily) (but note its synonym ''chlærausęe'' from the related verb ''chlærausake'' (easy))
* ''dilake'' (same) → ''diledile'' (exactly the same way; emphatic version of ''dilęe''<ref>''dilęe'' also has the other meaning of "the same", as in ''lili dilęe dadrāṃte'' "I have done the same". ''diledile'' does not have this other meaning.</ref> but more common.)
* ''ṣati'' (way, mode) suffixed to a possessive adjective forms ''lilyāṣati'' (from my point of view; my way; in my opinion), ''sāmyāṣati'' (from your point of view; your way; in your opinion), ''demyāṣati'', ''tamyāṣati'', and so on.


Denominal adverbs are formed in a different way. In Archaic and Classical Chlouvānem, a noun in the instrumental plural (usually with the suffix ''-<sup>e</sup>/<sub>a</sub>nīka'') was usually meant as an adverb. However, starting from Classical Chlouvānem,&nbsp;'''-naise''', originally simply the locative singular of ''naisah'' "shape", came to be commonly used as a grammaticalized adverbial forming suffix, and it is the preferred way of forming adverbs from nouns today. Archaic and early Classical Chlouvānem only used the instrumental plural, with ''-naise'' only found sporadically when actually referring to something "in the shape of X"; later texts show the latter form becoming increasingly common, to the point of almost entirely replacing the instrumental plural as an adverbial marker, which only survives in religious texts today.
There are, however, more formal second-person pronouns with a limited use. All of these (here listed in Latin alphabetical order), unless noted, are morphologically nouns, but they are used with second person verbs anyway:

* '''aveṣyotariri nami''' (locution with the pronoun ''nami'') is sometimes used towards the highest ranked non-religious superiors, if they are several ranks ahead: examples include commanders of a military brigade or presidents of a company. However, ''nami'' is in most cases respectful enough; it is however invariably used in the set phrase ''lālyu nanyau aveṣyotariri yaccechlašute nami'' "I humbly ask for your forgiveness".
* '''gopūrṭham''' is often used towards public/religious and military officials.
* '''gopūrṭhami brausa''' (or '''yobrausa''') are used for the highest ranked Inquisitors, bishops, head monks, and the Baptist.
* '''lalla yobrausa''' is used exclusively for the Great Inquisitor.

* '''ṣari''', nowadays mostly old-fashioned, was used by guests towards homeowners and also by soldiers towards their superiors. It also meant, aside from being a pronoun, "landowner" or "head of a non-religious state"; in contemporary Chlouvānem it mostly only survives as a vocative expression towards homeowners when used by guests<ref>It also survives as a morpheme in some words, most notably ''ṣarivāṇa'' "state, country".</ref>.
* '''ūttuka''' is today only used in parts of the Northeast (aside by fictional characters in historical settings), but until about 6300 was a common pronoun word used by servants towards their superiors, particularly landowners (it thus partially overlapped with ''ṣari'').
* '''yobrausa''' — see ''gopūrṭhami brausa'' above.


====Underived adverbs====


It is also important to note that it's increasingly common to simply use the vocative formula - given name plus ''lāma'' - instead of any pronoun in formal context: when speaking to a superior named Lārtāvi Vaihātiai ''Lælithiam'', in order to say a sentence like "have you already done (it)?", ''nami nanau dadrāste nāṭ dām?'' and ''lælicham lāma nanau dadrāste nāṭ dām?'' are both just as correct. The pronoun forms are more commonly used in other cases, particularly in the genitive.<br/>Note that ''lāma'' itself does <small>NOT</small> decline: only the noun does – e.g. ''lælichamom lāma lę emęlya'' "it has been given by me to you/Mr. Lælithiam".
Some adverbs are not derived from any other part of speech. They include:
* All adverbial correlatives;
* ''lære'' (yesterday), ''amyære'' (today), and ''menire'' (tomorrow)
* ''mådviṣe'' (before), ''kaminæne'' (now), and ''ħærviṣe'' (after)
* The various "adverbial particles" such as ''tælū'', '''' (both "again"), ''nāṭ'', ''lǣh'' (both "already"), ''gudēya'' (anymore/no more), ''vivāmi'' (too much), ''mūji'' (almost), ''maibu'' (enough).
* Some adverbs formed by onomatopoeia or sound symbolism (and usually reduplicated) like ''rarāre'' (roaring) or ''tanetane'' (barefoot).


===Undeclinable adjective-like words===
In '''informal''' contexts, the only basic morphological second-person pronoun is '''sāmi''', which has the dual form '''sanak''' and uses '''nami''' as the plural form (with plural agreement on verbs). However, there may be even more informal contexts where other nouns may be used: the prototypical example is among siblings, where '''blikā''' (dual ''blikāt'', plural ''blikai''), an endearing term for girls (think of Japanese ''-chan'' or ''-tan'') is used as a pronoun for and among sisters — e.g. ''blikā meyom umuṣeste tane<ref>''tane'' is a colloquial contraction of ''dām'' (interrogative particle) and ''nane'' (emphatic tag question particle).</ref>?'' meaning "did you ask mum or not?"; as for all nouns standing for pronouns, this is not a vocative expression as it declines for case - e.g. ''blikom emęliaṃte nāṭ!'' "I've already given it to you!"; other such pro-nouns used among siblings are '''lorkhās''' (for and among brothers; literally "guy", can be rude outside this context), '''nājhali''' (non-binary equivalent to "girl" and "boy" — somewhat rarer as even in general use it's a more neutral term than either ''blikā'' or ''lorkhās''), and even '''samin''' (literally "kid"). [[Chlouvānem/Names#Informal_names_.28laltihalen.C4.AB.29|Informal names]] are also sometimes used instead of pronouns among siblings, and they're more often than not used that way among close friends and ''kaleyai''<ref>A ''kaleya'' is a "spiritual friend" in Chlouvānem culture — this word can be translated with "best friend", but it also evokes particular religious meanings.</ref>.
A few common words may be used attributively just like adjectives, but they do not decline. Most of them end in either ''-a'' or ''-i'':
* ''cami'' - great, large (figurative), important
* ''lalla'' - high, higher, next
* ''hulābdān'' - good (and ''chlǣcæm'' (better))
* ''taili'' - many, much
* ''nanū'' - more
* ''kaili'' - most
* ''ṣūbha'' - few, little
* ''yamei'' - "honorific" adjective
All numerals also belong to this category.  


When used predicatively, they need a form of ''jalle'' following them; ''yamei'' is only ever used attributively.
====Third person====
In Chlouvānem, the third person pronouns – which are the demonstrative sets, most commonly the distal ''nanā'' – are not used for people; the name of the person referred to with the appropriate honorific title is used instead.


Note that ''cami'', ''taili'', and ''kaili'', in some (but not all) Archaic Chlouvānem texts, have a singular-only declension based on the irregular one of ''ami'' (see the declensions of correlatives and possessives in the next section). Most probably this was an analogic feature of a few pre-Classical standardization Chlouvānem dialects of 2000 years ago.<br/>Particles such as ''maibu'' (enough) or ''vivāmi'' (too much/many) are semantically the same as these adjective-like words, but they are considered particles because they ''follow'' the noun they refer to (e.g. ''cūlli vivāmi virā'' "there are too many cars").
Repetition of names is usually not considered strange in Chlouvānem, but there are a few ways to avoid excessive repetition. The most natural one is obviously to state the person once at the beginning as the topic and then have all following verbs agree with it through the trigger system.


===Comparatives and superlatives===
Especially in contemporary Chlouvānem, the rank-neutral ''udhyāras'' (cf. "Comrade") is increasingly commonly used as a generic third person pronoun, though only after stating the name before.
Comparatives and superlatives are done in the same way in Chlouvānem. Comparatives are made by using either '''nanū''' (more) or '''ovat''' (less) in front of the adjective; the compared term is in ablative case; the superlative is formed by using '''yaivų''' (than all) as the compared term.
Adverbs use the same method (e.g. ''chlære'' (easily) → ''nanū chlære'' → ''yaivų nanū chlære''), but "than all" in superlatives is usually omitted, therefore they use ''nanū'' also with a superlative meaning.


This is used by both adjectival and non adjectival verbs, e.g. ''sąu nanū yæyute'' "I read more than you".
===Honorific particles===
 
There are a few honorific particles - mostly of Ancient Kūṣṛmāthi origin - that are used to make names or nouns honorific:
Forms expressing a continuous enhancement are made by deriving new verbs with the ''naš-'' prefix, e.g. ''yaiva pārṇame našñæñuchlire'' - (s)he becomes more beautiful each day.
* '''īvai''' makes a verb humble, and is put after a verb, too.
* '''nami''' denotes respect towards the trigger of the verb. It was common in the past alongside the honorific verb ''tilah'', but today it rarely used.
* '''yo-''' is a prefix for things pertaining to a honourable person, often used together with a verb with '''nami'''.
* '''dau-''' is a prefix that makes nouns honorific. -->


Equatives are made by using '''e''' (like) (requiring essive case) instead of the ablative; optionally ''enūḍa'' (this much) may be added: ''sąs e (enūḍa) yæyute'' "I read just as much as you". For "not as ... as", use ''gu taili'' (not as much) instead of ''enūḍa''.
==Numerals (''māltsāk'') ==
Chlouvānem is one of the few human Calemerian languages - together with all other [[Lahob languages]] and a few ones of the southern hemisphere, as well as others like [[Qualdomelic#Numerals|Qualdomelic]] or vernaculars of the Inquisition which have had considerable Chlouvānem influence - with a pure duodecimal number system.
 
Numbers (sg ''māltsām'', pl. ''māltsāk'') have six different forms: cardinal, ordinal, collective, distributive, adverbial/multiplicative, and fractionary. 1-4 have separate adverbial multiplicative forms, while all other ones have an invariable form used both as adverbial and 'adjectival' multiplicatives. Cardinals from 1 to Ɛ and their compounds decline for case (see below); collectives, multiplicatives, and fractionaries always decline, while ordinals are only declined if used without an accompanying noun. Distributives do not decline.


====Irregular forms====
There are six irregular adjectival verbs which are only used with synthetic comparatives, all synchronically suppletive:
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
|-
|-
! Positive !! Comparative !! Superlative
! Digit<sub>12</sub> !! <small>Base 10</small> !! Cardinal !! Ordinal !! Collective !! Distributive !! Adv./Multiplicative !! Fractionary
|-
|-
| ''ñikake'' (small) || rowspan=2 | ''isike'' (smaller; fewer, less) || rowspan=2  | ''iñekṣike'' (smallest; fewest, least)
! 0
| 0 || '''ajrā''' || <small>''(ajrāyende)''</small> || rowspan=2 | — || <small>''(ajrehaicē)''</small> || <small>''(māgajrā)''</small> || —
|-
|-
| ''ṣubha'' <small><sub>indecl.</sub></small> (few, little)
! 1
| 1 || '''emibe'''<br/>''emi'' || lahīla || emibhaicē || māgemibe <small>''(adv.)''</small><br/>emibarvīm || lahīlvāṭ
|-
|-
| ''sūrṣake'' (large) || ''svaprake'' (larger) || ''sprauṣake'' (largest)
! 2
| 2 || '''dani'''|| hælinaika || danyatām || danihaicē || māgdani <small>''(adv.)''</small><br/>danirvīm || hælinaivāṭ
|-
|-
| ''garpake'' (bad) || ''grāšcake'' (worse) || ''grauṣpake'' (worst)
! 3
| 3 || '''pāmvi''' || pāmvende || pāmvyatām || pāmvihaicē || māmpāmvi <small>''(adv.)''</small><br/>pāmvirvīm || pāmvendvāṭ
|-
|-
| ''hulābdān'' <small><sub>indecl.</sub></small> (good) || ''chlǣcæm'' <small><sub>indecl.</sub></small> (better) || ''chlǣcækṣike'' (best)
! 4
| 4 || '''nęlte''' || nęltende || nęltitām || nęltehaicē || māgnęlte <small>''(adv.)''</small><br/>nęltarvīm || nęltendvāṭ
|-
|-
| ''taili'' <small><sub>indecl.</sub></small> (many, much) || ''nanū'' <small><sub>indecl.</sub></small> (more) || ''kaili'' <small><sub>indecl.</sub></small> (most)
! 5
|}
| 5 || '''šulka''' || šulkende || šulkatām || šulkhaicē || šulkarvīm || šulkendvāṭ
 
|-
==Pronouns==
! 6
Chlouvānem has a series of pronouns which are irregular when compared to other nouns, yet they follow a mostly similar pattern among themselves. As with nouns and adjectives, in Chlouvānem there is mostly no difference between possessive and demonstrative pronouns and adjectives. Note that ''pronouns'' here are defined as a morphological category, as there are many pronominal locutions or nouns acting as pronouns in the Chlouvānem honorific system, as well as nouns standing for pronouns, both in formal and extremely informal speech.
| 6 || '''tulūɂa''' || tulūɂende || tulūɂatām || tulūɂihaicē || tulūrvīm || tulūɂendvāṭ
 
Standard Chlouvānem as spoken today uses the following morphological pronouns (not including those that follow nominal inflection):
* 1st person '''lili''' (sg.), '''lenak''' (dual), and '''mųmā''' (pl.).
* 2nd person informal '''sāmi''' (sg.) and '''sanak''' (dual).
* 2nd person formal superior '''nami''' (sg.; also used for 2nd plural, both informal and formal generic) and '''nanak''' (dual).

* 2nd person formal equal '''tami''' (sg.) and '''tanak''' (dual).
* 2nd person formal inferior '''ravi''' (sg.) and '''raṇak''' (dual).
* Reflexive '''demi''' (mandatory for 3rd person, commonly used also for 1st and 2nd).
 
The pronouns doubling as adjectives are:
* The demonstratives, all declining for case; there are 33 different forms depending on distance and position in space; '''nenē''' (proximal), '''nunū''' (medial), and '''nanā''' (distal) being the least marked ones, even though they may imply "ahead" if used to disambiguate from others.
* The possessives, which are also the genitive forms of pronouns: '''lilyā''', '''ilayā''', '''muṣyā''', '''sāmyā''', '''isayā''', '''namyā''', '''innayā''', '''tamyā''', '''ittayā''', '''ravyā''', '''irayā''', '''demyā''', ('''yanyā''').
 
Among younger speakers in some areas the Jade Coast, most notably in Līlasuṃghāṇa, Taitepamba, and Kūmanabūruh, demonstratives and possessives, when used attributively, are not inflected at all, e.g. ''lili nanā phēcamu mišau'' "I saw that cat" instead of standard ''lili nanau phēcamu mišau''.
 
In addition, '''yani''' is an emphatic pronoun not properly part of common speech (''demi'' is used instead) but sometimes found in high style. Archaic Chlouvānem had a demonstrative series consisting of proximal '''ami''', medial '''uteni''', and distal '''āteni''', which declined in use throughout Classical times, when they were replaced by the newer ''nenē — nunū — nanā'' forms.
 
''ami'' is still used regionally around the mid-course of the Nīmbaṇḍhāra (an area in the Central Plain: roughly the whole of the diocese of Raharjaiṭa, most of Jolenītra, Daikatorāma, Vādhātorama, and Namapleta, and parts of Mūrajātana, Perelkaša, Ryogiñjaiṭa and far northern Sendakārva) where it has been repurposed as a definiteness marker for non-triggered arguments - Standard Chlouvānem usually topicalizes the argument or uses ''nanā'', or, colloquially, leaves it unmarked and only understandable by context; cf. "the tiger is seen by the wolf":
: ''<small>(Standard):</small> ēmīla nanye bāḍhmānæ mešē'', or ''bāḍhmān mæn ēmīla mēšē'', or ''ēmīla bāḍhmānæ mēšē''.
: ''<small>(Mid-Nīmbaṇḍhāri):</small> ēmīla amye bāḍhmānæ mešē''.
 
As mentioned before, Chlouvānem does not distinguish singular formal superior and plural "you", having the single pronoun ''nami'' for both. Unlike the similar situation in English, Chlouvānem still differentiates them by marking number on the verb, so for example "you (sg) work" is ''nami pūni'', and "you (pl) work" is ''nami pūnašin''. Originally, ''nami'' was only the 2nd person singular feminine pronoun (as shown by its cognates in other Lahob languages); in Archaic Chlouvānem the original plural pronoun ''nagin'' is attested, but we lack attestations of any form except the direct and the genitive (''nagyā'').
 
=== Personal pronouns ===
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
|-
|-
! colspan=4 | !! Direct !! Accusative !! Ergative !!  Genitive !! Translative !! Exessive !! Essive !!  Dative !! Ablative !! Locative !! Instrumental
! 7
| 7 || '''chīka''' || chīcænde || chīcætām || chīcihaicē || chīkarvīm || chīcændvāṭ
|-
|-
! rowspan=5 | Singular !! colspan=3 | 1st person
! 8
| '''lili''' || lū || lę || lilyā || lan || lat || lįs || lum || ląu || lēn || laip
| 8 || '''mbula''' || mbulende || mbulatām || mbulhaicē || mbularvīm || mbulendvāṭ
|-
|-
! rowspan=4 | 2nd person !! colspan=2 | Informal
! 9
| '''sāmi''' || sū || sę || sāmyā || sān || sāt || sįs || som || sąu || sēn || saip
| 9 || '''moja''' || mojende || mojatām || mojihaicē || mojarvīm || mojendvāṭ
|-
|-
! colspan=2 | Form. sup.
!
| '''nami''' || nū || nę || namyā || nan || nat || nįs || num || nąu || nēn || naip
| 10 || '''tålda''' || tåldende || tåldatām || tåldihaicē || tåldarvīm || tåldendvāṭ
|-
|-
! colspan=2 | Form. equal
! Ɛ
| '''tami''' || tū || tę || tamyā || tan || tat || tįs || tum || tąu || tēn || taip
| 11 || '''vælden''' || vældinde || vælditām || vældihaicē || vældirvīm || vældindvāṭ
|-
|-
! colspan=2 | Form. inf.
! 10
| '''ravi''' || rū || rę || ravyā || ran || rat || rįs || rum || rąu || rēn || raip
| 12 || '''māmei''' || māminde || māmintām || māmeihaicē || māmairvīm || māmindvāṭ
|-
|-
! colspan=4 | Reflexive pronoun
! 11
| '''demi''' || diyū || ję || demyā || jen || jet || jįs || jum || jąu || jēn || jaip
| 13 || '''emibumaye''' || emibumayinde || emibumaintām || emibumaihaicē || emibumairvīm || emibumayindvāṭ
|-
|-
! rowspan=5 | Dual !! colspan=3 | 1st person
! 12
| '''lenak''' || ilo || ilahę || ilayā || ilān || ilāt || ilęs || ilām || iląu || ilæn || ilaip
| 14 || '''danimaye''' || danimayinde || danimaintām || danimaihaicē || danimairvim || danimayindvāṭ
|-
|-
! rowspan=4 | 2nd person !! colspan=2 | Informal
! 13
| '''sanak''' || iso || isahę || isayā || isān || isāt || isęs || isām || isąu || isæn || isaip
| 15 || '''pamihælī''' || pamihælīnde || pamihælītām || pamihælīhaicē || pamihælīrvīm || pamihælīndvāṭ
|-
|-
! colspan=2 | Form. sup.
! 14
| '''nanak''' || inno || innahę || innayā || innān || innāt || innęs || innām || innąu || innæn || innaip
| 16 || '''māminęlte'''|| māminęltende || māminęltitām || māminęltehaicē || māminęltarvīm || māmiynęltendvāṭ
|-
|-
! colspan=2 | Form. equal
! 15
| '''tanak''' || itto || ittahę || ittayā || ittān || ittāt || ittęs || ittām || ittąu || ittæn || ittaip
| 17 || '''māmišulka''' || māmišulkende || māmišulkatām || māmišulkhaicē || māmišulkarvīm || māmišulkendvāṭ
|-
|-
! colspan=2 | Form. inf.
! 16
| '''raṇak''' || iro || irahę || irayā || irān || irāt || iręs || irām || irąu || iræn || iraip
| 18 || '''māmivælka''' || māmivælkende || māmivælkatām || māmivælkihaicē || māmivælkarvīm || māmivælkendvāṭ
|-
|-
! rowspan=2 | Plural !! colspan=3 | 1st person
! 17
| '''mųmā''' || mųu || muhę || muṣyā || mųn || mųt || muhįs || mųum || muhąu || muhēn || muhaip
| 19 || '''māmichīka''' || māmichīcænde || māmichīcætām || māmichīcihaicē || māmichīkarvīm || māmichīcændvāṭ
|-
|-
! 2nd person !! colspan=2 | Informal
! 18
| '''nami''' || nū || nę || namyā || nan || nat || nįs || num || nąu || nēn || naip
| 20 || '''māmimbula''' || māmimbulende || māmimbulyatām || māmimbulhaicē || māmimbularvīm || māmimbulendvāṭ
|-
|-
! colspan=4 | <small>Emphatic pronoun (archaic)</small>
! 19
| '''yani''' || yū || yę || yanyā || yan || yat || yįs || yum || yąu || yēn || yaip
| 21 || '''māmimoja''' || māmimojende || māmimojatām || māmimojihaicē || māmimojarvīm || māmimojendvāṭ
|}
 
'''yavyāta''' (though often replaced by ''nami'') and '''yakaliyātam''' are used as formal second person plural pronouns; they are however nouns and decline as such (as singular 1-h and 1-m declension respectively, but they take plural verbs and adjectives). Various other nouns may be used as second- or third-person pronouns depending on the situation; see [[Chlouvānem/Morphology#Honorifics|the following section on honorifics]] for a list of them and their usage.
 
====Use of possessives====
Possessive adjectives are always used if they refer to an explicit topic, and in most cases (except those listed below) if the topic is only marked by the voice, e.g.:
* ''lilyā glūkam mæn māminęltende liven'' - my brother is in his 14<sub>12</sub>-th year (= is fifteen years old).
* ''ūnikire nanyā cūlla viṣam ūnime vi'' - your red car is on the other road.
The voice-marked topic usually does not have a possessive if it belongs to a first- or second-person agent which is explicitely marked. Particularly, the words ''meinā'' (mother) and ''bunā'' (father) are almost always possessive-less. e.g.:
* ''ñæltah laitenælire purṣīnaviṣyu lę emęlyosi'' - It is my sister I gave that wonderful poetry book to. — note how it is simply ''ñæltah'' and not ''lilyā ñæltah'' because of the presence of the ergative pronoun ''lę''.
If the sentence is focussed on a verb-marked (i.e. with a dropped pronoun) agent, it is more common to use the possessive. In many colloquial varieties of Chlouvānem, there is a developing distinction between using the reflexive and the 1st- or 2nd- person forms, where the reflexive is more commonly (but still not exclusively!) used for alienable possession and the other for inalienable possession. Thus, "my sister" is more commonly ''lilyā ñæltah'', while "my book" is more commonly ''demyā naviṣya'', at least in a sentence with a first person focus. The above example would become ''lilyåh ñæltom laitenælire purṣīnaviṣyu emęlyaṃte''; one could also stress the fact it's their own book and thus say ''lilyåh ñæltom laitenælire demyau purṣīnaviṣyu emęlyaṃte''.<br/>Still, even in this case, "mother" and "father" would still lack a possessive, as referring to someone else's mother or father would anyway need the honorific words ''nāḍima'' and ''tāmvāram'' respectively, instead of ''meinā'' and ''bunā''.
 
In the third person, especially plural, ''demyā'' may be used without an explicit subject, i.e. ''demyau kitu āntedarāhai'' "they are building their own home".
 
=== Correlatives ===
Chlouvānem has a fairly regular system of correlatives, distinguishing ten types (proximal, medial, distal, interrogative, negative, assertive existential, elective existential, universal, positive alternative, and negative alternative) in eleven categories (attributive, thing, person, time, place, destination, origin, way, reason, quality, quantity).
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
|-
|-
! Category ↓ / Type → !! Proximal !! Medial !! Distal !! Interrogative !! Negative !! Ass. exist. !! Elect. exist. !! Universal !! Positive altern. !! Negative altern.
! 1ᘔ
| 22 || '''māmitålda''' || māmitåldende || māmitåldatām || māmitåldihaicē || māmitåldarvīm || māmitåldendvāṭ
|-
|-
! Attributive
!
| rowspan=2 | ''nenē''<br/><small>(and others; see below)</small><br/>this (one) || rowspan=2 | ''nunū''<br/><small>(and others; see below)</small><br/>that (one) (near you) || rowspan=2 | ''nanā''<br/><small>(and others; see below)</small><br/>that (one) (over there) || rowspan=2 | ''yanū?''<br/>what?, which (one) ? || ''gu''<br/>no || ''sora''<br/>some || ''læti''<br/>any || rowspan=2 | ''yaiva''<br/>every(thing) || ''viṣam''<br/>another, other || ''guviṣam''<br/>no other
| 23 || '''māmivælden''' || māmivældinde || māmivælditām || māmivældihaicē || māmivældirvīm || māmivældindvāṭ
|-
|-
! Thing
! 20
| ''gvami''<br/>nothing || ''sorami''<br/>something || ''lætyami''<br/>anything || ''viṣāmi''<br/>something else || ''guviṣāmi''<br/>nothing else
| 24 || '''hælmāmei''' || hælmāminde || hælmāmintām || hælmāmeihaicē || hælmāmairvīm || hælmāmindvāṭ
|-
! Person
| ''·evita''<br/>this one || ''·utvita''<br/>that one (near you) || ''·ātvita''<br/>that one (over there) || ''yavita?''<br/>who? || ''guvita''<br/>no one || ''soraita''<br/>someone || ''lævita''<br/>anyone || ''yaivita''<br/>everyone || ''viṣvita''<br/>someone else || ''guviṣvita''<br/>no one else
|-
! Time
| ''emiya''<br/>now || ''utiya''<br/>then || ''ātiya''<br/>then (remote) || ''yamiya?''<br/>when? || ''gumiya''<br/>never || ''soramiya''<br/>sometime, somewhen || ''lætmiya''<br/>anytime, whenever || ''yaivmiya''<br/>always, everytime || ''viṣmiya''<br/>sometime else || ''guviṣmiya''<br/>never else
|-
! Place
| ''·ejulā''<br/>here || ''·uñjulā''<br/>there || ''·āñjulā''<br/>over there || ''yajulā?''<br/>where? || ''gujulā''<br/>nowhere || ''sorajulā''<br/>somewhere || ''læjulā''<br/>anywhere || ''yavijulā''<br/>everywhere || ''viñjulā''<br/>elsewhere || ''guviñjulā''<br/>nowhere else
|-
! Destination
| ''·ejulyom''<br/>hither || ''·uñjulyom''<br/>thither || ''·āñjulyom''<br/> thither (remote) || ''yajulyom?''<br/>whither? || ''gujulyom''<br/>nowhither || ''sorajulyom''<br/>somewhither || ''læjulyom''<br/>anywhither || ''yavijulyom''<br/>everywhither || ''viñjulyom''<br/>elsewhither || ''guviñjulyom''<br/>nowhither else
|-
! Source
| ''·ejulųu''<br/>hence || ''·uñjulųu''<br/>thence || ''·āñjulųu''<br/> thence (remote) || ''yajulųu?''<br/>whence? || ''gujulųu''<br/>nowhence ||  ''sorajulųu''<br/>somewhence || ''læjulųu''<br/>anywhence || ''yavijulųu''<br/>everywhence || ''viñjulųu''<br/>elsewhence || ''guviñjulųu''<br/>nowhence else
|-
! Manner
| ''elīce''<br/>thus, hereby || ''ūlīce''<br/>thereby || ''ālīce''<br/>thereby; that other way || ''yalīce?''<br/>how? || ''gulīce''<br/>no way || ''soralīce''<br/>somehow || ''lælīce''<br/>anyhow || ''yaivlīce''<br/>everyway || ''viṣlīce''<br/>otherwise || ''guviṣlīce''<br/>no other way
|-
! Reason
| ''emena''<br/>herefore || ''utmena''<br/>therefore || ''ātmena''<br/>therefore; for that other reason || ''yamenat?''<br/>why? || ''gumena''<br/>for no reason || ''soramena''<br/>somewhy || ''lætmena''<br/>whyever, for any reason || ''yaivmena''<br/>for every reason || ''viṣmena''<br/>for another reason || ''guviṣmena''<br/>for no other reason
|-
! Quality
| ''esmā''<br/>this kind || ''utsmā''<br/>that kind || ''ātsmā''<br/>that other kind || ''yasmāt?''<br/>which kind? || ''gusmā''<br/>no kind || ''sorasmā''<br/>some kind || ''læsmā''<br/>any kind || ''yavismā''<br/>every kind || ''viṣasmā''<br/>another kind || ''guviṣasmā''<br/>no other kind
|-
! Quantity
| ''enūḍa''<br/>this much || ''utnūḍa''<br/>that much || ''ātnūḍa''<br/>that much (remote) || ''yanūḍat?''<br/>how much? || ''gunūḍa''<br/>none || ''soraṇūḍa''<br/>some of it || ''lætnūḍa''<br/>any much || ''yaivnūḍa''<br/>all of it || ''viṣṇūḍa''<br/>another quantity || ''guviṣṇūḍa''<br/>no other quantity
|}
|}
As for the two forms for one, ''emi'' is used in disjunctive counting (e.g. count-ins or countdowns) while ''emibe'' is used elsewhere. Compounds always have the full form, i.e. forms such as *hælmāmyemi do not exist.<br/>Some compound words, especially technical and scientific ones, use [[Lällshag]] morphemes for the quantities from 1 to ᘔ (though from 5 onwards they're rarer): ''mån-''&nbsp;1, ''yūn-''&nbsp;2, ''lyāš-''&nbsp;3, ''alan-''&nbsp;4, ''tamb-''&nbsp;5, ''jiruṇ-'' or ''ciruṇ-''&nbsp;6, ''tulyæn-''&nbsp;7, ''neim-''&nbsp;8, ''šid-''&nbsp;9, ''abar-''&nbsp;ᘔ.


Note that in common speach ''ālīce'' and ''ūlīce'' as well as ''ātmena'' and ''utmena'' are basically interchangeable. The <small>QUALITY</small> correlatives may take an essive argument, e.g. ''lajlęs læsmā'' "any kind of chair".<br/><small>THING</small> and <small>PERSON</small> correlatives decline for case and, in the case of ''evita'', ''utvita'', and ''ātvita'', also for number (1h declension: ''evita'', acc. sg. ''evitu'', dir. pl. ''evitai'', dat. pl. ''evitesām''). <small>QUALITY</small> and <small>QUANTITY</small> correlatives also decline for case.
Numbers from 20<sub>12</sub> above are simply made by compounding teens and units with the appropriate saṃdhi changes, like 21<sub>12</sub> <small>(25<sub>10</sub>)</small> ''hælmāmyemibe'', and then ''hælmāmidani'', ''hælmāmipāmvi'', and so on. Note that other compounds with 6 use -tulūɂa and not -vælka as in 16<sub>12</sub>.<br/>
The other dozens are:
: '''30''' <small>(36<sub>10</sub>)</small> pāmvimāmei
: '''40''' <small>(48<sub>10</sub>)</small> nęltemāmei
: '''50''' <small>(60<sub>10</sub>)</small> šulkmāmei
: '''60''' <small>(72<sub>10</sub>)</small> vælknihæla
: '''70''' <small>(84<sub>10</sub>)</small> māmyāvælka (regionally ''chīcæmāmei'', particularly in the East)
: '''80''' <small>(96<sub>10</sub>)</small> mbulmāmei
: '''90''' <small>(108<sub>10</sub>)</small> mojemāmei
: '''ᘔ0''' <small>(120<sub>10</sub>)</small> tåldimāmei
: '''Ɛ0''' <small>(132<sub>10</sub>)</small> māmimīram
: and '''100''' <small>(144<sub>10</sub>)</small> nihæla.
The apparent irregularities in the words for 60<sub>12</sub>, 70<sub>12</sub>, and Ɛ0<sub>12</sub> are explained by etymology: ''vælka'' is the reflex of PLB *wewənko, which meant “half”, thus ''vælknihæla'' is “half hundred” and ''māmyāvælka'' is “twelve on half”; ''māmimīram'' is literally “twelve [less] from ahead”. 13<sub>12</sub> originally meant "one finger/three (''pāmvi'', the word for three, also meant "finger" in PLB (*pāmwəj) - whence also the Chlouvānem word for "finger", ''pamuvis'' (< PLB *pamwəjis)) in the second [dozen]", where the ''-hælī'' part is a worn form of ''hælinaika''.


Not to be confused with their literal English translations are ''yaivemibe'' (or ''yaiva emibe'') "each, every" (literally "everyone") - which is most often attributive only in Chlouvānem - and especially ''sora emibe'', literally "someone", which has a completely different meaning: ''sora emibe'' denotes "some single subjects, considered as single entities, hence inherently plural and taking plural verbs: ''sora emibe draikate'' "some single subjects did it" ≠ ''soraita dṛkte'' "someone did it".
Numbers from 100<sub>12</sub> to ƐƐƐ<sub>12</sub> are still compounds, e.g. ''nihælaimibe'', ''nihæladani'', and so on. Note that 160<sub>12</sub> is most commonly ''nihæltulūɂa'', but the more literary form ''nihælvælka'' may still be heard.<br/>
The other dozenal hundreds are:
: '''200''' <small>(288<sub>10</sub>)</small> daninihæla
: '''300''' <small>(432<sub>10</sub>)</small>  pāmvinihæla
: '''400''' <small>(576<sub>10</sub>)</small>  nęltenihæla
: '''500''' <small>(720<sub>10</sub>)</small> šulknihæla
: '''600''' <small>(864<sub>10</sub>)</small> tulūnihæla
: '''700''' <small>(1008<sub>10</sub>)</small> chīcænihæla
: '''800''' <small>(1152<sub>10</sub>)</small> mbulnihæla
: '''900''' <small>(1296<sub>10</sub>)</small> mojanihæla
: '''ᘔ00''' <small>(1440<sub>10</sub>)</small> tåldanihæla
: '''Ɛ00''' <small>(1584<sub>10</sub>)</small> vældenihæla.
'''1.000''' <small>(1728<sub>10</sub>)</small> is ''tildhā'' and numbers above are separate words, without saṃdhi, e.g. '''1.001''' ''tildhā emibe'', '''6.2ᘔ9''' <small>(10785<sub>10</sub>)</small> ''tulūɂa tildhā daninihælatåldimāmimoja''.<br/>
Note that 2.000<sub>12</sub> may be either one of ''tildhāt'', ''dani tildhā'', or (only emphatically) ''dani tildhāt''.


Negatives, elective existentials, universals, and positive alternatives for thing and person correlatives may also take dual number:
The other divisions - numbers over ƐƐ.ƐƐƐ<sub>12</sub> are based on groups of two digits: the two most commonly used ones in common speech are '''1.00.000''' <small>(248.832<sub>10</sub>)</small> - a ''raicē'' - and '''1.00.00.000''' <small>(35.831.808<sub>10</sub>)</small> - a ''lallaraicē''.
: ''gvamīt~guvitāt'' "neither";  
 
: ''lætyamīt~lævitāt'' "either";
The next two groups have their separate words, but are quantities rarely used in common speech: '''1.00.00.00.000''' (12<sup>9</sup>) <small>(5.159.780.352<sub>10</sub>)</small> is a ''taiskaucis'' and '''1.00.00.00.00.000''' (12<sup>11</sup>) <small>(743.008.370.688<sub>10</sub>)</small> a ''lallataiskaucis''. The words ''khorādi'' (12<sup>7</sup>, i.e. synonym of lallaraicē), ''yaṣmūn'' (12<sup>11</sup>, i.e. lallataiskaucis), ''iriakas'' (12<sup>13</sup>), ''mairāṇa'' or ''lalleriakas'' (12<sup>15</sup>), ''nirāvah'' (12<sup>17</sup>), and ''sṝva'' or ''lallanirāvah'' (12<sup>19</sup>) were introduced in Classical-era texts, but are almost never used today. However, they form the base for the scientific measurement system's prefixes.
: ''yaivāt~yaivitāt'' "both";
 
: ''viṣāmāt~viṣvitāt'' "the other one".
Their non-cardinal forms are all regular, with ''-ende'' (''-inde'' after ''-m'' or for Ɛ<sub>12</sub>) for ordinals, ''-tām'' for collectives, ''-haicē'' for distributives, ''-rvīm'' for adverbials/multiplicatives (prefixed ''māg-'' for the separate adverbial forms), and ''-endvāṭ/-indvāṭ'' for the fractionaries. Compounds of 1-2 retain all irregular suppletive forms, e.g. ''hælmāmilahīla'' 21<sub>12</sub>st (25<sub>10</sub>th); ''hælmāmihælinaika'' 22<sub>12</sub>nd (26<sub>10</sub>th).
 
Finally, there are few other cardinals commonly used in speech: ''vālhælya'' 1½, ''vālpāmvya'' 2½, ''vālnęlca'' 3½, ''vālšulca'' 4½, and ''vāltulūya'' 5½. The forms ''vālchīca'', ''vālambulya'' (or ''vālumbulya''), and ''vālmojya'' are used in telling the time only and obsolete otherwise, while other similar forms are sparingly attested in older mathematical texts, but periphrastical constructions such as ''tulūɂa hælinaivāṭ no'' (or, sometimes, ''- vælka no'') are more commonly heard and used nowadays. A form that, however, is sometimes found up to the present day is ''vālhælnihæla'', meaning 160<sub>12</sub> (216<sub>10</sub>), i.e. one dozenal hundred and a half.


Further correlatives not included in the above table:
====Use of fractionary numbers====
: ''yambā?'' (whose?)
Fractionary numbers (except ''vāl-'' ones) are used to express non-integers just like any other quantity. Simple ones such as 0,6 (½) are the basic fractionary number - in this case ''hælinaivāṭ'' (note that, outside mathematics, ''danyāmita'' is the preferred term for "half", both in metaphorical (''lilyā viṣam danyāmita'' "my other half") and non-metaphorical uses (''alāvi danyāmita'' "half of the bottle")); other examples are 0,3 (¼) ''nęltendvāṭ'' and 0,4 (⅓) ''pāmvendvāṭ''.<br/>
: ''smāmi'' (such a...) <small>(archaic, literary)</small>
With more complex fractions, the smallest part (negative power of twelve) is stated - the three commonly found are 1/12 (''māmindvāṭ''), 1/144 (''nihælendvāṭ''), and 1/1728 (''tildhaindvāṭ''). For example, 0,82 is ''mbulmāmidani nihælendvāṭ'' and 0,7ᘔ6 is ''chīcænihælamāmimīraṃtulūɂa tildhaindvāṭ''; sometimes, "0, then" (mīram) may be added: ''ajrā mīram mbulmāmidani nihælendvāṭ''.


====Positional demonstratives====
With a non-fractionary portion that is not zero, instead of ''mīram'', ''smurā'' (full, integer) is used - e.g. 2,307 is usually said as ''dani smurā pāmvinihælchīka tildhaindvāṭ''.
Chlouvānem has a large number of demonstratives, as they are integrated with the system of [[Chlouvānem/Positional_and_motion_verbs#Positional_verbs_.28jalyadaradhaus.29|positional verbs]], combining a general proximal-medial-distal distinction with positional prefixes, further localizing them in space. Only a subset of 10 out of the 24 positional prefixes are used to build demonstratives; the ones with a ∅- prefix correspond to most of the unused ones, and may be translated as "this/that one in front/ahead/in the middle" when a disambiguation from another one is needed. The same ten prefixes (except for ''įs-'') are also used together with the <small>PERSON</small> series (with the same logic), and with the <small>PLACE</small>, <small>DESTINATION</small>, and <small>SOURCE</small> correlatives, which act as adverbial anaphoras of positional and motion verbs. This results in forms like ''kamyejulā'' "here, around" or ''māhāñjulyom'' "thither (remote), rightwards".


====Declensions of cardinal numbers====
Some cardinal numbers are declined for case, but this is usually only done in formal Chlouvānem. In informal Chlouvānem, either only ''emibe'' is declined, or are all numerals up to ''vælden'', plus ''nihæla''. Compounds of these are usually not declined. The words ''tildhā'', ''(lalla)raicē'', and ''(lalla)taiskaucis'' are always declined, but they are fully nouns.
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
|-
|-
! Prefix ↓ / Type → !! Proximal !! Medial !! Distal
! rowspan=2 | Case !! rowspan=2 | ''emibe'' !! Dual paradigm !! i-paradigm !! a-paradigm !! en-paradigm
|-
|-
! -
! <small>''dani''</small> !! ''pāmvi'', ''nęlte''</small><ref>''nęlte'' has the stem ''nęlc-'' wherever ''pāmvi'' has ''-vy-'', i.e. accusatives ''pāmvyu, nęlcu''.</ref> !! <small>5 to 10<ref>''chīka'' has the stem ''chīcæ-'' before consonants.</ref></small> !! <small>''vælden'' only</small>
| ''nenē''<br/>this one ahead || ''nunū''<br/>that one (near you) ahead || ''nanā''<br/>that one ahead
|-
|-
! ān-
! Direct<br/>Vocative
| ''āninē''<br/>this one above || ''ānnū''<br/>that one (near you) above || ''ānnā''<br/>that one above
| '''emibe''' || '''dani''' || '''pāmvi''' || '''šulka''' || '''vælden'''
|-
|-
! šu-
! Accusative
| ''šunē''<br/>this one below || ''šūnū''<br/>that one (near you) below || ''šonā''<br/>that one below
| emiyu || daneṣa || pāmvyu || šulku || vældu
|-
|-
! įs-
! Ergative
| ''įsinē''<br/>this one hanging || ''įsunū''<br/>that one (near you) hanging || ''įsanā''<br/>that one hanging
| emeis || daneya || pāmvyes || šulkes || vældes
|-
|-
! na(ñ)-
! Genitive
| ''najinē''<br/>this one inside || ''najunū''<br/>that one (near you) inside || ''najanā''<br/>that one inside
| emibī || dañva || pāmvi<ref>''nęlte'' has the form ''nęlci''.</ref> || šulki || vældi
|-
|-
! kau-
! Translative
| ''kaunē''<br/>this one outside || ''kaunū''<br/>that one (near you) outside || ''kaunā''<br/>that one outside
| emiban || danaus || pāmvin || šulkan || vældanna
|-
! Exessive
| emibat || danebhan || pāmvit || šulkat || vældanta
|-
|-
! kami-
! Essive
| ''kaminē''<br/>this one around || ''kamyunū''<br/>that one (near you) around || ''kamyanā''<br/>that one around
| emibą || danīgin || pāmvyą || šulką || vældąs
|-
|-
! pri-
! Dative
| ''prinē''<br/>this one behind || ''prinū''<br/>that one (near you) behind || ''prinā''<br/>that one behind
| emibå || danaus || pāmvyå || šulkå || vældå
|-
|-
! vai-<br/><small>(''sāṭ-'' for the main meaning)</small>
! Ablative
| ''vainē''<br/>this one beside || ''vayunū''<br/>that one (near you) beside || ''vayanā''<br/>that one beside
| emiyų || danebhan || pāmvyų || šulkų || vældų
|-
|-
! vyā-
! Locative
| ''vyāɂinē''<br/>this one to the left || ''vyāɂunū''<br/>that one (near you) to the left || ''vyāɂanā''<br/>that one to the left
| emiye || danīgin || pāmvye || šulke || vælde
|-
|-
! māha-
! Instrumental
| ''māhenē''<br/>this one to the right || ''māhonū''<br/>that one (near you) to the right || ''māhānā''<br/>that one to the right
| emīp || danebhan || pāmvip || šulkip || vældampa
|}
|}


The forms for the <small>PERSON</small>, <small>PLACE</small>, <small>DESTINATION</small>, and <small>SOURCE</small> series are mostly formed through regular saṃdhi (with the partial exception of the ''na(ñ)-'' and ''vyā-'' prefixes):
=== Use of numerals===
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
'''Cardinal numerals''' may be used in two ways, depending on whether emphasis is given to the number or to the thing counted.
|-
* In the most common use, the counted thing is emphasized: the numeral is put '''before''' the noun and the noun is always '''singular''' (except for "two", see below) plus the appropriate case: e.g. ''emibe yujam'' (one lotus flower); ''dani māra'' (two mango fruits); ''pāmvi haloe'' (three names), ''vælden ñaiṭa'' (eleven stars), and so on.
! Prefix ↓ / Base → !! ''·evita<br/>·ejulā<br/>·ejulyom<br/>·ejulųu'' !! ''·utvita<br/>·uñjulā<br/>·uñjulyom<br/>·uñjulųu'' !! ''·ātvita<br/>·āñjulā<br/>·āñjulyom<br/>·āñjulųu''
* If emphasis is given to the number, then the counted thing comes first, and, if it should be in direct, ergative, or accusative case, it is in '''genitive singular''' instead; the semantic direct, ergative, or accusative case is taken by the numeral itself if it is one, two, three, or compounds. Examples: ''yujami emibe'' (one lotus flower), ''māri dani'' (two mango fruits), ''haleni pāmvi'' (three names), ''ñaiṭi vælden'' (eleven stars). In other cases, the noun follows the semantic case (but is always singular anyway), e.g. ''marti pāmvi'' (three cities) but ''marte pāmvye'' (in the three cities).<br/>This form is increasingly less common in everyday use.
|-
* "Two" may be used with either singular or dual number: ''dani māra'' or ''māri dani'' are both as correct as ''dani mārāt'' and ''māreva dani'' - note that the dual number alone, without the numeral, has the same meaning; the dual form alone does not give particular emphasis to the number, while using the numeral, at least in formal styles, already gives more emphasis (intermediate to the two abovementioned forms). Outside of literary texts, it is however more common to specify "two" with the numeral.
! ∅-
 
| ''evita'' || ''utvita'' || ''ātvita''
Note, though, the structure "''nihæle'' + genitive of a noun + a cardinal numeral", used for expressing percentage (dozenally), e.g. ''nihæle laili hælmāmei'' "20% of people".
|-
 
! ān-
'''Ordinal numerals''' are regular attributive adjective-like words that precede nouns - e.g. ''hælinaika kita'' "second house". They do not decline if are used together with a noun, but they can also be used alone (e.g. ''hælinaika'' "the second one"), in which case they decline for case and number, as if they were ''-eh'' nouns (''-a'' for 1st and 2nd), e.g. ''mojendesām ukulate'' "it has been told to those in ninth position".
| ''ānevita'' || ''ānutvita'' || ''ānātvita''
 
|-
'''Collective numerals''' (which decline as regular ''-ām'' nouns) are most commonly found with the meaning of "a group consisting of X ...", therefore implying greater cohesiveness than using the cardinal number implies. A common example of the subtle meaning change is between the sentences ''chīka lalāruṇa togāhaite'' (with a cardinal) and ''chīcætām lalāruṇa togāhaite'' (with a collective): both mean "seven ''lalāruṇai'' hit", but in the latter sentence the action is implied to be a coordinate act of all seven animals, while in the former they either hit randomly or the coordination of the action is not specified (or not specification-worthy). This is also the most common meaning with pluralia tantum, as commonly heard with ethnonyms (which are all plural only in Chlouvānem), e.g. ''šulkatām chlǣvānem'' "[a group of] five Chlouvānem people".<br/>
! šu-
They can also be found, context-dependent, used with the meaning of "all X of..." - in a sentence such as e.g. ''mbulatām lejīn dilu liju lilejlaikate'' "all eight singers wanted to sing the same song" - or with the meaning of "X sets of" with singularia tantum - e.g. ''pāmvyatām hærṣūs'' "three pairs of lips" (but note that colloquial Chlouvānem increasingly often uses the cardinals here, e.g. ''pāmvi hærṣūs'').<br/>
| ''švevita'' || ''šūtvita'' || ''švātvita''
The collective numerals for 0 and 1 (''ajrāṇṭām'' and ''emibutām'' respectively) are not included in the table above because they do not exist in practical use; however, they are sporadically found in poetry and literature, referring to people and with the meaning of "a group where only one/no one is ...", e.g. ''ajrāṇṭām tadhusmausīn'' "a group where no one is honest". Similarly, collectives for ''vāl-'' numbers (e.g. ''vālpāmvyantām'' "a group consisting of 2½ ...") exist, but are virtually unused. ''danyatām'', like ''dani'', may be use together with either a singular or a dual noun.
|-
 
! na(ñ)-
In some cases, the choice between a collective and a cardinal is stylistic. While for example concepts such as "we are..." or "I have ... children" do normally use the collective (e.g. ''tulūɂatām ñæltah jalim'' "we are six sisters/a group of six reciprocal brothers and sisters"; ''lili mæn nęltitām nūrya'' "I have four children"), even if using a cardinal isn't wrong, in a sentence such as "there are X people" both versions are found, with the collective-using sentence (e.g. ''dvārma vælditāmą lilęs virā'' "in the room there are eleven people") being perceived as more formal than the more colloquially heard cardinal-using version (i.e. ''dvārma vældąs lilęs virā'').
| ''naivita'' || ''notvita'' || ''nātvita''
 
|-
'''Distributive numerals''' are indeclinable adjective-like words, and have the meaning of "X each": ''pāmvihaicē titē męlyāhai'' "three pens each are given"; ''lili lilyā ñæltah no tulūɂihaicē karjhañī alau ulgutarate'' "my sister and I have bought six bottles of kvas each" — note in both sentences the use of singular number in ''titē'' (pencil) and ''alūs'' (acc. ''alau'') "bottle", just like after cardinal and collective numerals.
! kau-
| ''kāvevita'' || ''kāvutvita'' || ''kāvātvita''
|-
! kami-
| ''kamyevitai'' || ''kamyutvitai'' || ''kamyātvitai''
|-
! pri-
| ''pryevita'' || ''pryutvita'' || ''pryātvita''
|-
! vai-
| ''vāyevita'' || ''vāyutvita'' || ''vāyātvita''
|-
! vyā-
| ''vyāɂevita'' || ''vyāɂutvita'' || ''vyāɂātvita''
|-
! māha-
| ''māhaivita'' || ''māhotvita'' || ''māhātvita''
|}
Note that, in the <small>PERSON</small> series, the ''kami-'' forms are only used with a plural meaning, as reflected in the table above.


====Declensions of correlatives and possessives====
'''Adverbial numerals''' are adverbs with the meaning of "X times" and '''multiplicative numbers''' are adjective-like words (that can also be used alone) with the meaning of "X times as large"; numbers from 1 to 4 have both forms, while all other ones (except 0) have only the multiplicative one, which is used for both meanings. Examples: ''pāmvirvīm yąloe'' "triple meal/a meal three times as large"; ''āsena māgdani'' "twice a month"; ''āsena mbularvīm'' "eight times a month".<br/>
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
Zero only has an adverbial form (''māgajrā''), which is however only used in reading multiplications and powers, e.g. 3 * 0 ''māgajrā pāmvi'', 9<sup>0</sup> ''māgajrā demǣ moja''.
|-
 
! rowspan=2 | Case || ā-paradigm !! ē-paradigm !! ū-paradigm !! t-paradigm
'''Fractionary numerals''' are always used in the noun.<small>GEN</small> numeral construction, and they are invariable in direct, vocative, accusative, and ergative case but decline with ''-vaḍa'' in all of the others (in fact, etymologically they derive from worn down forms of ordinal + ''vaḍa'', meaning Xth part, e.g. ''hælinaika vaḍa'' (the second part) → ''hælinaivāṭ''). Unlike ordinals, the noun is always in the genitive case. Examples: ''marti hælinaivāṭ'' "half of the city" ; ''alāvi nęltendvāṭ'' "one fourth of the bottle" ; ''babhrāmi tulūɂendvaḍe'' "in one sixth of the country".
|-
 
! <small>All possessives, ''nanā'' and other distals,<br/> ''yambā?'', ''ami'', correlatives in ''-i''<ref>e.g. ''læti'', ''sorami''</ref></small> !! <small>''nenē'' and other proximals</small> !! <small>''nunū'', and other medials, ''yanū?''</small> !! <small>''yasmāt?'' and ''yanūḍat?''</small>
===Basic maths===
|-
* 1 + 2 = 3
! Direct<br/>Vocative
: emibe ''širē'' dani pāmvyå ''lunade'' (1.<small>DIR</small>. more. 2.<small>DIR</small>. 3-<small>DAT</small>. go.<small>MONODIR-IND.PRES-3DU.EXTERIOR-AGENTIVE</small>) — rule: A<sup>DIR</sup> ''širē'' B<sup>DIR</sup> (''širē'' ...) C<sup>DAT</sup> ''lunade'' (two addends) / ''lunāhai'' (3+ addends)
| '''lilyā''' || '''nenē''' || '''nunū''' || '''yasmāt'''
* 3 - 2 = 1
|-
: pāmvi ''isan'' dani emibå ''lunade'' (3.<small>DIR</small>. minus. 2.<small>DIR</small>. 1-<small>DAT</small> go.<small>MONODIR-IND.PRES-3DU.EXTERIOR-AGENTIVE</small>) — rule: A<sup>DIR</sup> ''isan'' B<sup>DIR</sup> (''isan'' ...) C<sup>DAT</sup> ''lunade'' (two addends) / ''lunāhai'' (3+ addends)
! Accusative
* 3 * 2 = 6
| lilyau || nenyu || nunūyu || yasmau
: ''māgdani'' pāmvi tulūɂå ''liven'' (2.<small>ADV.MULTIP</small>. 3.<small>DIR</small>. 6-<small>DAT</small>. go.<small>MONODIR-IND.PRES-3SG.EXTERIOR-AGENTIVE</small>) — rule: <small>MULTIPLICATIVE.(ADV)-</small>B A<sup>DIR</sup> C<sup>DAT</sup> ''liven''
|-
* 6 : 2 = 3
! Ergative
: ''hælinaivadęs'' tulūɂa pāmvyå ''liven'' (2.<small>FRACTION-ESS</small>. 6.<small>DIR</small> 3-<small>DAT</small>. go.<small>MONODIR-IND.PRES-3SG.EXTERIOR-AGENTIVE</small>) — rule: <small>FRACTIONARY-</small>B<sup>ESS</sup> A<sup>DIR</sup> C<sup>DAT</sup> ''liven''
| lilye || nenye || nunūye || yasmātei
* 6<sup>2</sup> = 30 (36<sub>10</sub>)
|-
: ''māgdani demǣ'' tulūɂa pāmvimāmei ''liven'' (2.<small>ADV.MULTIP</small>. <small>REFL.GEN-LOC</small>. 6.<small>DIR</small>. 30<sub>12</sub>. go.<small>MONODIR-IND.PRES-3SG.EXTERIOR-AGENTIVE</small>) — rule: <small>MULTIPLICATIVE.(ADV)-</small>B ''demǣ'' A<sup>DIR</sup> C<sup>DAT</sup> ''liven''
! Genitive
 
| lilyai || neniai || nunūyai || yasmai
===Reified numerals===
Reified numerals, or numerals used as nouns, have a special form, which is actually the numeral with the common noun-forming suffix ''-as'' added (with regular saṃdhi). These numerals are used most notably for:
* In order to refer to the digits themselves (''danyas'' "the digit 2");
* Things named with numbers (''tulūɂās'' "[tram/bus/etc] number 6");
* <small>''(in the plural)''</small> Year dozens (''vælknihælē'' "the 60<sub>12</sub>s = the 3860<sub>12</sub>s);
* <small>''(in the plural)''</small> Age ranges by the dozen (''hælmāmeyē'' "20<sub>12</sub>ies" = the age range from the start of one's 20<sub>12</sub>th year to the end of one's 2Ɛth);
* School marks - note that there's no uniform system in the Inquisition (''nęltayas'' "a grade 4" (passing grade in the most widespread system for non-higher education in the Inquisition, ranging from 1 (''emibayas''), worst, to 7 (''chīkās''), best));
* A group of X people - a reification of collective numerals (''pāmvyas'' "a trio").
 
Note that there are some terms which use numerals as roots but aren't considered reified numbers (also because of their rather inconsistent meanings); the most common examples include ''danyāmita'' (half) and ''māmyāmita'' (dozen).
 
===Units of Measurement===
Chlouvānem units of measurement (''lęlgīs'', pl. ''lęlgais'') are divided in popular units (''leilausirena lęlgais'') and scientific units (''tarlausirena lęlgais''). Scientific units, while understood, are rarely found outside of scientific contexts if corresponding popular units exist, while popular units are found in daily usage. Popular units follow however a measurement standard introduced in the year 36Ɛ7 <small>(6187<sub>10</sub>)</small> and updated several times in the following two centuries, in order to give a single understood measure for all units whose names and definitions varied across the many countries of the Chlouvānem cultural space.<br/>It is also to be noted that Calemerian scientific units have internationally unified definitions for their base units but are substantially different between the Western and the Eastern world as Western countries use them with a decimal system, while the Eastern countries (the Inquisition, most of the former Kaiṣamā, and Greater Skyrdagor) use them with a duodecimal system.
 
====Length====
The ''tyuta'', ''nakūrum'', and ''garaṇa'' are known but rarely used; the ''vālpāmvyās'' is rarely written as a separate measure, but isn't uncommon in speech.
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
|-
|-
! Translative
! Short !! Name !! Meaning/name origin !! Equivalent to !! Metric system (approx.)
| lilyān || nenēn || nunūn || yasmān
|-
|-
! Exessive
! lūj
| lilyāt || nenēt || nunūt || yasmātat
| lūjla <small>(ABL)</small> || <small>Point, tip</small> || ⅛ tyu || ~3.09639 mm
|-
|-
! Essive
! tyu
| lilyąa || nenęe || nunųu || yasmātą
| tyuta || <small>Short (dialectal)</small> || ⅓ ka || ~2.47711 cm
|-
|-
! Dative
! ka
| lilyåh || nenǣh || nunǣh || yasmātom
| katis || <small>Finger</small> || ⅓ mā || ~7.43133 cm
|-
|-
! Ablative
!
| lilyąu || nenēhu || nunūvu || yasmąu
| '''mākoba''' || <small>Span</small> || ''(base unit)'' || 22.294 cm
|-
|-
! Locative
| lilǣ || neniǣ || nunūvǣ || yasmātǣ
|-
|-
! Instrumental
!
| lileni || nenēni || nunauni || yasmaini
| pājya || <small>Leg</small> || 4 mā || 89.176 cm
|-
! vāl
| vālpāmvyās<br/>vālpāmvya pājya || <small>Two and a half legs</small> || 2+½ pā || 2.2294 m
|-
! nak
| nakūrum || <small>Rod</small> || 8 pā || 7.13408 m
|-
! cān
| cāṃtrūh || <small>Section (A. Yodhvaši)</small> || 140 (192<sub>10</sub>) pā || 171.21792 m
|-
! vai
| vaiṣrya || <small>Plough</small> || 8 cān<br/>ᘔ80 <small>(1536<sub>10</sub>)</small> pā || 1369.7434 m — 1.36974 km
|-
! gar
| garaṇa || <small>Hour</small> || 34 <small>(40<sub>10</sub>)</small> cān || 6848.72 m — 6.84872 km
|}
|}


==Honorifics==
<!-- ====Area====
===Honorific pronouns===
The ''våṇṭa'' may or may not be written as a separate measure. A measure of 1 ''jāṇa'' and 700 ''dvāmāryai'' may be written as ''1 jā.700 (dvā)'' (most commonly) or as ''1 jā.1.100 (dvā)''.
====Second person====
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
The rules for second person pronouns are mostly fairly easy. There are usually two contexts: formal and informal.
|-
 
! Short !! Name !! Meaning/name origin !! Equivalent to !! Metric system (approx.)
Formal pronouns are three and (in contemporary Chlouvānem) invariable for gender, but they vary for relative rank instead: '''nami''' is used towards a superior, '''tami''' towards one of the same rank, and '''ravi''' towards a lower ranked person (until around 6350, ''nani'' was strictly feminine and ''ravi'' strictly masculine, and the rules for all three varied also according to the relative genders). '''nanak''', '''tanak''', and '''raṇak''' are their respective dual forms.<br/>
Plural second person pronouns are usually two: '''yakaliyātam''' is used towards the representative of a specifically defined group - an institution or a company -, while '''yavyāta''' (but also, in not extremely formal styles, ''nami'') is used for less defined groups.
|-
 
! sǣ
There are, however, more formal second-person pronouns with a limited use. All of these (here listed in Latin alphabetical order), unless noted, are morphologically nouns, but they are used with second person verbs anyway:

| sǣca || <small>Small, Piece (in A.Namaikehi)</small> || 1 nī * 1 nī || 51.95 cm<sup>2</sup>
* '''aveṣyotariri nami''' (locution with the pronoun ''nami'') is sometimes used towards the highest ranked non-religious superiors, if they are several ranks ahead: examples include commanders of a military brigade or presidents of a company. However, ''nami'' is in most cases respectful enough; it is however invariably used in the set phrase ''lālyu nanyau aveṣyotariri yaccechlašute nami'' "I humbly ask for your forgiveness".
|-
* '''gopūrṭham''' is often used towards public/religious and military officials.
! dar
* '''gopūrṭhami brausa''' (or '''yobrausa''') are used for the highest ranked Inquisitors, bishops, head monks, and the Baptist.
| daryā || <small>unknown; name first used in the Near East</small> || 60 <small>(72<sub>10</sub>)</small> sǣ || 3,740.4 cm<sup>2</sup>
* '''lalla yobrausa''' is used exclusively for the Great Inquisitor.

* '''ṣari''', nowadays mostly old-fashioned, was used by guests towards homeowners and also by soldiers towards their superiors. It also meant, aside from being a pronoun, "landowner" or "head of a non-religious state"; in contemporary Chlouvānem it mostly only survives as a vocative expression towards homeowners when used by guests<ref>It also survives as a morpheme in some words, most notably ''ṣarivāṇa'' "state, country".</ref>.
* '''ūttuka''' is today only used in parts of the Northeast (aside by fictional characters in historical settings), but until about 6300 was a common pronoun word used by servants towards their superiors, particularly landowners (it thus partially overlapped with ''ṣari'').
* '''yobrausa''' — see ''gopūrṭhami brausa'' above.
 


It is also important to note that it's increasingly common to simply use the vocative formula - given name plus ''lāma'' - instead of any pronoun in formal context: when speaking to a superior named Lārtāvi Vaihātiai ''Lælithiam'', in order to say a sentence like "have you already done (it)?", ''nami nanau dadrāste nāṭ dām?'' and ''Lælithiam lāma nanau dadrāste nāṭ dām?'' are both just as correct. The pronoun forms are more commonly used in other cases, particularly in the genitive.<br/>Note that ''lāma'' itself does <small>NOT</small> decline: only the noun does – e.g. ''Lælithiamom lāma lę emęlia'' "it has been given by me to you/Mr. Lælithiam".
 
In '''informal''' contexts, the only basic morphological second-person pronoun is '''sāmi''', which has the dual form '''sanak''' and uses '''nami''' as the plural form (with plural agreement on verbs). However, there may be even more informal contexts where other nouns may be used: the prototypical example is among siblings, where '''blikā''' (dual ''blikāt'', plural ''blikai''), an endearing term for girls (think of Japanese ''-chan'' or ''-tan'') is used as a pronoun for and among sisters — e.g. ''blikā meyom umuṣeste tane<ref>''tane'' is a colloquial contraction of ''dām'' (interrogative particle) and ''nane'' (emphatic tag question particle).</ref>?'' meaning "did you ask mum or not?"; as for all nouns standing for pronouns, this is not a vocative expression as it declines for case - e.g. ''blikom emęliaṃte nāṭ!'' "I've already given it to you!"; other such pro-nouns used among siblings are '''lorkhās''' (for and among brothers; literally "guy", can be rude outside this context), '''nājhali''' (non-binary equivalent to "girl" and "boy" — somewhat rarer as even in general use it's a more neutral term than either ''blikā'' or ''lorkhās''), and even '''samin''' (literally "kid"). [[Chlouvānem/Names#Informal_names_.28laltihalen.C4.AB.29|Informal names]] are also sometimes used instead of pronouns among siblings, and they're more often than not used that way among close friends and ''kaleyai''<ref>A ''kaleya'' is a "spiritual friend" in Chlouvānem culture — this word can be translated with "best friend", but it also evokes particular religious meanings.</ref>.
 
====Third person====
In Chlouvānem, the third person pronouns – which are the demonstrative sets, most commonly the distal ''nanā'' - ''eṣanā'' - ''ānnā'' – are not used for people; the name of the person referred to with the appropriate honorific title is used instead.
 
Repetition of names is usually not considered strange in Chlouvānem, but there are a few ways to avoid excessive repetition. The most natural one is obviously to state the person once at the beginning as the topic and then have all following verbs agree with it through the trigger system.
 
All titles listed in the following section may be freely used with and without names. Furthermore, it is common in not excessively formal speech to use ''nāḍima'' (honorific word for "mother") for all female older relatives - of previous generations, not older siblings - of the interlocutor and similarly ''tamvāram'' (honorific for "father") for male older relatives.
 
Especially in contemporary Chlouvānem, the rank-neutral ''udhyāras'' (cf. "Comrade") is increasingly commonly used as a generic third person pronoun, though only after stating the name before.
 
=====Reference table=====
The following table is meant as a ''non-exhaustive'' reference for the ''most common'' ways used to refer to third person human referents in different situations, excluding titles:
 
{| class="redtable lightredbg" style="textalign:center"
|-
|-
! colspan=2 | If... !! Speaker is higher than Listener !! Speaker is equal to Listener !! Speaker is lower than Listener
! re
| relya || <small>Carpet</small> || 3 dar || ~1.12212 m<sup>2</sup>
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | 3SG is higher than... !! both Speaker and Listener
! dvā
| ''yamei'' (name) ''lāma''<br/>''yamei'' (name) ''suntam/sintam'' || ''(yamei)'' (name) ''suntam/sintam(/lāma)'' || ''yamei'' (name) ''suntam/sintam''
| dvāmārya || <small>ultimately from ''dvārma'' (room)</small> || 4 re || ~4.48848 m<sup>2</sup>
|-
|-
! Listener,<br/>but lower than or equal to Speaker
!
| ''udhyāras''<br/>''yamei lātiṃṣin''<br/>(name) ''lāma'' || / || /
| våṇṭa || <small>probably from a Tamukāyi word meaning "fence(d)"</small> || 600 <small>(864<sub>10</sub>)</small> dvā — ½ jā || ~3,878.0467 m<sup>2</sup>
|-
|-
! Speaker,<br/>but lower than or equal to Listener
!
| / || / || ''yamei'' (name) ''lāma''
| jāṇa || <small>Field</small> || 1,000 <small>(1,728<sub>10</sub>)</small> do — 2 vå || ~7,756.0934 m<sup>2</sup>
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | 3SG is equal to... !! Listener
! e
| ''udhyāras''<br/>''yamei'' (name) ''tanta''<br/> (name) ''lāma'' || / || /
| ekram || <small>Expanse (in A.Namaikehi)</small> || 100 <small>(144<sub>10</sub>)</small> jā || ~1.1168 km<sup>2</sup>
|}
 
====Weight (and mass)====
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
|-
|-
! both Speaker and Listener
! Short !! Name !! Meaning/name origin !! Equivalent to !! Metric system (approx.)
| / || ''udhyāras''<br/>''lātiṃṣin''<br/> (name) ''lāma'' || /
|-
|-
! Speaker
! vaj
| / || / || ''yamei'' (name) ''lāma''<br/>''udhyāras''<br/>''lātiṃṣin''
| vaji || <small>dimin. from ''vaḍa'' (part)</small> || 1/100 <small>(1/144<sub>10</sub>)</small> dū || ~51.79398 mg
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | 3SG is lower than...  !! Listener
!
| ''udhyāras''<br/>(name) ''tanta'' || / || /
| dūdha || <small>Seed</small> || ⅙ lit || ~7.45833 g
|-
|-
! both Speaker and Listener
! lit
| / || ''udhyāras''<br/>(name) ''tanta'' || /
| litveh || <small>Cut (in A.Namaikehi)</small> || ¼ aut || 44.75 g
|-
! aut
| '''auṭikā''' || <small>probably an augmentative from PLB *wutərus<ref>cf. ''ūtarṇ-'' "heavy" and ''ūṭrus'' "load"</ref></small> || ''(base unit)'' || 179 g
|-
! tū
| tulūɂendā || <small>ultimately from ''tulūɂendes'' (sixth)</small> || 6 aut || 1,074 g
|-
! pau
| paurā || <small>Rock (dialectal)</small> || 70 <small>(84<sub>10</sub>)</small> aut || 12.53 kg
|-
! māp
| māmipaurā || <small>''māmei'' (twelve) + ''paurā''</small> || 10 <small>(12<sub>10</sub>)</small> pau || 150.36 kg
|-
|-
! Speaker
! lap
| / || / || (name) ''lāma''<br/> ''udhyāras''
| lallapaurā || <small>''lalla'' (high, further) + ''paurā''</small> || 10 <small>(12<sub>10</sub>)</small> māp || 1,804.32 kg
|}
|}


===Honorific titles===
====Volume====
''→ See also: [[Chlouvānem/Names#Using_names|Chlouvānem names § Using names]]''
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
 
|-
Chlouvānem uses many honorific titles, which are always used in non-familiar speech. The "honorific" adjective ''yamei'' is often added to many of them - especially ''lāma'' - and is mandatory in other ones.
! Short !! Name !! Meaning/name origin !! Equivalent to !! Metric system (approx.)
* '''lāma''' - used after the noun, it is the most common honorific title; almost every time someone is being addressed, ''lāma'' is used - the only exceptions being when it is already known another honorific should be used, or in familiar situations. It usually follows the given name alone (e.g. ''Namihūlša lāma''); if the matronymic is added (sometimes done in order to disambiguate), then ''lāma'' comes between matronymic and noun (e.g. ''Līṭhaljāyimāvi lāma Namihūlša''). All three names matronymic, surname, and given name together with ''lāma'' (e.g. ''Līṭhaljāyimāvi Kaleñchokah Namihūlša lāma'') are only used in very formal addressing from a list of nouns; should matronymic+noun be not enough to distinguish two people, simply surname+noun is used.
|-
* '''tanta''' - used for people in a lower position, e.g. used towards one's employees or (usually from seventh class onwards) by teachers and professors towards their students. Also used by militars towards lower-ranked soldiers.
! src
* '''suntam''' (regionally also ''sintam'') - used for people in a higher position in certain situations, most commonly towards older and more experienced colleagues (but not teachers or professors, nor work bosses if they're roughly the same age as the speaker).
| ṣærcañīh || <small>dimin. from ''ṣarus'' (spoon)</small> || ½ ṣar || ~5.78704 mL
* '''lallāmaha''' - an extremely formal honorific, used for public authorities and all Inquisitors. Most often used together with ''yamei''. Inquisitors may also be referred to as ''lallāmaha + <small>matronymic</small> + yamei + <small>given name</small> + murkadhāna (lāma)''
|-
* '''jūlin''' - less formal than ''lāma'', used for people who work in one's home but are not part of the family.
! ṣar
* '''telen''' - less formal than ''lāma'', used by men for unmarried women whom they know somewhat well. Currently less frequently used than it was up to about 10 years ago.
| ṣarus || <small>Spoon</small> || ⅓ cel || ~11.57407 mL
* '''jāmilšīreh''' - used in military contexts towards higher-ranked people, or by common people towards military commanders in service.
|-
* '''udhyā(ras)''' - neutral but respectful title of address, often used when generally speaking and without knowing who the listener is. Sometimes used, when in a plural sense, in the form '''yamei dāvudhyāre'''. In its neutralness relative to rank, it can be compared with the Soviet-era use of ''товарищ''. It is also how high-ranked Inquisitors and most monks address the general public.<br/>Note that ''udhyāras'' is the direct form, ''udhyā'' the irregular vocative.
! cel
* '''pūrivāla''' - an impersonal term of address used in written language, towards unfamiliar people never met personally. Often used as ''yamei'' [name] ''pūrivāla''.
| celya || <small>Small glass</small> || ⅙ lun || ~34.72222 mL
* '''cuca''' is not strictly an honorific, as it pertains to more colloquial forms of speech, but it works the same way. It has a diminutive and endearing meaning, not unlike Japanese ''-chan''. In formal speech, it is often used towards and when speaking about children.
|-
 
! lun
====Occupations commonly used as titles====
| luneyāvi || <small>from ''lunai'' (tea)</small> || ⅓ val || ~0.20833 L
* '''camitorai''' — head of a company (usually as [matronymic] ''yamei'' [name] ''camitorai lāma'')
|-
* '''kauchlærīn''' (voc.: ''kauchlærī'') — professor (in universities, seminaries, institutions, and work schools)
! val
* '''tatnāmęlīn''' (voc.: ''tatnāmęlī'') — teacher (in first and basic schools)
| '''valdhēna''' || <small>Flagon</small> || ''(base unit)'' || 0.625 L
 
|-
====Official titles====
! al
Where not noted, the formula is [matronymic] ''yamei'' [name] [title] ''lāma''.
| alūs || <small>Bottle</small> || 2+ ⅓ val || ~1.45833 L
|-
! då
| dåṣṭis || <small>Bucket</small> || 8 al || ~11.66666 L
|-
! raš
| rašah || <small>Barrel</small> || 16 <small>(18<sub>10</sub>)</small> då || ~210 L
|}


* '''brausamailenya''' — Baptist — rendered as ''aveṣyotārire lallāmaha'' [matronymic] ''yamei'' [surname + given name] ''brausamailenia lāma''.
There are also two further units for dry measures only:
* '''camimurkadhāna''' — Great Inquisitor — rendered as ''nanū aveṣyotārire lallāmaha'' [matronymic] ''yamei'' [surname + given name] ''camimurkadhāna lāma''.
* the ''purṣa'' ("pot", '''pur'''), equivalent to 1+½ val (~0.9375 L);
* '''camitorai''' — president (of diocesan parliaments or executives or of foreign countries). Rendered as ''aveṣyotārire'' [matronymic (if Chlouvānem)] ''yamei'' [name] ''camitorai lāma''.
* the ''ręnah'' ("jar, urn", ''''''), equivalent to 6 pur (~5.625 L).
* '''plušamelīs''' (voc.: ''plušamelī'') — Prefect (head of an Office (''plušamila'') of the Inquisition). Rendered as ''aveṣyotārire'' [matronymic] ''yamei'' [name] ''plušamelī(s) lāma''.
* '''gatvā''' — leader/head/president/mayor — preceded by the genitive of the respective administration (''ṣramāṇa'' "province", ''lalka'' "circuit", ''hālgāra'' "district", ''marta'' "city"…).
* '''hurdagīn''' — Head Monk (head of a monastery) — rendered as ''kaili brausire yamei [name] hurdagīn lāma'' (+ monastery name-<small>GEN</small>)<ref>Many head monks have their own unique titles based on their monastery. For example the head monk of the Vādhaṃšvāti Lake Monastery is not referred as ''[…] hurdagīn lāma vādhaṃšvāti ga gūltayi'' but as ''[…] laliājuniāmiti jāṇi camilālta lāma'', literally "Great Guardian of the Field of the Night Bloom".</ref>
* '''juṃša''' — Bishop (head of a diocese) — rendered as ''aveṣyotārire'' [matronymic] ''yamei'' [(surname +) name] ''juṃša lāma'' (+ diocese name-<small>GEN</small>).
* '''lallaflušamelīs''' (voc.: ''lallaflušamelī'') — High Prefect (head of the Table of Offices (''flušamaili eṇāh'', the executive branch of the Inquisition). Usually rendered as ''taili aveṣyotārire'' [matronymic] ''yamei'' [name] ''lallaflušamelī(s) lāma''.
* '''lallamurkadhāna''' — High Inquisitor (one of the 612 members of the Inquisitorial Conclave (''murkadhānumi lanedāmeh'', the legislative branch of the Inquisition). Usually rendered as ''aveṣyotārire'' [matronymic] ''yamei'' [name] ''lallamurkadhāna lāma''.
* '''ñæltryam''' — monk.
* '''ṭommīn''' (voc.: ''ṭommī'') — Eparch (head of an Eparchy).


Note that the full titles are used generally at the first mention only. For example, ''Martayināvi yamei murkadhāna Læhimausa lāma'' becomes afterwards either ''yamei murkadhāna'' or ''yamei Læhimausa lāma''. With the Great Inquisitor, this does not usually get shorter than ''nanū aveṣyotārire yamei lallāmaha'' ([Her] Respectable Most Excellent Highness) or ''nanū aveṣyotārire lallāmaha camimurkadhāna'' ([Her] Most Excellent Highness, the Great Inquisitor).
The ''egimbladuldāvi'' (egd) is a unit used for measuring engine displacement: 1 egd equals ⅙ val, that is ~0.10416667 L (~104.16667 cc). -->


===Honorific particles===
====Temperature====
There are a few honorific particles - mostly of Ancient Kūṣṛmāthi origin - that are used to make names or nouns honorific:
Temperature measuring in the Chlouvānem world uses the ''Jahārāṭha'' scale (shortened '''ºj'''; named after scientist Ṣastirāvi Jahārāṭha ''Nukthalin''), which is fixed with a zero degree at water freezing temperature at sea level. 100 ºj is the rough boiling temperature of water, but, being a duodecimal scale, it is 100<sub>12</sub> (144<sub>10</sub>), thus 1 ºj equals 25/36 of a degree Celsius, or 1 ºC = 1.44 ºj.<br/>The median body temperature of a Calemerian human (which is slightly lower than for terrestrial humans) is of 41 ºj <small>(49<sub>10</sub>)</small>, thus  ~34.0278 ºC.
* '''īvai''' makes a verb humble, and is put after a verb, too.
* '''nami''' denotes respect towards the trigger of the verb. It was common in the past alongside the honorific verb ''tilah'', but today it rarely used.
* '''yo-''' is a prefix for things pertaining to a honourable person, often used together with a verb with '''nami'''.
* '''dau-''' is a prefix that makes nouns honorific.


==Numerals (''māltsāk'') ==
====Time====
Chlouvānem is one of the few human Calemerian languages - together with all other [[Lahob languages]] and a few ones of the southern hemisphere, as well as others like [[Qualdomelic#Numerals|Qualdomelic]] or vernaculars of the Inquisition which have had considerable Chlouvānem influence - with a pure duodecimal number system.
→ ''See also: [[Chlouvānem/Calendar_and_time#The_Chlouvānem_calendar|Chlouvānem Calendar and time § the Chlouvānem calendar]]
 
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
Numbers (sg ''māltsām'', pl. ''māltsāk'') have six different forms: cardinal, ordinal, collective, distributive, adverbial/multiplicative, and fractionary. 1-4 have separate adverbial multiplicative forms, while all other ones have an invariable form used both as adverbial and 'adjectival' multiplicatives. Cardinals from 1 to Ɛ and their compounds decline for case (see below); collectives, multiplicatives, and fractionaries always decline, while ordinals are only declined if used without an accompanying noun. Distributives do not decline.
 
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
|-
|-
! Digit<sub>12</sub> !! <small>Base 10</small> !! Cardinal !! Ordinal !! Collective !! Distributive !! Adv./Multiplicative !! Fractionary
! English !! Chlouvānem !! Equivalent to !! rough Earthly approximation
|-
|-
! 0
! Year
| 0 || '''ajrā''' || <small>''(ajrāyende)''</small> || rowspan=2 | — || <small>''(ajrehaicē)''</small> || <small>''(māgajrā)''</small> || —
| heirah || 418 Calemerian days || 609.6 Earth days
|-
|-
! 1
! Day
| 1 || '''emibe'''<br/>''emi'' || lahīla || emibhaicē || māgemibe <small>''(adv.)''</small><br/>emibarvīm || lahīlvāṭ
| lairē || 28<sub>12</sub> (32<sub>10</sub>) hours || ~35 hours
|-
|-
! 2
! Hour
| 2 || '''dani'''|| hælinaika || danyatām || danihaicē || māgdani <small>''(adv.)''</small><br/>danirvīm || hælinaivāṭ
| garaṇa || 3 hælmāmyai<br/>60<sub>12</sub> (72<sub>10</sub>) railai || ~65 min ~37 sec
|-
|-
! 3
! <small>''group of "minutes"''</small>
| 3 || '''pāmvi''' || pāmvende || pāmvyatām || pāmvihaicē || māmpāmvi <small>''(adv.)''</small><br/>pāmvirvīm || pāmvendvāṭ
| hælmāmya || 20<sub>12</sub> (24<sub>10</sub>) railai || ~21 min ~52 sec
|-
|-
! 4
! "Minute"
| 4 || '''nęlte''' || nęltende || nęltitām || nęltehaicē || māgnęlte <small>''(adv.)''</small><br/>nęltarvīm || nęltendvāṭ
| raila || ''(base unit)'' || ~54.6805 sec
|-
|-
! 5
! "Second"
| 5 || '''šulka''' || šulkende || šulkatām || šulkhaicē || šulkarvīm || šulkendvāṭ
| namišoe || 1/40<sub>12</sub> (1/48<sub>10</sub>) raila  || ~1.8986 sec
|-
|-
! 6
! <small>1/12 of a "second"</small>
| 6 || '''tulūɂa''' || tulūɂende || tulūɂatām || tulūɂihaicē || tulūrvīm || tulūɂendvāṭ
| (namišeni) māmendvāṭ || 1/10<sub>12</sub> (1/12<sub>10</sub>) namišoe || ~0.1582 sec
|-
|-
! 7
! <small>1/144 of a "second"</small>
| 7 || '''chīka''' || chīcænde || chīcætām || chīcihaicē || chīkarvīm || chīcændvāṭ
| (namišeni) nihælendvāṭ || 1/100<sub>12</sub> (1/144<sub>10</sub>) namišoe || ~0.0131 sec
|-
|-
! 8
! <small>1/1728 of a "second"</small>
| 8 || '''tītya''' || tītyende || tītyatām || tītihaicē || tītyarvīm || tītyendvāṭ
| (namišeni) tildhaindvāṭ || 1/1000<sub>12</sub> (1/1728<sub>10</sub>) namišoe || ~1.0987 ms
|}
 
====Other units====
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
|-
|-
! 9
! !! Chlouvānem !! Symbol !! rough Earthly approximation
| 9 || '''moja''' || mojende || mojatām || mojihaicē || mojarvīm || mojendvāṭ
|-
|-
!
! frequency
| 10 || '''tålda''' || tåldende || tåldatām || tåldihaicē || tåldarvīm || tåldendvāṭ
| lūnaji || lnj || ~0.526704 Hz
|-
|-
! Ɛ
! voltage
| 11 || '''vælden''' || vældinde || vælditām || vældihaicē || vældirvīm || vældindvāṭ
| chulgān || chg || 1 V
|-
|}
! 10
 
| 12 || '''māmei''' || māminde || māmintām || māmeihaicē || māmairvīm || māmindvāṭ
==Particles (''remīk'')==
|-
Traditional Chlouvānem grammar only recognizes a single part of speech called "particles" (''remīn'', literally "helper(s)") which includes conjunctions, postpositions, and interjections. However, these three are recognized as subsets of particles - here translated as "conjunctive particles" (''natemālāhai remīn''), "accompanying particles", i.e. postpositions (''ūtimāhai remīn''), and "exclamatory particles" (''pigdilanah nali remīn'').
! 11
 
| 13 || '''emibumaye''' || emibumayinde || emibumaintām || emibumaihaicē || emibumairvīm || emibumayindvāṭ
Many Chlouvānem particles are grammaticalized usages of other words, some of them no longer being used in their original meaning in contemporary use (e.g. ''varve'').
|-
 
! 12
===Conjunctive particles===
| 14 || '''danimaye''' || danimayinde || danimaintām || danimaihaicē || danimairvim || danimayindvāṭ
Conjunctive particles may not stand syntactically alone and, with a few exceptions, don't require any particular case of a noun. Most of them function, or are also used, as conjunctions between sentences.
|-
 
! 13
* '''jahān''' — anyway (conjunction or second position adverb)
| 15 || '''pamihælī''' || pamihælīnde || pamihælītām || pamihælīhaicē || pamihælīrvīm || pamihælīndvāṭ
* '''lai''' — inclusive or
|-
* '''las''' — and (in incomplete listings, cf. ''no'' and ''sama''); it follows the noun it refers to, and in listings with more than two nouns it follows every noun except for the first. Not used to conjoin sentences.
! 14
* '''lenta''' — "together (with)", adverbial or postpositive, requiring genitive case in the latter usage. When pospositive, it is more emphatic than ''lā''. Adverbially, ''gimmālsiṭ'' is more common.
| 16 || '''māminęlte'''|| māminęltende || māminęltitām || māminęltehaicē || māminęltarvīm || māmiynęltendvāṭ
* '''mailiven''' — so, thus, therefore (grammaticalized use of <small>go_forward.UNIDIR.PRES.IND.EXP.3SG.PATIENT.EXTERIOR.</small>)
|-
* '''mbu''' — exclusive or
! 15
* '''mešē''' — given that (grammaticalized use of <small>see.PRES.IND-EXP-3SG.PATIENT.EXTERIOR.</small>)
| 17 || '''māmišulka''' || māmišulkende || māmišulkatām || māmišulkhaicē || māmišulkarvīm || māmišulkendvāṭ
* '''najelai''' — maybe. Originally the archaic potential form of ''najalle'' (to happen). Sentence-final, requires a verb in the subjunctive mood, e.g. ''yahatite najelai'' "maybe I'll read it".
|-
* '''nānim''' — almost; if used with nouns, requires essive case.
! 16
* '''ni''' — but (in second position)
| 18 || '''māmivælka''' || māmivælkende || māmivælkatām || māmivælkihaicē || māmivælkarvīm || māmivælkendvāṭ
* '''no''' — and (in complete listings, cf. ''las''); same placement as ''las''. Also used to conjoin sentences, but ''sama'' is preferred, especially when there are different subjects (triggered arguments).
|-
* '''nyąu''' — because, for, as (cf. ''tī''); ''amyąu'' in the Classical era, i.e. the ablative of the former demonstrative ''ami''.
! 17
:: Used sentence-finally: ''aganą lā įstyāk nyąu yųlake pañcekte'' "as (s)he was hungry, (s)he started eating." In lone sentences, e.g. answers, ''tī'' is preferred: ''aganą lā tī įstyāk'' "because (s)he was hungry."
| 19 || '''māmichīka''' || māmichīcænde || māmichīcætām || māmichīcihaicē || māmichīkarvīm || māmichīcændvāṭ
* '''paṣe''' — furthermore
|-
* '''pū''' — if (and '''pūmbu''' "whether") - see [[Chlouvānem/Syntax#Conditional_sentences|Chlouvānem syntax § Conditional sentences]]
! 18
* '''sama''' ('''sam''' before vowels) — and (between sentences only, cf. ''las'' and ''no'')
| 20 || '''māmitītya''' || māmitītyende || māmitītyatām || māmitītihaicē || māmitītyarvīm || māmitītyendvāṭ
* '''širē''' — also, too (only between sentences, cf. ''tan''). A different use of the adverb meaning "more".
|-
* '''tadye''' — despite that (between sentences), cf. ''tatta''.
! 19
* '''tan''' — also, too; used adverbially and between sentences (where, however, ''širē'' is more common).
| 21 || '''māmimoja''' || māmimojende || māmimojatām || māmimojihaicē || māmimojarvīm || māmimojendvāṭ
* '''tatta''' — despite, even though; requires a noun in the essive case or a subjunctive verb (e.g. ''gu talunīs ša tatta dadrā'' "even though you didn't come, it has been done."). Colloquially, it is also used anaphorically, instead of ''tadye''; however, it is considered bad style in formal language.
|-
* '''varve''' — instead of; requires genitive case or subjunctive mood. Originally the locative singular of ''varva'' "form", no longer used in contemporary Chlouvānem.
! 1ᘔ
** '''samvarve''' — on the other hand, whereas
| 22 || '''māmitålda''' || māmitåldende || māmitåldatām || māmitåldihaicē || māmitåldarvīm || māmitåldendvāṭ
* '''vivāmi''' — "too much", adverbial or postpositive, requiring genitive case in the latter usage.
|-
* '''væse''' — while, in the meantime; "during (the)" with nouns. Requires a verb in the subjunctive mood or a noun in the essive (or, meaning-dependant, exessive or translative) case.
! 1Ɛ
 
| 23 || '''māmivælden''' || māmivældinde || māmivælditām || māmivældihaicē || māmivældirvīm || māmivældindvāṭ
===Accompanying particles (i.e. postpositions)===
|-
These particles can never stand alone, do not conjoin sentences, and nearly always require a particular noun case.
! 20
 
| 24 || '''hælmāmei''' || hælmāminde || hælmāmintām || hælmāmeihaicē || hælmāmairvīm || hælmāmindvāṭ
* '''bīs''' — between; from ... until, in expressions of time. Comes after both nouns in essive case: ''šurājęs nyūramyęs bīs'' "between [[Contionary:šurājah|Šurājah]] and [[Contionary:nyūramyah|Nyūramyah]]".
|}
* '''bisikita''' — except for; requires subjunctive mood or essive case. Grammaticalized usage of <small>put_aside-EXP-IND.PERF.3.PATIENT.EXTERIOR</small>. (e.g. ''nītedarāhai lailąs bisikita nalunya upulsma'' "entrance is forbidden, except for involved people" → "authorized personnel only")
As for the two forms for one, ''emi'' is used in disjunctive counting (e.g. count-ins or countdowns) while ''emibe'' is used elsewhere. Compounds always have the full form, i.e. forms such as *hælmāmyemi do not exist.<br/>Some compound words, especially technical and scientific ones, use [[Lällshag]] morphemes for the quantities from 1 to (though from 5 onwards they're rarer): ''mån-''&nbsp;1, ''yūn-''&nbsp;2, ''lyāš-''&nbsp;3, ''alan-''&nbsp;4, ''tamb-''&nbsp;5, ''jiruṇ-'' or ''ciruṇ-''&nbsp;6, ''tulyæn-''&nbsp;7, ''neim-''&nbsp;8, ''šid-''&nbsp;9, ''abar-''&nbsp;ᘔ.
* '''dam''' — interrogative particle in polar questions, put after the verb (e.g. ''daltah vi dam?'' "is it a fish?")
* '''e''' — like. Requires essive case with nouns and subjunctive mood with verbs.
* '''ga''' — adpositive particle, used to join nouns in noun phrases (usually titles or proper names, but not honorifics), e.g. ''Līlasuṃghāṇa ga marta'' "Līlasuṃghāṇa city" or ''Tāllahārya ga maita'' "Tāllahārya river".
*: Mostly in poetry (for metrical reasons), or Archaic and Early Classical Chlouvānem prose (e.g. in the Lileṃsasarum, or many Yunyalīlti holy books), ''ga'' is used to conjoin attributive verbs to nouns, e.g. ''lei imiša ga švas'' "the animal seen by me". Already in parts of the Lileṃsasarum the decading usage of the particle in this sense is to be noted, as often it is only used to conjoin exterior verbs to nouns, but not interior ones.
* '''gu(n) ~ ša''' — negative circumposition used around verbs, e.g. ''gu yuyųlsegde ša'' "(s)he does not want to eat". The first element is ''gun'' before vowels; the ''ša'' element is omitted if the verb is attributive.
* '''lā''' — with (comitative); requires essive case (e.g. ''lilyą ñæltęs lā'' "with my sister"). The Archaic Chlouvānem form was ''lapi''.
* '''lut''' — used with expressions of time: means "ago" if used with ablative case (''nęlcų heirų lut'' "four years ago"), "for/since" if with essive case (''nęlcą heiręs lut'' "for four years").
* '''mei''' and '''go''' — "yes" and "no", used according to the polarity of the question; i.e. ''mei'' denotes the statement is true ("yes" to affirmative questions, "no" to negative questions), while ''go'' denotes the statement is false ("no" to affirmative questions, "yes" to negative questions).
* '''mæn''' — [[Chlouvānem/Syntax#Use of the topic|marks a topic which otherwise has no role in the sentence]].
* '''nali''' — benefactive marker, used with a noun in direct case; marks the benefited argument when the verb is not in benefactive-trigger voice. If used with a subjunctive verb, means "in order to", with a nuance of hope (the bare subjunctive already carries the "in order to" meaning).
* '''nin''' — after, with ablative or subjunctive (''nęlcų heirų nin'' "after four years")
* '''pa''' — on, of, concerning, on the subject of, about. Requires a direct case noun (e.g. ''vāṇatarlā pa naviṣya'' "book about botany") or a subjunctive mood verb (e.g. ''šūñjulā drētte pa nīdhāḍirdya'' "the two of us are talking about what (s)he did down there").
* '''ras''' — antibenefactive marker, used with a noun in direct case; marks the anti-benefited argument when the verb is not in antibenefactive-trigger voice. If used with a subjunctive verb, means "to avoid X".
* '''sām''' — different meanings depending on case:
:: ablative, in expressions of time: "in ... time" (at the end of a certain period), or "by": ''nęlcų heirų sām'' "in four years' time, four years for now"; ''šurājų sām'' "by [[Contionary:šurājah|Šurājah]]";
:: translative (rarely essive), in expressions of time: "in/for/until" (within, during a certain period): ''nęltin heiran sām'' "for the coming four years" (or ''nęlcą heiręs sām''); ''ājvan sām'' "until dawn";
:: dative case, with places: "until, as far as": ''līlasuṃghāṇa ṣrāvamaila ga keikom sām'' "as far as Līlasuṃghāṇa Ṣrāvamaila Station")
:: subjunctive verb: "until": ''primęlirī sām'' "until he/she/it comes back".
* '''šut''' — before, with ablative or subjunctive (''nęlcų heirų šut'' "four years before").
* '''vādį''' — without, with essive or subjunctive. Unlike English, it cannot be used anaphorically.
 
===Correlative particles===
Chlouvānem does not have correlative conjunctions as English does, because they are translated in different ways:
* English "both... and..." is most commonly translated as ''X Y no tan'' ("X, and also Y"), e.g. ''jādāh lañekaica no tan nanau draikate'' "both Jādāh and Lañekaica did that".
*: Alternatively, the forms ''X Y no peiṃsiṭ'' ("X, and the same for Y") or ''X ..., Y peiṃsiṭ'' ("X ..., and Y the same") are also widespread, e.g. ''jādāh lañekaica no peiṃsiṭ nanau draikate''; ''nāneh lei uyųla, māra peiṃsiṭ'' "I have eaten both the bread and the mango".
* English "neither... nor..." is translated by the same structures as "both... and...", but negative. In the most common usage, ''tan'' is omitted:
*: ''jādāh lañekaica no (tan) nanau gu draikate ša'' "neither Jādāh nor Lañekaica did that"; ''nāneh lei gun uyųla ša, māra peiṃsiṭ'' "I have eaten neither the bread nor the mango".
* "either... or..." is easily translated by the exclusive or (''mbu''). It is commonly only used after the second term, but it can be put after every term for emphasis:
*: ''jādāh (mbu) lañekaica mbu nanau dṛkte'' – either Jādah or Lañekaica did it. (note the singular verb)
 
===Emphatic particles===
A few particles are used (usually sentence-finally) in order to convey particular feelings of the speaker about the statement:
* '''anā''' is an introductory particle (e.g. "so")
* '''å''' expresses either surprise (at the beginning of a sentence) or that the fact is considered annoying (at the end), e.g. ''å vikṣiṭ dadrāte'' "wow, (s)he's done it again!" / ''vikṣiṭ dadrā å'' "oh no, (s)he's done it again!"
* '''dā''' gives the sentence, especially a command or a proposition, an informal tone - cf. German "mal" or Italian "un po'", e.g. ''najire nanau mešute dā'' "I'll just see what happens"; ''peithos dā'' "just calm down and take a walk around here."
* '''e''' is a basic declarative particle when used word-finally, and is often used as an introduction (much like "you know, ...") or as a generic filler.
* '''eri''' means "even", marking a positive emphasis (e.g. ''hūnakumi dhāḍan eri dhāḍire'' "(s)he even speaks Hūnakumi<ref>Language of an ethnic minority (but titular ethnicity) in the diocese of Hūnakañjaiṭa.</ref>")
* '''gāri''' means "not even", being the opposite of ''eri'', marking a negative emphasis (e.g. ''hulābdān chlǣvānumi dhāḍan gāri dhāḍire'' "(s)he doesn't even speak correct Chlouvānem")
* '''nā''', a generic filler (cf. "I mean"), often combined with ''e''. e.g. ''nā (e) nenēt nāṭ tarliru!'' "I mean, I already know this!"
* '''nane''' is a tag question, e.g. ''camiyūs vi dam nane?'' "you're from Cami, aren't you?"
* '''nimā''' is an introductory particle, same as ''anā''.
* '''naihā''' is a tag question much like ''nane'', but is used when the speaker is in doubt and/or expects a contradictory answer, e.g. ''lære draute dam naihā?'' "did I do it yesterday, or...?"
* '''pos''' is a filler with a meaning similar to ''tau'', but it is more properly translated as emphasizing that the speaker considers the statement as a general truth or a widely accepted thing, e.g. ''ālīce jeldegde pos'' "yeah, everybody knows (s)he acts that way/does that kind of things."
* '''sāṭ''' expresses the speaker's doubt about the honesty of the expressed action, e.g. ''tamye tamyu draukæ sāṭ'' "(s)he did it for me, but I don't believe that's what (s)he really wanted" or "as if (s)he really did it for me!"
* '''tau''' emphasizes that the fact expressed is considered obvious, and is fairly colloquial, e.g. ''lārvājuṣe ēk tau'' "huh, I was at the temple, nothing else"; ''kitui vasau tau'' "I drove home [what else could I do?]"
* '''tva''' puts strong emphasis on a declarative sentence; it is fairly colloquial and not polite, and thus avoided in formal speech, e.g. ''nenēyu daudyute tati ukulaṃte tva!'' "damn, I said I want that, shut up!"
 
==Derivational morphology (''vāmbeithausire maivāndarāmita'')==
Chlouvānem has an extensive system of derivational morphology, with many possibilities of deriving words from verbal roots and even from other nouns.
===Compounds===
Chlouvānem, like Sanskrit, has four main types of compound words (''tadmaiva'', pl. ''tadmaivai''), called in Chlouvānem grammar ''emibądanīs'' (dvandva), ''ṭvādaradhausire tadmaiva'' (avyayībhāva), ''nīdhvakādhūs'' (tatpuruṣa), and ''kaudhvakādhūs'' (bahuvrīhi).
 
====Dvandva (''emibądanīs'')====
The first type of compounds is ''emibądanīs'' type (also called ''no ga tadmaiva''), corresponding to dvandva compounds. In ''emibądanais'', all words in the compound are taken with the concrete idea they represent. As hinted to by the alternative name, these compounds effectively substitute an "X Y no" (X and Y), compressing it into a single word.
: ''tēneh ukyā no'' "a branch and a trunk" → ''tēnayukyāt'' "branch and trunk"
Dvandva compounds are formed by removing the direct case ''-s'' or ''-h'' marker from the word, lengthening all resulting final vowels (i.e. for all words not ending in ''-oe, -ai, -m'', or ''-n''), and joining with saṃdhi the second word; the second word is then inflected in the dual (if the word semantically refers to two things) or in the plural (if it refers to three or more things - see the next example).
: ''tēneh nūlyai no'' "a branch and leaves" → ''tēnēnūlyai'' "branch(es) and leaves"
Note that, if the dvandva is plural, there is no indication of how many elements of each component are present:
: ''lalāruṇāt voltām no'' "two lalāruṇai (<small>DU</small>) and a sheep (<small>SG</small>)" → ''lalāruṇāvoltāk'' "lalāruṇai and sheep" (<small>PL</small>)
: ''lalāruṇai voltām no'' "lalāruṇai (<small>PL</small>) and a sheep (<small>SG</small>)" → ''lalāruṇāvoltāk'' "lalāruṇai and sheep" (<small>PL</small>)
: ''lalāruṇa voltāk no'' "a lalāruṇa (<small>SG</small>) and sheep (<small>PL</small>)" → ''lalāruṇāvoltāk'' "lalāruṇai and sheep" (<small>PL</small>)
The identification of how many individual lalāruṇai and sheep is lost in the compound, however, we know from the plural number that there must be at least three animals; otherwise, the dvandva would be dual:
: ''lalāruṇa voltām no'' "a lalāruṇa (<small>SG</small>) and a sheep (<small>SG</small>)" → ''lalāruṇāvoltīvā'' "lalāruṇai and sheep" (<small>DU</small>)
Dvandva made of three or more elements can, obviously, only be plural:
: ''lalāruṇa voltām no jorai no'' "a lalāruṇa, a sheep, and a goat" → ''lalāruṇāvoltāñjorāye'' "lalārunai, sheep, and goats"
In the most formal registers of Chlouvānem, it is not uncommon to find dvandva compounds made of several elements:
: ''lācāh kraṣṭāmita no lillāmita no demigretas no lelyēmita no'' "love, fidelity, devotion, sacrifice, and family" → ''lācākraṣṭāmitālillāmitādemigretālelyēmitai'' "love, fidelity, devotion, sacrifice, and family"
 
====Avyayībhāva (''ṭvādaradhausire tadmaiva'')====
Avyayībhāva compounds, in Chlouvānem ''ṭvādaradhausirāhe tadmaivai'' ("adverbial compounds"), are not as productive as the other types and, in fact, except for a few words they're mostly limited to Archaic and Classical Chlouvānem; despite being based on the latter, modern Chlouvānem does not use them productively (but see ''nīpenai'' below).<br/>These compounds generally have a first element which is a particle (or a verbal prefix), and the second element is a noun which is either left uninflected in the direct singular or, more commonly, in the two Archaic Chlouvānem adverbializing cases: the instrumental plural or the locative singular.
: ''sam + jildas'' "after + act" → *sañjildas → ''sañjilde'' "consequently"
: ''naš(e) + sṝva'' "full, complete + extent" → *nakṣṝva → ''nakṣṝve'' "as much as possible"
: ''væse + vāyam'' "while + image, form" → ''væsvāyam'' or ''væsvāyaṃrīka'' "thus, therefore"
: ''paṣ(e) + vāyam'' "beyond + image, form" → ''paṣvāyam'' "in addition, furthermore"
: ''maibu + jallas'' "enough + condition" → *maibujallas → ''maibujalle'' "as needed"
: ''nī'' + ''penai'' "within + net" → ''nīpenai'' "online" (generally considered the only modern Chlouvānem avyayībhāva)


Numbers from 20<sub>12</sub> above are simply made by compounding teens and units with the appropriate saṃdhi changes, like 21<sub>12</sub> <small>(25<sub>10</sub>)</small> ''hælmāmyemibe'', and then ''hælmāmidani'', ''hælmāmipāmvi'', and so on. Note that other compounds with 6 use -tulūɂa and not -vælka as in 16<sub>12</sub>.<br/>
A particular kind of avyayībhāva is the ''-ṣati'' class, whose particularity derives from having a first element which is a declinable word (a possessive determiner); however, they're still adverbs and therefore uninflected:
The other dozens are:
: ''lilyā ṣati'' "my way" → ''lilyāṣati'' "from my point of view; in my opinion; my way"
: '''30''' <small>(36<sub>10</sub>)</small> pāmvimāmei
: ''sāmyā ṣati'' "your way" ''sāmyāṣati'' "from your point of view; in your opinion; your way"
: '''40''' <small>(48<sub>10</sub>)</small> nęltemāmei
: '''50''' <small>(60<sub>10</sub>)</small> šulkmāmei
: '''60''' <small>(72<sub>10</sub>)</small> vælknihæla
: '''70''' <small>(84<sub>10</sub>)</small> māmyāvælka (regionally ''chīcæmāmei'', particularly in the East)
: '''80''' <small>(96<sub>10</sub>)</small> tītimāmei
: '''90''' <small>(108<sub>10</sub>)</small> mojemāmei
: '''ᘔ0''' <small>(120<sub>10</sub>)</small> tåldimāmei
: '''Ɛ0''' <small>(132<sub>10</sub>)</small> māmimīram
: and '''100''' <small>(144<sub>10</sub>)</small> nihæla.
The apparent irregularities in the words for 60<sub>12</sub>, 70<sub>12</sub>, and Ɛ0<sub>12</sub> are explained by etymology: ''vælka'' is the reflex of PLB *wewənko, which meant “half”, thus ''vælknihæla'' is “half hundred” and ''māmyāvælka'' is “twelve on half”; ''māmimīram'' is literally “twelve [less] from ahead”. 13<sub>12</sub> originally meant "one finger/three (''pāmvi'', the word for three, also meant "finger" in PLB (*pāmwəj) - whence also the Chlouvānem word for "finger", ''pamuvis'' (< PLB *pamwəjis)) in the second [dozen]", where the ''-hælī'' part is a worn form of ''hælinaika''.


Numbers from 100<sub>12</sub> to ƐƐƐ<sub>12</sub> are still compounds, e.g. ''nihælaimibe'', ''nihæladani'', and so on. Note that 160<sub>12</sub> is most commonly ''nihæltulūɂa'', but the more literary form ''nihælvælka'' may still be heard.<br/>
====Tatpuruṣa (''nīdhvakādhūs'')====
The other dozenal hundreds are:
Tatpuruṣa compounds (''nīdhvakādhūs'' "with meaning inside", pl. ''nīdhvakādhaus'') are likely the most common overall in Chlouvānem, and are the preferred way of crafting new words. These are endocentric compounds, the last element, the head of the compound, is modified by the previous element(s), which can be of any part of speech. Usually, the tatpuruṣa replaces genitive "X of Y", agentive "X which does Y", benefactive "X for Y", locative "X in Y", instrumental "X with Y", or sometimes copular structures "X which is (also) Y" (corresponding to Sanskrit karmadhāraya compounds) or "X made of Y".<br/>
: '''200''' <small>(288<sub>10</sub>)</small> daninihæla
The determining elements are generally uninflected.
: '''300''' <small>(432<sub>10</sub>)</small>  pāmvinihæla
: ''vāṇumi tarlā'' "study of plants" → ''vāṇatarlā'' "botany"
: '''400''' <small>(576<sub>10</sub>)</small>  nęltenihæla
: ''vāṇatarlom kaminairīveyē lila'' "a person studying botany" (semantic agent) ''vāṇatarlālila'' "botanist"
: '''500''' <small>(720<sub>10</sub>)</small> šulknihæla
: ''mordhē cūlla'' "carriage that flies" → ''mordhacūlla'' "airplane"
: '''600''' <small>(864<sub>10</sub>)</small> tulūnihæla
: ''aṣṭre nali hatsunā'' "brush for teeth" → ''aṣṭṛhatsunā'' "toothbrush"
: '''700''' <small>(1008<sub>10</sub>)</small> chīcænihæla
: ''nanāye līlta'' "path in the jungle" → ''nanailīlta'' "jungle path"
: '''800''' <small>(1152<sub>10</sub>)</small> tītinihæla
: ''nijogāp konanah'' "shooting with bow" → ''nijogākonanah'' "archery"
: '''900''' <small>(1296<sub>10</sub>)</small> mojanihæla
: ''munnęs ḍūṇā'' "a telephone which is a computer" → ''munnaḍūṇā'' "smartphone"
: '''ᘔ00''' <small>(1440<sub>10</sub>)</small> tåldanihæla
: ''javilenīs mayābi'' "wine made from apples" → ''javilmayābi'' "cider"
: '''Ɛ00''' <small>(1584<sub>10</sub>)</small> vældenihæla.
'''1.000''' <small>(1728<sub>10</sub>)</small> is ''tildhā'' and numbers above are separate words, without saṃdhi, e.g. '''1.001''' ''tildhā emibe'', '''6.2ᘔ9''' <small>(10785<sub>10</sub>)</small> ''tulūɂa tildhā daninihælatåldimāmimoja''.<br/>
Note that 2.000<sub>12</sub> may be either one of ''tildhāt'', ''dani tildhā'', or (only emphatically) ''dani tildhāt''.


The other divisions - numbers over ƐƐ.ƐƐƐ<sub>12</sub> are based on groups of two digits: the two most commonly used ones in common speech are '''1.00.000''' <small>(248.832<sub>10</sub>)</small> - a ''raicē'' - and '''1.00.00.000''' <small>(35.831.808<sub>10</sub>)</small> - a ''lallaraicē''.  
====Bahuvrīhi (''kaudhvakādhūs'')====
Bahuvrīhi compounds (''kaudhvakādhūs'' "with meaning outside", pl. ''kaudhvakādhaus'') are also quite common Chlouvānem words; they are exocentric compounds where none of the elements is the head of the compound, or, all elements are qualifiers. They replace structures like "[someone/something] with X which is/are Y" or "[sm/st] whose X is/are Y"; it could even be generalized to "[sm/st] whose [tatpuruṣa compound]":
: ''murkire dhānęs lā lila'' "person with black hands" → ''murkadhāna'' "Inquisitor"
: ''yųlgis nali javyęs lā dvārma'' "room with fire for food" → ''yųljavyāh'' "kitchen"<ref>Synchronically, this analysis is correct; however, this word was likely first crafted as a tatpuruṣa, i.e. "a fire for food" (''yųlgis nali javyāh''), before kitchens were rooms.</ref>


The next two groups have their separate words, but are quantities rarely used in common speech: '''1.00.00.00.000''' (12<sup>9</sup>) <small>(5.159.780.352<sub>10</sub>)</small> is a ''taiskaucis'' and '''1.00.00.00.00.000''' (12<sup>11</sup>) <small>(743.008.370.688<sub>10</sub>)</small> a ''lallataiskaucis''. The words ''khorādi'' (12<sup>7</sup>, i.e. synonym of lallaraicē), ''yaṣmūn'' (12<sup>11</sup>, i.e. lallataiskaucis), ''iriakas'' (12<sup>13</sup>), ''mairān'' or ''lalleriakas'' (12<sup>15</sup>), ''nirāvah'' (12<sup>17</sup>), and ''sṝva'' or ''lallanirāvah'' (12<sup>19</sup>) were introduced in Classical-era texts, but are almost never used today. However, they form the base for the scientific measurement system's prefixes.
===Noun-forming morphemes===
'''-a''' (unstressed) or '''''' (stressed) is a common derivative to make basic words from verbal roots. It does not have any fixed meaning, though it's always pretty close to the root. Nouns with the unstressed suffix and an ablautable vowel usually belong to the ablauting declension. '''''' in a root is always strengthened to middle-grade.<br/>
* ''dṛ'' (to do, to make) ''dara'' (activity)<br/>
* ''lil'' (to live) → ''lila'' (person; living thing)<br/>
* ''tṛl'' (to know) ''tarlā'' (science)


Their non-cardinal forms are all regular, with ''-ende'' (''-inde'' after ''-m'' or for Ɛ<sub>12</sub>) for ordinals, ''-tām'' for collectives, ''-haicē'' for distributives, ''-rvīm'' for adverbials/multiplicatives (prefixed ''māg-'' for the separate adverbial forms), and ''-endvāṭ/-indvāṭ'' for the fractionaries. Compounds of 1-2 retain all irregular suppletive forms, e.g. ''hælmāmilahīla'' 21<sub>12</sub>st (25<sub>10</sub>th); ''hælmāmihælinaika'' 22<sub>12</sub>nd (26<sub>10</sub>th).
'''-as''' is another common derivative, without fixed meaning, but usually denoting objects or things done by acting. It is used to derive positions from positional verbs.<br/>
* ''tug'' (to beat) → ''tugas'' (beat)<br/>
* ''māhatyā (māhatim-)'' (be to the right of) → ''māhatimas'' (right)<br/>
* ''āntyā (āntim-)'' (be above, be on) ''āntimas'' (part above)


Finally, there are few other cardinals commonly used in speech: ''vālhælia'' 1½, ''vālpāmvya'' , ''vālnęlca'' 3½, ''vālšulca'' 4½, and ''vāltulūya'' 5½. The forms ''vālchīca'', ''vāltītiya'', and ''vālmojya'' are used in telling the time only and obsolete otherwise, while other similar forms are sparingly attested in older mathematical texts, but periphrastical constructions such as ''tulūɂa hælinaivāṭ no'' (or, sometimes, ''- vælka no'') are more commonly heard and used nowadays.
'''-ūm''' is another derivative without fixed meaning, overlapping with ''-as''.
* ''lgut'' (to buy) → ''lgutūm'' (something bought)
* ''peith'' (to go, walk (multidirectional)) → ''peithūm'' (walk)
* ''yālv'' (to be sweet (taste)) → ''yālvūm'' (sweet taste)


====Use of fractionary numbers====
'''-(u)kāram''' is a singulative suffix, denoting either a single thing of a collective noun, or a single constituent of a broader act. Unlike the previous ones, it is most commonly applied to other nouns.<br/>In modern coinings, it is also used to denote a division of something.
Fractionary numbers (except ''vāl-'' ones) are used to express non-integers just like any other quantity. Simple ones such as 0,6 (½) are the basic fractionary number - in this case ''hælinaivāṭ'' (note that, outside mathematics, ''danyāmita'' is the preferred term for "half", both in metaphorical (''lilyā viṣam danyāmita'' "my other half") and non-metaphorical uses (''alāvi danyāmita'' "half of the bottle")); other examples are 0,3 (¼) ''nęltendvāṭ'' and 0,4 () ''pāmvendvāṭ''.<br/>
* ''lun'' (to go, walk (monodirectional)) → ''lulkāram'' (step)
With more complex fractions, the smallest part (negative power of twelve) is stated - the three commonly found are 1/12 (''māmindvāṭ''), 1/144 (''nihælendvāṭ''), and 1/1728 (''tildhaindvāṭ''). For example, 0,82 is ''tītimāmidani nihælendvāṭ'' and 0,7ᘔ6 is ''chīcænihælamāmimīraṃtulūɂa tildhaindvāṭ''; sometimes, "0, then" (mīram) may be added: ''ajrā mīram tītimāmidani nihælendvāṭ''.
* ''lil'' (to live) (or ''liloe'' (life)) ''lilukāram'' (moment, instant)
* ''daša'' (rain) ''dašukāram'' (raindrop)
* ''araṣa'' (atom) ''araṣkāram'' (subatomic particle)


With a non-fractionary portion that is not zero, instead of ''mīram'', ''smurā'' (full, integer) is used - e.g. 2,307 is usually said as ''dani smurā pāmvinihælchīka tildhaindvāṭ''.
'''-anah''', with middle-grade ablaut if possible, denotes an act or process, or something closely related to that.<br/>
* ''dig'' (to pour) → ''deganah'' ((act of) pouring)<br/>
* ''miš'' (to see) → ''mešanah'' (sight)<br/>
* ''lgut'' (to buy) → ''lgotanah'' (shopping)
 
'''-na''' ('''-ra''' after ''t'' or ''d''; '''-iyāna''' after ''Cy'', '''-uvāna''' after ''Cv'') with lengthening denotes a quality.<br/>
* ''māl'' (to keep together) → ''mālna'' (union)<br/>
* ''hælvē'' (fruit) → ''šaulviyāna'' (fertility) (morphemically //hyaulviyāna//)<br/>
* ''åbdv'' (to swell, blow up) → ''åbduvāna'' (swollenness, bloatiness)
* ''blut'' (to clean) → ''blūtra'' (cleanliness)
* Lengthening is absent if the word is derived from an ''-aus-'' adjectival verb (e.g. ''chlæraus-'' ((to be) easy) → ''chlærausna'' (easiness)) and in a few exceptions.
* Inverse-ablaut roots have the reduced vowel as a prefix (e.g. ''vald'' (to (be) open) → ''uvaldra'' (opening, state of being open)).
 
'''-išam''' has the same meaning as ''-na'', but it's rarer.<br/>
* ''yųlniltas'' (edible) → ''yųlniltešam'' (edibility)
* ''yālv'' (to be sweet (taste)) → ''yālvišam'' (sweetness)
* ''ñailūh'' (ice) → ''ñailūvišam'' (coldness)
* ''nevy'' (to model, to give a form) → ''nevīšam'' (plastic) (This word underwent a meaning shift from "modellability" to a common material with that quality, replacing the derived form ''nevīšandhūs'' previously used. "Modellability" is ''nyaviyāna'' in contemporary Chlouvānem.)
 
'''-āmita''' (''-yāmita'' when used with nouns with thematic ''e'' or ''i''), often with high-grade ablaut, is another suffix forming quality nouns, but it is often more abstract, being translatable with suffixes like English ''-ism''.<br/>
* ''lalteh'' (friend (female)) → ''laltyāmita'' (friendship)<br/>
* ''ēmīla'' (tiger) → ''ēmīlāmita'' (nobility (quality); most important people in society<ref>Chlouvānem society lacked a true noble class; this term applies to the most influential people in society. Tigers are considered among the noblest animals.</ref>)<br/>
* ''ñæltah'' (sister (male's)) → ''ñæltāmita'' (brotherhood)


====Declensions of cardinal numbers====
'''-tsām''' ('''-utsām''' after ''ñ, š'', and voiced stops except ''d(h)''), with middle-grade ablaut, has various generic and sometimes unpredictable meanings, though typically instrumental.
Some cardinal numbers are declined for case, but this is usually only done in formal Chlouvānem. In informal Chlouvānem, either only ''emibe'' is declined, or are all numerals up to ''vælden'', plus ''nihæla''. Compounds of these are usually not declined. The words ''tildhā'', ''(lalla)raicē'', and ''(lalla)taiskaucis'' are always declined, but they are fully nouns.
''māl'' (to keep together) → ''māltsām'' (number)
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
* ''lij'' (to sing) → ''lejutsām'' (choir)
|-
* ''dhāḍ'' (to speak) → ''dhāḍutsām'' (voice)
! rowspan=2 | Case !! rowspan=2 | ''emibe'' !! i-paradigm !! a-paradigm !! en-paradigm
* ''kul'' (to say) ''kultsām'' (word) (irregular lack of middle-grade ablaut)
|-
! <small>''dani'', ''pāmvi'', ''nęlte''</small><ref>''nęlte'' has the stem ''nęlc-'' wherever the others have ''-ny-'', ''-vy-'', i.e. accusatives ''danyu, pāmvyu, nęlcu''.</ref> !! <small>5 to 10<ref>''chīka'' has the stem ''chīcæ-'' before consonants.</ref></small> !! <small>''vælden'' only</small>
|-
! Direct<br/>Vocative
| '''emibe''' || '''dani''' || '''šulka''' || '''vælden'''
|-
! Accusative
| emiyu || danyu || šulku || vældu
|-
! Ergative
| emeis || danyes || šulkes || vældes
|-
! Genitive
| emibī || dani<ref>''pāmvi'' is unchanged; ''nęlte'' has the form ''nęlci''.</ref> || šulki<ref>''tītya'' has ''tītei''.</ref> || vældi
|-
! Translative
| emiban || danin || šulkan || vældanna
|-
! Exessive
| emibat || danit || šulkat || vældanta
|-
! Essive
| emibą || danyą || šulkąa || vældąs
|-
! Dative
| emibå || danyå || šulkå || vældå
|-
! Ablative
| emiyų || danyų || šulkų || vældų
|-
! Locative
| emiye || danye || šulke || vælde
|-
! Instrumental
| emīp || danip || šulkip || vældampa
|}
 
=== Use of numerals===
'''Cardinal numerals''' may be used in two ways, depending on whether emphasis is given to the number or to the thing counted.
* In the most common use, the counted thing is emphasized: the numeral is put '''before''' the noun and the noun is always '''singular''' (except for "two", see below) plus the appropriate case: e.g. ''emibe yujam'' (one lotus flower); ''dani māra'' (two mango fruits); ''pāmvi haloe'' (three names), ''vælden ñaiṭa'' (eleven stars), and so on.
* If emphasis is given to the number, then the counted thing comes first, and, if it should be in direct, ergative, or accusative case, it is in '''genitive singular''' instead; the semantic direct, ergative, or accusative case is taken by the numeral itself if it is one, two, three, or compounds. Examples: ''yujami emibe'' (one lotus flower), ''māri dani'' (two mango fruits), ''halenyes pāmvi'' (three names), ''ñaiṭi vælden'' (eleven stars). In other cases, the noun follows the semantic case (but is always singular anyway), e.g. ''marti pāmvi'' (three cities) but ''marte pāmvye'' (in the three cities).<br/>This form is increasingly less common in everyday use.
* "Two" may be used with either singular or dual number: ''dani māra'' or ''māri dani'' are both as correct as ''dani mārāt'' and ''māreva dani'' - note that the dual number alone, without the numeral, has the same meaning. Outside of literary texts, it is however more common to specify "two" with the numeral.
 
'''Ordinal numerals''' are regular attributive adjective-like words that precede nouns - e.g. ''hælinaika kita'' "second house". They do not decline if are used together with a noun, but they can also be used alone (e.g. ''hælinaika'' "the second one"), in which case they decline for case and number, as if they were ''-eh'' nouns (''-a'' for 1st and 2nd), e.g. ''mojendesām ukulate'' "it has been told to those in ninth position".
 
'''Collective numerals''' (which decline as regular ''-ām'' nouns) are most commonly found with the meaning of "a group consisting of X ...", therefore implying greater cohesiveness than using the cardinal number implies. A common example of the subtle meaning change is between the sentences ''chīka lalāruṇa togāhaite'' (with a cardinal) and ''chīcætām lalāruṇa togāhaite'' (with a collective): both mean "seven ''lalāruṇai'' hit", but in the latter sentence the action is implied to be a coordinate act of all seven animals, while in the former they either hit randomly or the coordination of the action is not specified (or not specification-worthy). This is also the most common meaning with pluralia tantum, as commonly heard with ethnonyms (which are all plural only in Chlouvānem), e.g. ''šulkatām chlǣvānem'' "[a group of] five Chlouvānem people".<br/>
They can also be found, context-dependent, used with the meaning of "all X of..." - in a sentence such as e.g. ''tītyatām lejīn dilu liju lilejlaikate'' "all eight singers wanted to sing the same song" - or with the meaning of "X sets of" with singularia tantum - e.g. ''pāmvyatām hærṣūs'' "three pairs of lips" (but note that colloquial Chlouvānem increasingly often uses the cardinals here, e.g. ''pāmvi hærṣūs'').<br/>
The collective numerals for 0 and 1 (''ajrāṇṭām'' and ''emibutām'' respectively) are not included in the table above because they do not exist in practical use; however, they are sporadically found in poetry and literature, referring to people and with the meaning of "a group where only one/no one is ...", e.g. ''ajrāṇṭām tadhusmausīn'' "a group where no one is honest". Similarly, collectives for ''vāl-'' numbers (e.g. ''vālpāmvyantām'' "a group consisting of 2½ ...") exist, but are virtually unused. ''danyatām'', like ''dani'', may be use together with either a singular or a dual noun.
 
In some cases, the choice between a collective and a cardinal is stylistic. While for example concepts such as "we are..." or "I have ... children" do normally use the collective (e.g. ''tulūɂatām ñæltah jalim'' "we are six sisters/a group of six reciprocal brothers and sisters"; ''lili mæn nęltitām samin'' "I have four children"), even if using a cardinal isn't wrong, in a sentence such as "there are X people" both versions are found, with the collective-using sentence (e.g. ''dvārma vælditāmą lilęs virā'' "in the room there are eleven people") being perceived as more formal than the more colloquially heard cardinal-using version (i.e. ''dvārma vældąs lilęs virā'').
 
'''Distributive numerals''' are indeclinable adjective-like words, and have the meaning of "X each": ''pāmvihaicē titē męlyāhai'' "three pens each are given"; ''lili lilyā ñæltah no tulūɂihaicē kolecañi alau ulgutarate'' "my sister and I have bought six bottles of kvas each" — note in both sentences the use of singular number in ''titē'' (pencil) and ''alūs'' (acc. ''alau'') "bottle", just like after cardinal and collective numerals.
 
'''Adverbial numerals''' are adverbs with the meaning of "X times" and '''multiplicative numbers''' are adjective-like words (that can also be used alone) with the meaning of "X times as large"; numbers from 1 to 4 have both forms, while all other ones (except 0) have only the multiplicative one, which is used for both meanings. Examples: ''pāmvirvīm yąloe'' "triple meal/a meal three times as large"; ''āsena māgdani'' "twice a month"; ''āsena tītyarvīm'' "eight times a month".<br/>
Zero only has an adverbial form (''māgajrā''), which is however only used in reading multiplications and powers, e.g. 3 * 0 ''māgajrā pāmvi'', 9<sup>0</sup> ''māgajrā demǣ moja''.
 
'''Fractionary numerals''' are always used in the noun.<small>GEN</small> numeral construction, and they are invariable in direct, vocative, accusative, and ergative case but decline with ''-vaḍa'' in all of the others (in fact, etymologically they derive from worn down forms of ordinal + ''vaḍa'', meaning Xth part, e.g. ''hælinaika vaḍa'' (the second part) → ''hælinaivāṭ''). Unlike ordinals, the noun is always in the genitive case. Examples: ''marti hælinaivāṭ'' "half of the city" ; ''alāvi nęltendvāṭ'' "one fourth of the bottle" ; ''babhrāmi tulūɂendvaḍe'' "in one sixth of the country".
 
===Basic maths===
* 1 + 2 = 3
: emibe ''nanū'' dani pāmvyå ''lunade'' (1.<small>DIR</small>. more. 2.<small>DIR</small>. 3-<small>DAT</small>. go.<small>MONODIR-IND.PRES-3DU.EXTERIOR-AGENTIVE</small>) — rule: A<sup>DIR</sup> ''nanū'' B<sup>DIR</sup> (''nanū'' ...) C<sup>DAT</sup> ''lunade'' (two addends) / ''lunāhai'' (3+ addends)
* 3 - 2 = 1
: pāmvi ''isan'' dani emibå ''lunade'' (3.<small>DIR</small>. minus. 2.<small>DIR</small>. 1-<small>DAT</small> go.<small>MONODIR-IND.PRES-3DU.EXTERIOR-AGENTIVE</small>) — rule: A<sup>DIR</sup> ''isan'' B<sup>DIR</sup> (''isan'' ...) C<sup>DAT</sup> ''lunade'' (two addends) / ''lunāhai'' (3+ addends)
* 3 * 2 = 6
: ''māgdani'' pāmvi tulūɂå ''liven'' (2.<small>ADV.MULTIP</small>. 3.<small>DIR</small>. 6-<small>DAT</small>. go.<small>MONODIR-IND.PRES-3SG.EXTERIOR-AGENTIVE</small>) — rule: <small>MULTIPLICATIVE.(ADV)-</small>B A<sup>DIR</sup> C<sup>DAT</sup> ''liven''
* 6 : 2 = 3
: ''hælinaivadęs'' tulūɂa pāmvyå ''liven'' (2.<small>FRACTION-ESS</small>. 6.<small>DIR</small> 3-<small>DAT</small>. go.<small>MONODIR-IND.PRES-3SG.EXTERIOR-AGENTIVE</small>) — rule: <small>FRACTIONARY-</small>B<sup>ESS</sup> A<sup>DIR</sup> C<sup>DAT</sup> ''liven''
* 6<sup>2</sup> = 30 (36<sub>10</sub>)
: ''māgdani demǣ'' tulūɂa pāmvimāmei ''liven'' (2.<small>ADV.MULTIP</small>. <small>REFL.GEN-LOC</small>. 6.<small>DIR</small>. 30<sub>12</sub>. go.<small>MONODIR-IND.PRES-3SG.EXTERIOR-AGENTIVE</small>) — rule: <small>MULTIPLICATIVE.(ADV)-</small>B ''demǣ'' A<sup>DIR</sup> C<sup>DAT</sup> ''liven''
 
===Reified numerals===
Reified numerals, or numerals used as nouns, have a special form, which is actually the numeral with the common noun-forming suffix ''-as'' added (with regular saṃdhi). These numerals are used most notably for:
* In order to refer to the digits themselves (''danyas'' "the digit 2");
* Things named with numbers (''tulūɂās'' "[tram/bus/etc] number 6");
* <small>''(in the plural)''</small> Year dozens (''vælknihælē'' "the 60<sub>12</sub>s = the 3860<sub>12</sub>s);
* <small>''(in the plural)''</small> Age ranges by the dozen (''hælmāmeyē'' "20<sub>12</sub>ies" = the age range from the start of one's 20<sub>12</sub>th year to the end of one's 2Ɛth);
* School marks - note that there's no uniform system in the Inquisition (''nęltayas'' "a grade 4" (passing grade in the most widespread system for non-higher education in the Inquisition, ranging from 1 (''emibayas''), worst, to 7 (''chīkās''), best));
* A group of X people - a reification of collective numerals (''pāmvyas'' "a trio").
 
Note that there are some terms which use numerals as roots but aren't considered reified numbers (also because of their rather inconsistent meanings); the most common examples include ''danyāmita'' (half) and ''māmyāmita'' (dozen).
 
===Units of Measurement===
Chlouvānem units of measurement (''lęlgīs'', pl. ''lęlgais'') are divided in popular units (''leilausirena lęlgais'') and scientific units (''tarlausirena lęlgais''). Scientific units, while understood, are rarely found outside of scientific contexts if corresponding popular units exist, while popular units are found in daily usage. Popular units follow however a measurement standard introduced in 3E 566 <small>(798<sub>10</sub>)</small> and updated several times in the following two centuries, in order to give a single understood measure for all units whose names and definitions varied across the many countries of the Chlouvānem cultural space.<br/>It is also to be noted that Calemerian scientific units have internationally unified definitions for their base units but are substantially different between the Western and the Eastern world as Western countries use them with a decimal system, while the Eastern countries (the Inquisition, most of the former Kaiṣamā, and Greater Skyrdagor) use them with a duodecimal system.
 
====Length====
Units in ''italics'' are popular divisions used in speech and not usually written. The ''nīnas'' has its own abbreviation but it is nowadays rarely used, and most often written as ''2 vā'' even if spoken as ''nīnas''.
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
|-
! Short !! Name !! Meaning/name origin !! Equivalent to !! Metric system (approx.)
|-
! lūj
| lūjla <small>(ABL)</small> || <small>Point, tip</small> || 1/12 liv || ~1.20255 mm
|-
! liv
| livuka || <small>Short (dialectal)</small> || ⅙ de || ~1.44305 cm
|-
! de
| dera || <small>Finger (in A.Kūṣṛmāṭhi)</small> || ⅓ vā || ~8.65833 cm
|-
! vā
| vāriṇa || <small>Span</small> || ¼ pā || 25.975 cm
|-
! <small>nī</small>
| <small>nīnas</small> || <small>Knee</small> || <small>½ pā</small> || 51.95 cm
|-
! pā
| '''pājya''' || <small>Leg</small> || ''(base unit)'' || 103.9 cm
|-
! bru
| brujñya || <small>Fathom</small> || 2+½ pā || 2.5975 m
|-
! rowspan=3 |
| <small>vyaṣojrī nęltendvāṭ</small> || <small>Quarter of ''vyaṣojrā''</small> || <small>¼ vya — 90 (108<sub>10</sub>) bru</small> || 280.53 m
|-
| <small>vyaṣojrī pāmvendvāṭ</small> || <small>Third of ''vyaṣojrā''</small> || <small>⅓ vya — 100 (144<sub>10</sub>) bru</small> || 374.04 m
|-
| <small>vyaṣojrī hælinaivāṭ</small> || <small>Half ''vyaṣojrā''</small> || <small>½ vya — 160 (216<sub>10</sub>) bru</small> || 561.06 m
|-
! vya
| vyaṣojrā || <small>Plough</small> || 300 <small>(432<sub>10</sub>)</small> bru || 1122.12 m — 1.11212 km
|-
! gar
| garaṇa || <small>Hour</small> || 6+⅓ vya || 7106.76 m — 7.10676 km
|}
 
====Area====
The ''våṇṭa'' may or may not be written as a separate measure. A measure of 1 ''jāṇa'' and 700 ''doṃryai'' may be written as ''1 jā.700 (do)'' (most commonly) or as ''1 jā.1.100 (do)''.
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
|-
! Short !! Name !! Meaning/name origin !! Equivalent to !! Metric system (approx.)
|-
! sǣ
| sǣca || <small>Small, Piece (in A.Namaikehi)</small> || 1 nī * 1 nī || 51.95 cm<sup>2</sup>
|-
! dar
| daryā || <small>unknown; name first used in the Near East</small> || 60 <small>(72<sub>10</sub>)</small> sǣ || 3,740.4 cm<sup>2</sup>
|-
! re
| relya || <small>Carpet</small> || 3 dar || ~1.12212 m<sup>2</sup>
|-
! dvā
| dvāmārya || <small>ultimately from ''dvārma'' (room)</small> || 4 re || ~4.48848 m<sup>2</sup>
|-
! vå
| våṇṭa || <small>probably from a Tamukāyi word meaning "fence(d)"</small> || 600 <small>(864<sub>10</sub>)</small> dvā — ½ jā || ~3,878.0467 m<sup>2</sup>
|-
! jā
| jāṇa || <small>Field</small> || 1,000 <small>(1,728<sub>10</sub>)</small> do — 2 vå || ~7,756.0934 m<sup>2</sup>
|-
! e
| ekram || <small>Expanse (in A.Namaikehi)</small> || 100 <small>(144<sub>10</sub>)</small> jā || ~1.1168 km<sup>2</sup>
|}
 
====Weight (and mass)====
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
|-
! Short !! Name !! Meaning/name origin !! Equivalent to !! Metric system (approx.)
|-
! vaj
| vaji || <small>dimin. from ''vaḍa'' (part)</small> || 1/100 <small>(1/144<sub>10</sub>)</small> dū || ~51.79398 mg
|-
! dū
| dūdha || <small>Seed</small> || ⅙ lit || ~7.45833 g
|-
! lit
| litveh || <small>Cut (in A.Namaikehi)</small> || ¼ aut || 44.75 g
|-
! aut
| '''auṭikā''' || <small>probably an augmentative from PLB *wutərus<ref>cf. ''ūtarṇ-'' "heavy" and ''ūṭrus'' "load"</ref></small> || ''(base unit)'' || 179 g
|-
! tū
| tulūɂendā || <small>ultimately from ''tulūɂendes'' (sixth)</small> || 6 aut || 1,074 g
|-
! pau
| paurā || <small>Rock (dialectal)</small> || 70 <small>(84<sub>10</sub>)</small> aut || 12.53 kg
|-
! māp
| māmipaurā || <small>''māmei'' (twelve) + ''paurā''</small> || 10 <small>(12<sub>10</sub>)</small> pau || 150.36 kg
|-
! lap
| lallapaurā || <small>''lalla'' (high, further) + ''paurā''</small> || 10 <small>(12<sub>10</sub>)</small> māp || 1,804.32 kg
|}
 
====Volume====
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
|-
! Short !! Name !! Meaning/name origin !! Equivalent to !! Metric system (approx.)
|-
! sjē
| sejyēh || <small>dimin. from ''segen'' (spoon)</small> || ½ seg || ~5.78704 mL
|-
! seg
| segen || <small>Spoon</small> || ⅓ cel || ~11.57407 mL
|-
! cel
| celya || <small>Small glass</small> || ⅙ lun || ~34.72222 mL
|-
! lun
| luneyāvi || <small>from ''lunai'' (tea)</small> || ⅓ val || ~0.20833 L
|-
! val
| '''valdhēna''' || <small>Flagon</small> || ''(base unit)''  || 0.625 L
|-
! al
| alūs || <small>Bottle</small> || 2+ ⅓ val || ~1.45833 L
|-
! då
| dåṣṭis || <small>Bucket</small> || 8 al || ~11.66666 L
|-
! raš
| rašah || <small>Barrel</small> || 16 <small>(18<sub>10</sub>)</small> då || ~210 L
|}
 
There are also two further units for dry measures only:
* the ''purṣa'' ("pot", '''pur'''), equivalent to 1+½ val (~0.9375 L);
* the ''ręnah'' ("jar, urn", '''rę'''), equivalent to 6 pur (~5.625 L).
 
The ''egimbladuldāvi'' (egd) is a unit used for measuring engine displacement: 1 egd equals ⅙ val, that is ~0.10416667 L (~104.16667 cc).
 
====Temperature====
Temperature measuring in the Chlouvānem world uses the ''Jahārāṭha'' scale (shortened '''ºj'''; named after scientist Ṣastirāvi Jahārāṭha ''Nukthalin''), which is fixed with a zero degree at water freezing temperature at sea level. 100 ºj is the rough boiling temperature of water, but, being a duodecimal scale, it is 100<sub>12</sub> (144<sub>10</sub>), thus 1 ºj equals 25/36 of a degree Celsius, or 1 ºC = 1.44 ºj.<br/>The median body temperature of a Calemerian human (which is slightly lower than for terrestrial humans) is of 41 ºj <small>(49<sub>10</sub>)</small>, thus  ~34.0278 ºC.
 
====Time====
→ ''See also: [[Chlouvānem/Calendar_and_time#The_Chlouvānem_calendar|Chlouvānem Calendar and time § the Chlouvānem calendar]]
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
|-
! English !! Chlouvānem !! Equivalent to !! rough Earthly approximation
|-
! Year
| heirah || 418 Calemerian days || 609.6 Earth days
|-
! Day
| pārṇam || 28<sub>12</sub> (32<sub>10</sub>) hours || ~35 hours
|-
! Hour
| garaṇa || 3 hælmāmyai<br/>60<sub>12</sub> (72<sub>10</sub>) railai || ~65 min ~37 sec
|-
! <small>''group of "minutes"''</small>
| hælmāmya || 20<sub>12</sub> (24<sub>10</sub>) railai || ~21 min ~52 sec
|-
! "Minute"
| raila || ''(base unit)''  || ~54.6805 sec
|-
! "Second"
| namišoe || 1/40<sub>12</sub> (1/48<sub>10</sub>) raila  || ~1.8986 sec
|-
! <small>1/12 of a "second"</small>
| (namišeni) māmendvāṭ || 1/10<sub>12</sub> (1/12<sub>10</sub>) namišoe || ~0.1582 sec
|-
! <small>1/144 of a "second"</small>
| (namišeni) nihælendvāṭ || 1/100<sub>12</sub> (1/144<sub>10</sub>) namišoe || ~0.0131 sec
|-
! <small>1/1728 of a "second"</small>
| (namišeni) tildhaindvāṭ || 1/1000<sub>12</sub> (1/1728<sub>10</sub>) namišoe || ~1.0987 ms
|}
 
====Other units====
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
|-
! !! Chlouvānem !! Symbol !! rough Earthly approximation
|-
! frequency
| lūnaji || lnj || ~0.526704 Hz
|-
! voltage
| chulgān || chg || 1 V
|}
 
==Particles (''remīn'')==
Traditional Chlouvānem grammar only recognizes a single part of speech called "particles" (''remīn'', literally "helper(s)") which includes conjunctions, postpositions, and interjections. However, these three are recognized as subsets of particles - here translated as "conjunctive particles" (''natemālāhai remīn''), "accompanying particles", i.e. postpositions (''ūtimāhai remīn''), and "exclamatory particles" (''pigdilanah nali remīn''), as is also a further fourth subgroup called "adverbial particles" (''khladaradhausirāhe remīn'').
 
===Conjunctive particles===
Conjunctive particles typically may not stand alone and do not modify (i.e. require a particular case) nouns they're attached to - with the exception of ''væse''. They are:
* '''golat''' — on the other hand, whereas (less common than ''maip'')
* '''lai''' — inclusive or
* '''las''' — and (incomplete listings, i.e. "X and Y and Z and so on"; <small>see ''no'' below for the use.</small>)
* '''mailiven''' — so, thus, therefore (a grammaticalized use of <small>go_forward.UNIDIR.PRES.IND.3SG.PATIENT.EXTERIOR.</small>).
* '''maip''' — on the other hand, whereas (more common than both ''golat'' and ''vādvyeṣi'')
* '''mbu''' — exclusive or
* '''menni''' — because, for, as
:: If there is a following main clause, then it's the last word in the subordinate of reason (this use is usually synonymous to the consequential secondary verbal mood of cause, e.g. ''aganą lā įstyāk menni yųlakepañcekte'' "as (s)he was hungry, (s)he started eating" = ''aganą lā įstyānairek yųlakepañcekte''); if it's just a lone sentence (an answer), then it is usually at the ''second'' place in the sentence, after the verbal trigger (e.g. ''tami menni yuyųlsegde'' "because (s)he wants to eat").
* '''najelai''' — maybe. Originally the archaic potential form of ''najalle'' (to happen). Requires a verb in the subjunctive mood.
* '''nanū''' — also, too (only between sentences; <small>see ''tora'' below</small>). Actually a different use of the adverb meaning "more" (comparative of ''taili'' "many, much").
* '''ni''' — but
* '''no''' — and (between nouns and denoting a complete listing; use ''las'' for incomplete listings). It follows the noun it refers to, and in listings with more than two nouns it follows every noun except the first. It (and ''lasь'') can also translate "and" between verbs, but ''sama'' is preferred between sentences, especially with different subjects (e.g. ''yąlute molute no'' "I eat and drink", either ''mēlitu yąlute kolecañu molute no'' or ''mēlitu yąlute sama kolecañu molute'' "I eat curry and drink kvas", but most often ''mēlitu yąlute sama lilyā ñæltah kolecañu molegde'' "I eat curry and my sister drinks kvas". Note that ''mēlitu yąlute lilyā ñæltah kolecañu molegde no'' is still correct, but mostly found in literary or very formal language).
* '''sama''' —  and (between sentences). Shortened to '''sam''' before vowel-initial words.
* '''tī''' — because, for, as
:: Unlike ''menni'' (which it is an exact synonym of), ''tī'' is always in second place, cf. ''aganą lā tī įstiāk yųlakepañcekte'' (in this case, note that no other word can intervene between the "accompanying particle" ''lā'' and the noun it is attached to).
* '''tora''' — also, too; used both as a conjunctive particle (even if ''nanū'' is more common) and as an adverbial one, in the latter case always before the verb (and any non-subject pronoun). (e.g. ''tora nanau uyųlaṃte'' "I've eaten that too").
* '''vādvyeṣi''' — on the other hand, whereas (more formal than both ''golat'' and ''maip'')
* '''væse''' — while, in the meantime. Requires a subjunctive mood verb or a noun in essive (or, depending on the meaning, exessive or translative) case.
 
===Accompanying particles (i.e. postpositions)===
Postpositions, known as "accompanying particles" (''ūtimāhai remīn'') in native Chlouvānem grammars, usually cannot stand alone (unlike "adverbial" particles) and require a particular noun case.
* '''dam''' — interrogative particle, put after the verb (e.g. ''daltah væl dam?'' "is it a fish?").
* '''e''' — like. Requires essive case with nouns (in formal speech; while bare essive most properly has the meaning "as X" instead of "like X", colloquially it is used both ways) and subjunctive mood with realis verbs (other moods are used for their meaning).
* '''ga''' — adpositive particle, used to join nouns in noun phrases (usually titles; the only exceptions being honorifics), such as ''Līlasuṃghāṇa ga marta'' (Līlasuṃghāṇa city, or "city of Līlasuṃghāṇa") or ''Tāllahāria ga maita'' (Tāllahāria river).
* '''gu(n) — ša''' — circumposition only used around verbs used to negate them, e.g. ''gu yuyųlsegde ša'' "(s)he doesn't want to eat"). Note that the ''ša'' element is omitted if the verb is attributive.
* '''lā''' (arch. ''lapi'') — with (comitative); requires essive case (e.g. ''lilyąa ñæltęs lā'' "with my sister").
* '''mboda''' — except for - requires a subjunctive or an essive case (e.g. ''nītedarāhai lailąs mboda nalunya upulsma'' "entrance is forbidden, except for involved people" "authorized personnel only").
* '''mei''' and '''go''' — the Chlouvānem words for "yes" and "no" respectively; their use is however different from English, as they are used according to the polarity of the question: ''mei'' answers "yes" to affirmative questions and "no" to negative questions; ''go'' answers "no" to affirmative questions and "yes" to negative questions.
* '''mūji''' — almost, more or less
* '''mæn''' — [[Chlouvānem#Use of the topic|topic marker]]. Used for a topic which otherwise has no role in the sentence (often used inside larger conversations, e.g. ''lili mæn yultire jṛṣṇe'' (mine/as for me (echoing a previous sentence), [it is] in the bright yellow backpack; <small>OR</small>: as for me, [I keep it] in...)).
* '''nali''' — benefactive marker (used with a noun in direct case in a non-benefactive-trigger voice); in order to (with a subjunctive verb; note that the bare subjunctive already carries that meaning, but using ''nali'' gives a nuance of hope).
* '''nānim''' — almost. Requires a noun in essive case or a verb in the semantically correct mood.
* '''pa''' — on, of, concerning, on the subject of. Requires a noun in the direct case or a subjunctive verb.
* '''ras''' — antibenefactive marker (used with a noun in direct case in a non-antibenefactive-trigger voice); to avoid X (with a subjunctive verb).
* '''sām''' — until. Requires a noun in translative case (or dative case for places, meaning "as far as")<ref>Compare ''ājvan sām'' "until dawn" and ''līlasuṃghāṇa kahērimaila ga keikom sām'' "as far as Līlasuṃghāṇa Kahērimaila Station".</ref> or a verb in the subjunctive.
* '''tatta''' — despite; even though. Requires a noun in the essive case or a subjunctive verb.
 
===Adverbial particles===
Adverbial particles (''khladaradhausirāhe remīn'') are distinguished from "accompanying particles" because they, like adverbs, can also stand alone.
* '''dǣ''' — again (quite archaic)
** '''dīdān''' — again and again (< ''dǣ dǣ no'', attested in Archaic Chlouvānem)
* '''enibu''' — still
* '''govyāṣa''' — not yet
* '''gudēya''' — anymore, no more
* '''lenta''' — together (with). When used as a particle, it requires a noun in genitive case - e.g. ''lili buneyi lenta'' "I, together with my older sister".
* '''lǣh''' — already
* '''maibu''' — enough. Requires a noun in genitive case or a verb in the indicative mood.
* '''nāṭ''' — already
* '''samelīsa''' — again
* '''vādį''' — without; requires essive case (e.g. ''lilyąa ñæltęs vādį'' "without my sister").
* '''vivāmi''' — too much. Requires a noun in genitive case or a verb in the indicative mood.
 
==="Paired" particles===
Chlouvānem does not have "paired" particles as English does, because they are translated in different ways:
* "both... and..." is translated by the adverb '''peimęe''' (the same), either in the form "X Y no peimęe" or in "X ..., Y peimęe":
:: ''jādāh lañekaica no peimęe nanau draikate'' – both Jādāh and Lañekaica did that.
:: ''nāniu uyųlaṃte : māru peimęe'' – I have eaten both the bread and the mango.
* "neither... nor..." requires the sentence to be built in a different way, namely "not X, and also not Y", where "also not" is translated in two different ways: 1) by the particle '''gūta''' (more formal); or 2) with the adverb ''peimęe'' - therefore building a sentence that is exactly like the "both X and Y" but negative.
:: ''jādāh nanau gu dṛkte ša : lañekaica gūta'' – neither Jādah nor Lañekaica did that. Literal translation: Jādāh didn't do it, and Lañekaica also [didn't].
:: ''nāniu gu uyųlaṃte ša : māru peimęe'' – I have eaten neither the bread nor the mango. Literally: I haven't eaten the bread, and the same for the mango.
* "either... or..." is easily translated by the exclusive or (''mbu''). It is commonly only used after the second term, but it can be put after every term for emphasis:
:: ''jādāh (mbu) lañekaica mbu nanau dṛkte'' – either Jādah or Lañekaica did it. (note the singular verb)
 
===Emphatic particles===
A few particles are used (usually sentence-finally) in order to convey particular feelings of the speaker about the statement:
* '''å''' expresses either surprise (at the beginning of a sentence) or that the fact is considered annoying (at the end), e.g. ''å viṣęe dadrāte'' "wow, (s)he's done it again!" / ''viṣęe dadrā å'' "oh no, (s)he's done it again!"
* '''dā''' gives the sentence, especially a command or a proposition, an informal tone - cf. German "mal" or Italian "un po'", e.g. ''najire nanau mešute dā'' "I'll just see what happens"; ''peithos dā'' "just calm down and take a walk around here."
* '''e''' is a basic declarative particle when used word-finally, and is often used as an introduction (much like "you know, ...") or as a generic filler.
* '''eri''' means "even". It marks a positive emphasis and used with positive sentences (e.g. ''hūnakumi dældān eri dældire'' "(s)he even speaks Hūnakumi<ref>Language of an ethnic minority (but titular ethnicity) in the diocese of Hūnakañjātia.</ref>")
* '''gāri''' means "not even", being the opposite of ''eri'', marking a negative emphasis in negative sentences (e.g. ''hulābdān chlǣvānumi dældān gāri gu dældire ša'' "(s)he doesn't even speak correct Chlouvānem")
* '''nā''', a generic filler (cf. "I mean"), often combined with ''e''. e.g. ''nā (e) nenēt nāṭ tarliru!'' "I mean, I already know this!"
* '''nane''' is a tag question, e.g. ''camiyūs vali dam nane?'' "you're from Cami, aren't you?"
* '''naihā''' is a tag question much like ''nane'', but is used when the speaker is in doubt and/or expects a contradictory answer, e.g. ''lære draute dam naihā?'' "did I do it yesterday, or...?"
* '''pos''' is a filler with a meaning similar to ''tau'', but it is more properly translated as emphasizing that the speaker considers the statement as a general truth or a widely accepted thing, e.g. ''ālīce jeldegde pos'' "yeah, everybody knows (s)he acts that way/does that kind of things."
* '''sāṭ''' expresses the speaker's doubt about the honesty of the expressed action, e.g. ''tamye tamyu draukæ sāṭ'' "(s)he did it for me, but I don't believe that's what (s)he really wanted" or "as if (s)he really did it for me!"
* '''tau''' emphasizes that the fact expressed is considered obvious, and is fairly colloquial, e.g. ''lārvājuṣe ēk tau'' "huh, I was at the temple, nothing else"; ''kitui vasau tau'' "I drove home [what else could I do?]"
* '''tva''' puts strong emphasis on a declarative sentence; it is fairly colloquial and not polite, and thus avoided in formal speech, e.g. ''nenēyu daudyute tati ukulaṃte tva!'' "damn, I said I want that, shut up!"


==Derivational morphology (''vāmbeithausire maivāndarāmita'')==
'''-rṣūs''' (''-ṛṣūs'' after a consonant) denotes a tool, namely something used in doing an action.
Chlouvānem has an extensive system of derivational morphology, with many possibilities of deriving words from verbal roots and even from other nouns.
* ''yaud-'' (to catch) → ''yaudṛṣūs'' (trap)
* ''miš-'' (to see) → ''meširṣūs'' (eye <small>''(literary, rare)''</small>)<ref>Middle-grade ablaut is specific to this root.</ref>
* ''nail-'' (to kiss) → ''nailṛṣūs'' (lips (pair of))


===Nouns===
'''-gis''' denotes something used ''for'' doing an action, not always synonymous with ''-rṣūs''. ''-t-gis'' becomes ''-ñjis''.
'''-a''' (unstressed) or '''''' (stressed) is a common derivative to make basic words from verbal roots. It does not have any fixed meaning, though it's always pretty close to the root. Nouns with the unstressed suffix and an ablautable vowel usually belong to the ablauting declension. '''''' in a root is always strengthened to middle-grade.<br/>
* ''mešīn'' (eye) → ''mešīlgis'' (glasses (pair of))
* ''dṛ'' (to do, to make) → ''dara'' (activity)<br/>
* ''tug-'' (to beat) → ''tulgis'' (drumstick)
* ''lil'' (to live) → ''lila'' (person; living thing)<br/>
* ''lgut-'' (to buy) → ''lguñjis'' (money, currency)
* ''tṛl'' (to know) → ''tarlā'' (science)


'''-as''' is another common derivative, without fixed meaning, but usually denoting objects or things done by acting. It is used to derive positions from positional verbs.<br/>
'''-oe''' (with middle-grade ablaut) often denotes a result, but has lots of various meanings.
* ''tug'' (to beat) → ''tugas'' (beat)<br/>
* ''hal-'' (to call) → ''haloe'' (name, noun)
* ''jlitiā (jlitim-)'' (be to the right of) → ''jlitimas'' (right)<br/>
* ''mbiṇḍh-'' (to go, walk (multidirectional)) → ''mbiṇḍhoe'' (development; the way something is carried out)
* ''āntiā (āntim-)'' (be above, be on) → ''āntimas'' (part above)
* ''yųl-'' (to eat) → ''yąloe'' (meal)


'''-ūm''' is another derivative without fixed meaning, overlapping with ''-as''.<br/>With a few roots whose vowel is ''-o-'', ''-un'' is used instead.
'''-īn''' plus middle grade-ablaut denotes a doer (roughly equivalent to English ''-er''); usually it is a person, but not always.
* ''lgut'' (to buy) → ''lgutūm'' (something bought)
* ''bhi-'' (to take care of; to care for) → ''bhayīn'' (someone who takes care; guardian)
* ''peith'' (to go, walk (multidirectional)) → ''peithūm'' (walk)
* ''tug-'' (to beat) → ''togīn'' (heart)
* ''yālv'' (to be sweet (taste)) → ''yālvūm'' (sweet taste)
* ''lgut-'' (to buy) → ''lgotīn'' (buyer)
* ''storg'' (<small>offices, factories:</small> to be open, to work) → ''storgun'' (working hours)
 
'''-laukas''' is a singulative suffix, denoting either a single thing of a collective noun, or a single constituent of a broader act. Unlike the previous ones, it is most commonly applied to other nouns.<br/>
* ''lun'' (to go, walk (monodirectional)) → ''luṃlaukas'' (step)<br/>
* ''lil'' (to live) (or ''liloe'' (life)) → ''lillaukas'' (moment, instant)<br/>
* ''daša'' (rain) → ''dašilaukas'' (raindrop)
 
'''-anah''', with middle-grade ablaut if possible, denotes an act or process, or something closely related to that.<br/>
* ''dig'' (to pour) → ''deganah'' ((act of) pouring)<br/>
* ''miš'' (to see) → ''mešanah'' (sight)<br/>
* ''lgut'' (to buy) → ''lgotanah'' (shopping)
 
'''-yāva''' with lengthening denotes a quality.<br/>
* ''māl'' (to keep together) → ''mālyāva'' (union)<br/>
* ''hælvē'' (fruit) → ''šaulvyāva'' (fertility) (morphemically //hyaulvyava//)<br/>
* ''blut'' (to clean) → ''blūtyāva'' (cleanliness)
* Lengthening is absent if the word is derived from an ''-aus-'' adjectival verb (e.g. ''chlærausake'' ((to be) easy) → ''chlærausyāva'' (easiness)) and in a few exceptions (e.g. ''lalla'' (high) → ''lalliyāva'' (highness, superiority)). ''taugyāva'' (life) has ''au'' because it's derived from ''taugikā'' (heart) and not the bare root ''tug'' (to beat).
* Inverse-ablaut roots have the reduced vowel as a prefix, much like in causative verbs (e.g. ''vald'' (to (be) open) → ''uvaldyāva'' (opening, state of being open)).
 
'''-išam''' has the same meaning as ''-yāva'', but it's rarer.<br/>
* ''yųlniltas'' (edible) → ''yųlniltešam'' (edibility)
* ''yālv'' (to be sweet (taste)) → ''yālvišam'' (sweetness)
* ''ñailūh'' (ice) → ''ñailūvišam'' (coldness)
* ''nevy'' (to model, to give a form) → ''nevīšam'' (plastic) (This word underwent a meaning shift from "modellability" to a common material with that quality, replacing the derived form ''nevīšandhūs'' previously used. "Modellability" is ''nyavyāva'' in contemporary Chlouvānem.)


'''-āmita''' (''-yāmita'' when used with nouns with thematic ''e'' or ''i''), often with high-grade ablaut, is another suffix forming quality nouns, but it is often more abstract, being translatable with suffixes like English ''-ism''.<br/>
'''-āršis''' is a mostly non-productive agentive suffix like ''-īn'', surviving in a few ancient forms as well as some colloquial pejoratives:
* ''lalteh'' (friend (female)) → ''laltyāmita'' (friendship)<br/>
* ''lęk-'' (to measure) → ''lękāršis'' (surveyor, inspector)
* ''ēmīla'' (tiger) → ''ēmīlāmita'' (nobility (quality); most important people in society<ref>Chlouvānem society lacked a true noble class; this term applies to the most influential people in society. Tigers are considered among the noblest animals.</ref>)<br/>
* ''dhīl-'' (to be idle) → ''dhīlāršis'' (lazy ass (pejor.))
* ''ñæltah'' (sister (male's)) → ''ñæltāmita'' (brotherhood)
* ''ēreša'' (teardrop) → ''ērešāršis'' (crybaby (pejor.))
 
'''-tsām''' ('''-utsām''' after ''ñ, š'', and voiced stops except ''d(h)''), with middle-grade ablaut, has various generic and sometimes unpredictable meanings, though typically instrumental.
* ''māl'' (to keep together) → ''māltsām'' (number)
* ''lij'' (to sing) → ''lejutsām'' (choir)
* ''dhāḍ'' (to speak) → ''dhāḍutsām'' (voice)
* ''kul'' (to say) → ''kultsām'' (word) (irregular lack of middle-grade ablaut)
 
'''-rṣūs''' (''-ṛṣūs'' after a consonant) denotes a tool, namely something used in doing an action.
* ''yaud'' (to catch) → ''yaudṛṣūs'' (trap)
* ''miš'' (to see) → ''meširṣūs'' (eye <small>''(literary, rare)''</small>)<ref>Middle-grade ablaut is specific to this root.</ref>
* ''hær'' (to kiss) → ''hærṣūs'' (lips (pair of))
 
'''-gis''' denotes something used ''for'' doing an action, not always synonymous with ''-rṣūs''. ''-t-gis'' becomes ''-ñjis''.
* ''mešīn'' (eye) → ''mešīlgis'' (glasses (pair of))
* ''tug'' (to beat) → ''tulgis'' (drumstick)
* ''lgut'' (to buy) → ''lguñjis'' (money, currency)
 
'''-oe''' (with middle-grade ablaut) often denotes a result, but has lots of various meanings.
* ''hal'' (to call) → ''haloe'' (name, noun)
* ''peith'' (to go, walk (multidirectional)) → ''peithoe'' (development; the way something is carried out)
* ''yųl'' (to eat) → ''yąloe'' (meal)
 
'''-īn''' plus middle grade-ablaut denotes a doer (roughly equivalent to English ''-er''); usually it is a person, but not always.
* ''bhi'' (to take care of; to care for) → ''bhayīn'' (someone who takes care; guardian)
* ''tug'' (to beat) → ''togīn'' (heart)
* ''lgut'' (to buy) → ''lgotīn'' (buyer)


'''-āvi''' denotes something derived from X. It is also used in forming matronymics.
'''-āvi''' denotes something derived from X. It is also used in forming matronymics.
* ''lameṣa'' (coconut palm) → ''laṃṣāvi'' (coconut)
* ''lameṣa'' (coconut palm) → ''laṃṣāvi'' (coconut)
* ''mešanah'' (sight) → ''mešanąvi'' (knowledge)
* ''mešanah'' (sight) → ''mešanąvi'' (knowledge)
* ''yųl'' (to eat) → ''yųlāvi'' (strength <small>''(literary, rare)''</small>)
* ''yųl-'' (to eat) → ''yųlāvi'' (strength <small>''(literary, rare)''</small>)
* It is also used with surnames of writers, usually as a plurale tantum, in order to derive words meaning "the works of...", e.g. ''yukahināryāvi'' "the works of Lileikhurāvi Yukahināri ''Mæmihūmya''".


'''-āmis''', with lengthening, means "made of X".
'''-āmis''', with lengthening, means "made of X".
* ''tāmira'' (rock, stone) → ''tāmirāmis'' (stone tool)
* ''tāmira'' (rock, stone) → ''tāmirāmis'' (stone tool)
* ''tarlā'' (knowledge, science) → ''tārlāmis'' (wisdom)
* ''tarlā'' (knowledge, science) → ''tārlāmis'' (wisdom)
* ''lil'' (to live) → ''līlāmis'' (a blissful place)
* ''lil-'' (to live) → ''līlāmis'' (a blissful place)
* Words ending in a final long vowel (plus either ''h'', ''s'', or ''m'') do not lengthen any vowel in a previous syllable (e.g. ''ñaryāh'' (mountain) → ''ñaryāmis'' (mountainous area)).
* Words ending in a final long vowel (plus either ''h'', ''s'', or ''m'') do not lengthen any vowel in a previous syllable (e.g. ''ñaryāh'' (mountain) → ''ñaryāmis'' (mountainous area)).


'''-ikā''' has various meanings, often somewhat abstract, intensive, or related to highly valued things/roles.
'''-ūneh''' ('''-īneh''' after stems in -Cy-, '''-ēneh''' for nouns in ''-ē''), with middle grade ablaut (rarely strong grade), has various meanings, often somewhat abstract, intensive, or related to highly valued things/roles.
* ''daša'' (rain) → ''dāšikā'' (monsoon) (irregular lengthening)
* ''daša'' (rain) → ''dašūneh'' (monsoon)
* ''hær'' (to kiss) → ''hærikā'' (love <small>''(literary, rare)''</small>)
* ''nail-'' (to kiss) → ''nailūneh'' (love <small>''(literary, rare)''</small>)
* ''lalāruṇa'' (giant domestic lizard) → ''lalārauṇikā'' (knight mounting a ''lalāruṇa'')
* ''yaiva'' (all) + ''lairē'' (day) → ''yaivlairēṇeh'' (everyday life)
* ''lalāruṇa'' (giant domestic lizard) → ''lalārauṇūneh'' (knight mounting a ''lalāruṇa'')


'''-dhūs''' means "having X".
'''-dhūs''' means "having X".
Line 2,263: Line 1,761:
* ''Līlasuṃghāṇa'' → ''līlasuṃghāṇyūs''
* ''Līlasuṃghāṇa'' → ''līlasuṃghāṇyūs''
* ''Cami'' → ''camiyūs''
* ''Cami'' → ''camiyūs''
* ''Ajāƾilbādhi'' → ''ajāƾilbādhyūs''
* ''Ajāɂilbādhi'' → ''ajāɂilbādhyūs''


'''-(g)arim''' is often found with the meaning of "that has to be X"; usually, a synonymous word may be formed by ''-s'' derivation from a necessitative stem, but some ''-(g)arim'' words have their own specialized meaning:
'''-mana''' ('''-ana''' after ''CC'' clusters) is often found with the meaning of "that has to be X"; usually, a synonymous word may be formed by ''-s'' derivation from a necessitative stem, but some ''-mana'' words have their own specialized meaning:
* ''vvlur-'' (to believe) → ''vvlurgarim'' (miracle)
* ''ṭvur-'' (to believe) → ''ṭvurmaṇa'' (miracle)
* ''miš-'' (to see) → ''mišarim'' (attraction) (also ''memikṣūs'')
* ''miš-'' (to see) → ''mišmana'' (attraction) (also ''memikṣūs'')
* ''tṛl-'' (to know, understand) → ''tṛlgarim'' (rule) (not synonymous with ''tartṛlsūs'', meaning "needed knowledge, prerequisite")
* ''tṛl-'' (to know, understand) → ''tṛlmana'' (rule) (not synonymous with ''tartṛlsūs'', meaning "needed knowledge, prerequisite")


'''-ьai''' (often with lengthening) forms nouns with the meaning of "pertaining to", generally applied to nouns denoting inanimate (but usually concrete) concepts. Such nouns are found in literature with an anaphorical use.<br/>It is commonly found in Chlouvānem surnames. In chemistry, it denotes binary compounds, usually with a dvandva stem.
'''-yai''' (often with lengthening) forms nouns with the meaning of "pertaining to", generally applied to nouns denoting inanimate (but usually concrete) concepts. Such nouns are found in literature with an anaphorical use.<br/>It is commonly found in Chlouvānem surnames. In chemistry, it denotes binary compounds, usually with a dvandva stem.
* ''vīhatam'' (farm) → ''vīhātiai'' (farmer; farm's)
* ''vīhatam'' (farm) → ''vīhātyai'' (farmer; farm's)
* ''svāṣṭa'' (armor) → ''svāṣṭyai'' (armored knight)
* ''svāṣṭa'' (armor) → ''svāṣṭyai'' (armored knight)
* ''bilumbida'' (sodium) + ''talyelīm'' (chlorine) → ''bilumbītalyelīyai'' (sodium chloride)
* ''bilumbida'' (sodium) + ''talyelīm'' (chlorine) → ''bilumbītalyelīyai'' (sodium chloride)


'''-ceh''', '''-cænah''', and '''-cañīh''' (all often with palatalization of the last consonant) are three different (but with roughly the same meaning) diminutive-forming suffixes; some of them have developed distinct meanings. They can also be compounded, as in '''-cæñ-cañīh''':
'''-ceh''', '''-cænah''', and '''-cañīh''' (all often with palatalization of the last consonant) are three different (but with roughly the same meaning) diminutive-forming suffixes; some of them have developed distinct meanings. They can also be compounded, as in '''-cæñ-cañīh''':
* ''samin'' (child) → ''samiñcænah'' (little child)
* ''nūrya'' (child) → ''nūricænah'' (little child)
* ''ēmīla'' (tiger) → ''ēmīlcañīh'' (cat)
* ''ēmīla'' (tiger) → ''ēmīlcañīh'' (cat)
* ''pǣka'' (taste)  → ''pǣcicænah'' (hors d'œuvre, entrée)
* ''pǣka'' (taste)  → ''pǣcicænah'' (hors d'œuvre, entrée)
Line 2,285: Line 1,783:
* ''alūs'' (bottle) → ''alūrarā'' (a big bottle)
* ''alūs'' (bottle) → ''alūrarā'' (a big bottle)


===Verbs===
===Verb-forming morphemes===
Denominal verbs, in Chlouvānem, are not formed with derivational suffixes; a "light verb" is attached to the semantic root instead; the semantic root remains invariable but the light verb is conjugated (as a prefixed one). The light verb used are especially ''dṛke'' (to do, make), but also ''jilde'' (to do an action), ''jānake'' (to feel (physical)), and ''gyake'' (to be). Some examples:
Denominal verbs, in Chlouvānem, are not formed with derivational suffixes; a "light verb" is attached to the semantic root instead; the semantic root remains invariable but the light verb is conjugated (as a prefixed one). The light verb used are especially ''dṛke'' (to do, make), but also ''jilde'' (to do an action), ''jānake'' (to feel (physical)), and ''gyake'' (to be). Some examples:
* ''āmaya'' (collection) → ''āmayadṛke'' (to collect)
* ''āmaya'' (collection) → ''āmayadṛke'' (to collect)
Line 2,331: Line 1,829:
* ''rahēlah'' (health) → ''rahēlṣenike'' (healthy)
* ''rahēlah'' (health) → ''rahēlṣenike'' (healthy)
* ''nakṣuma'' (music) → ''nakṣuṃṣenike'' (having a musical talent)
* ''nakṣuma'' (music) → ''nakṣuṃṣenike'' (having a musical talent)
* ''meimairuh'' (emerald) → ''meimairūṣenike'' (emeraldine, emerald-like)
* ''migmairuh'' (emerald) → ''migmairūṣenike'' (emeraldine, emerald-like)


====Compound verbs====
====Compound verbs====
Chlouvānem uses compound verbs as its main method of deriving verbs from nouns. Such "verbs" are actually a nominal root which does not decline followed by a conjugating verb. The verb used influences the meaning that the compound will have:
Chlouvānem uses compound verbs as its main method of deriving verbs from nouns. Such "verbs" are actually a nominal root which does not decline followed by a conjugating verb. The verb used influences the meaning that the compound will have:
* ''dṛke'' (to do) is probably the most commonly used, and may have a meaning of using something (denoted by the nominal root) to treat something else (cf. ''bikṣurdṛke'' "to deodorize" < ''bikṣurga'' "deodorant"), of moving or acting like the nominal root (''yināṃdṛke'' "to protect" < ''yinām'' "protection"), or of simply having or creating something (''āmayadṛke'' "to collect" < ''āmaya'' "collection").
* ''dṛke'' (to do) is probably the most commonly used, and may have a meaning of using something (denoted by the nominal root) to treat something else (cf. ''bikṣurdṛke'' "to deodorize" < ''bikṣurga'' "deodorant"), of moving or acting like the nominal root (''yināṃdṛke'' "to protect" < ''yinām'' "protection"), or of simply having or creating something (''āmayadṛke'' "to collect" < ''āmaya'' "collection").
* ''kitte'' (to put) is used for a meaning of addition of the nominal root or its characteristics to something (cf. ''nanūkkitte'' "to add salt" < ''nanūkah'' "salt).
* ''kitte'' (to put) is used for a meaning of addition of the nominal root or its characteristics to something (cf. ''nāmṛkitte'' "to add salt" < ''nāṃra'' "salt).
* ''męlike'' (to give) is sometimes used with the same meaning as ''kitte'' (cf. ''junyāmęlike'' "to plant flowers" < ''junyā'' "flower").
* ''męlike'' (to give) is sometimes used with the same meaning as ''kitte'' (cf. ''junyāmęlike'' "to plant flowers" < ''junyā'' "flower").
* ''jilde'' (to act) is used for subjects "emitting" or "giving off" something (cf. ''lāhajilde'' "to judge" < ''lāham'' "judgement"), also for subjects possessing (''dhokajilde'' "to mean" < ''dhokam'' "meaning") or undergoing something (''lañšijilde'' "to marry" < ''lañši'' (arch.) braid, wedding), and also for weather phenomena<ref>Rain, specifically, is more commonly used as the subject of the verb ''buñjñake'', meaning "to run" for water (in Chl. rain runs just like a river does).</ref> (''dašajilde'' "to rain" < ''daša'' "rain").
* ''jilde'' (to act) is used for subjects "emitting" or "giving off" something (cf. ''lāhajilde'' "to judge" < ''lāham'' "judgement"), also for subjects possessing (''dhokajilde'' "to mean" < ''dhokam'' "meaning") or undergoing something (''lañšijilde'' "to marry" < ''lañši'' (arch.) braid, wedding), and also for weather phenomena<ref>Rain, specifically, is more commonly used as the subject of the verb ''buñjñake'', meaning "to run" for water (in Chl. rain runs just like a river does).</ref> (''dašajilde'' "to rain" < ''daša'' "rain").
* ''gyake'' (to be) is used, like in one meaning of ''dṛke'', for moving or acting like the nominal root. Typically, it is more for states than actions (the prototypical and most common example is ''pṛšcāṃgyake'' "to be pleasing" < ''pṛšcām'' "something pleasing"<ref>The word ''pṛšcām'' alone is almost never used in contemporary Chlouvānem.</ref>).
* ''gyake'' (to be) is used, like in one meaning of ''dṛke'', for moving or acting like the nominal root. Typically, it is more for states than actions (the prototypical and most common example is ''pṛšcāṃgyake'' "to be pleasing" < ''pṛšcām'' "something pleasing"<ref>The word ''pṛšcām'' alone is almost never used in contemporary Chlouvānem.</ref>).
* ''jānake'' (to feel) has a meaning partially overlapping with ''gyake'' (and ''dṛke''), particularly marking the "feeling" of a (usually uncontrollable) condition (''jålkhajānake'' "to be cold" < ''jålkha'' "cold").
* ''jānake'' (to feel) has a meaning partially overlapping with ''jalle'' (and ''dṛke''), particularly marking the "feeling" of a (usually uncontrollable) condition (''jålkhajānake'' "to be cold" < ''jålkha'' "cold").
* ''milke'' (to take) has a varied range of meaning: getting or gathering something (''vīrādhmilke'' "to adopt" < ''vīrādhen'' "orphan";  ''mailьlut(a)milke'' "to take advantage" < ''mailьluta'' "advantage"), also the opposite, taking something away (cf. ''rantamilke'' "to peel (fruits)" < ''rantas'' "peel"), and also overlapping partially with ''kitte'' and ''męlike'' in marking the addition of something or, more, properly, the act of bringing something (''prātamilke'' "to get windy; (''figur.'') to accelerate" < ''prātas'' "wind" - cf. ''prātajilde'' "to be windy").
* ''milke'' (to take) has a varied range of meaning: getting or gathering something (''vīrādhmilke'' "to adopt" < ''vīrādhen'' "orphan";  ''mailьlut(a)milke'' "to take advantage" < ''mailьluta'' "advantage"), also the opposite, taking something away (cf. ''rantamilke'' "to peel (fruits)" < ''rantas'' "peel"), and also overlapping partially with ''kitte'' and ''męlike'' in marking the addition of something or, more, properly, the act of bringing something (''prātamilke'' "to get windy; (''figur.'') to accelerate" < ''prātas'' "wind" - cf. ''prātajilde'' "to be windy").
* ''bismilke'' (to take away) and ''bīdṛke'' (to destroy) are used, more commonly than ''milke'', for the meaning of removing or taking something away: (''ssūbismilke'' "to calm down" < ''ssūgis'' "something that worries"; ''lilembīdṛke'' "(''euphem.'') to kill" < ''liloe'' "life").
* ''bismilke'' (to take away) and ''bīdṛke'' (to destroy) are used, more commonly than ''milke'', for the meaning of removing or taking something away: (''ssūbismilke'' "to calm down" < ''ssūgis'' "something that worries"; ''lilembīdṛke'' "(''euphem.'') to kill" < ''liloe'' "life").
Line 2,354: Line 1,852:
* ''ān- 〜 yana-'' - on, above
* ''ān- 〜 yana-'' - on, above
* ''šu- 〜 šer-'' - under, below
* ''šu- 〜 šer-'' - under, below
* ''khl- 〜 kel-'' - between
* ''ṭvā- 〜 ṭus-'' - between
* ''gin- 〜 ją-'' - among
* ''gin- 〜 ją-'' - among
* ''nī- 〜 ani-'' - within/from within inside
* ''nī- 〜 ani-'' - within/from within inside
Line 2,360: Line 1,858:
* ''bis- 〜 bara-'' - far, away
* ''bis- 〜 bara-'' - far, away
* ''tad-'' <small>(''tata-'' before '''l''')</small> ''〜 tasi-'' - attached to; against
* ''tad-'' <small>(''tata-'' before '''l''')</small> ''〜 tasi-'' - attached to; against
* ''įs- 〜 hos-'' - hanging
* ''įs- 〜 įṣu-'' - hanging
* ''na(ñ)- 〜 neni-'' - inside
* ''na(ñ)- 〜 nani-'' - inside
* ''kau- 〜 kuvi-'' - outside
* ''kau- 〜 kuvi-'' - outside
* ''viṣ- 〜 vyeṣa-'' - opposite; somewhere else
* ''viṣ- 〜 vyeṣa-'' - opposite; somewhere else
* ''kami- 〜 kįla-'' - around
* ''kami- 〜 kara-'' - around
* ''pri- 〜 paro-'' - behind
* ''pri- 〜 prā-'' - behind
* ''mai- 〜 mīram-'' - in front of
* ''mai- 〜 mīram-'' - in front of
* ''vai- 〜 vǣ-'' - in a corner; bordering; at the limit
* ''vai- 〜 vǣ-'' - in a corner; bordering; at the limit
Line 2,404: Line 1,902:


Used in politics and/or the arts:
Used in politics and/or the arts:
* '''-nædani''' has two main meanings: ''-ism'' (as in a doctrine) in a political sense, and ''-esque'' in the arts, cf. ''yaivcārṇædani'' "communism" (< ''yaiva'' "all", ''cār-'' "to have"), or ''lanæmyainædani'' "in the style of writer Naryejūramāvi Lanæmyai ''Mæmihomah''".
* '''-nātra''' has two main meanings: ''-ism'' (as in a doctrine) in a political sense, and ''-esque'' in the arts, cf. ''yaivcārṇātra'' "communism" (< ''yaiva'' "all", ''cār-'' "to have"), or ''lānūṣurṇātra'' "in the style of writer Naryejūramāvi Lānūṣurah ''Mæmihomah''".
** '''-nædǣnah''' is the term for a person that follows such a doctrine or style, cf. ''yaivcārṇædǣnah'' "communist"; ''lanæmyainædǣnah'' "someone whose writing is Lanæmyaiësque".
** '''-nātryūs''' (← ''-nātra-yūs'') is the term for a person that follows such a doctrine or style, cf. ''yaivcārṇātryūs'' "communist"; ''lānūṣurṇātryūs'' "someone whose writing is Lānūṣuraësque".
** Note that ''lija'' and ''lejīn'' (lit. "song" and "singer") were formerly alternatives to these. They notably remain in ''nāɂahilūṃlija'' "politico-religious doctrine inspired by Great Inquisitor Kælahīmāvi Nāɂahilūma ''Martayinām''; Yunyalīlti religious extremism" and ''nāɂahilūṃlejīn'', as well as in ''arāmilija'' "pacifism".
** Note that ''lija'' and ''lejīn'' (lit. "song" and "singer") were formerly alternatives to these. They notably remain in ''nāɂahilūṃlija'' "politico-religious doctrine inspired by Great Inquisitor Kælahīmāvi Nāɂahilūma ''Martayinām''; Yunyalīlti religious extremism" and ''nāɂahilūṃlejīn'', as well as in ''arāmilija'' "pacifism".


Line 2,411: Line 1,909:
* '''-gulas''' usually translates "-philia" or "-mania", particularly in medical contexts, e.g. ''ryukagulas'' "masochism" from ''ryuka'' "pain".
* '''-gulas''' usually translates "-philia" or "-mania", particularly in medical contexts, e.g. ''ryukagulas'' "masochism" from ''ryuka'' "pain".
** '''-gulašålyē''' is the related term for someone who has that (thus "-philiac" or "-maniac"), e.g. ''ryukagulašålyē'' "masochist".
** '''-gulašålyē''' is the related term for someone who has that (thus "-philiac" or "-maniac"), e.g. ''ryukagulašålyē'' "masochist".
* '''-ræṣka''' is a generic term used in medicine for names of illnesses or conditions affecting health, e.g. ''nalekiræṣka'' "obesity" from Lällshag ''naleki'' "fat"; ''vrayegårlæṣka'' "dysphagia" (note dissimilation of -rr-) from ''vre-'' (bad) and ''egåram'' (stomach).
* '''-rauga''' is a generic term used in medicine for names of illnesses or conditions affecting health, e.g. ''gåtnirauga'' "obesity" from ''gåtnake'' "to vomit"; ''skañcrauga'' "insomnia" from ''skañcake'' (to be awake at night).
** '''-ræṣkanis''' is the term for someone affected by a ''-ræṣka'', e.g. ''nalekiræṣkanis'' "obese", ''vrayegårlæṣkanis'' "dysphagic".
** '''-raugotis''' is the term for someone affected by a ''-rauga'', e.g. ''skañcraugotis'' "insomniac".
* '''-ītsun''' is a rarer alternative to ''-ræṣka'', e.g. ''vrayobulītsun'' "asplenia" (''vre-'' (bad) + ''obula'' (spleen)), or ''lagukītsun'' "paralysis" (the latter with the root of Lällshag ''gahoke'' (still)).
* '''-ītsun''' is a rarer alternative to ''-ræṣka'', e.g. ''vrayobulītsun'' "asplenia" (''vre-'' (bad) + ''obula'' (spleen)), or ''lagukītsun'' "paralysis" (the latter with the root of Lällshag ''gahoke'' (still)).
** '''-ītsunis''' is the corresponding term for affected organisms, e.g. ''vrayobulītsunis'' "aspleniac", ''lagukītsunis'' "paralyzed".
** '''-ītsunis''' is the corresponding term for affected organisms, e.g. ''vrayobulītsunis'' "aspleniac", ''lagukītsunis'' "paralyzed".
* '''-yūtan''' is used for inflammatory diseases, cf. "-itis", like ''ṇīṭyūtan'' (dermatitis) or ''āḍhyāsnūliyūtan'' (meningitis).
* '''-måkṣan''' is used for inflammatory diseases, cf. "-itis", like ''ṇīṭmåkṣan'' (dermatitis) or ''āḍhyāsnūlimåkṣan'' (meningitis).


===Compounding===
====Compounding====
* '''tarlā''' (knowledge) is used as the head element of compounds, with a meaning like ''-logy'' in English. Sometimes the meaning is only abstracted (see second example) or has changed with time (see third example):
* '''tarlā''' (knowledge) is used as the head element of compounds, with a meaning like ''-logy'' in English. Sometimes the meaning is only abstracted (see second example) or has changed with time (see third example):
** ''bhælā'' (land) → ''bhælātarlā'' (geography)
** ''babhrām'' (land) → ''babhrātarlā'' (geography)
** ''smoḍ-'' (to count, to enumerate) → ''smoṇḍarlā'' (mathematics)
** ''smoḍ-'' (to count, to enumerate) → ''smoṇḍarlā'' (mathematics)
** ''ladragyalah'' (inn) → ''ladragyaltarlā'' (economics)
** ''ladragyalah'' (inn) → ''ladragyaltarlā'' (economics)

Latest revision as of 13:12, 2 September 2021

Chlouvānem is a highly inflected language with a synthetic morphology. Five parts of speech are traditionally distinguished: nouns, verbs, pronouns, numerals, and particles. Throughout the page there will be references to the topics treated in the pages on Chlouvānem syntax, positional and motion verbs, and exterior and interior verbs.


Nouns (halenī)

See Lahob languages § Morphology for diachronical tables and comparisons with sister languages.
See also Chlouvānem syntax § Noun phrase for discussion of case usage.

The Chlouvānem noun (haloe, pl. halenī) is highly inflected - it declines for:


  • Three numbers:
Singular (emibausire smoḍūm)
Dual (danyausire smoḍūm)
Plural (tailyausire smoḍūm)
  • Twelve cases:

Direct (daradhūkire dirūnnevya)
Vocative (halausire dirūnnevya)

Accusative (dṛṣokire dirūnnevya)
Ergative (darinūkire dirūnnevya)
Genitive (cārūkire dirūnnevya)

Translative (najamarcūkire dirūnnevya)

Exessive (nanijamarcūkire dirūnnevya)
Essive (jalausire dirūnnevya)
Dative (męlyausire dirūnnevya)
Ablative (tųlunūkire dirūnnevya)
Locative (yuñcūkire dirūnnevya)
Instrumental (drausire dirūnnevya)

There are a few nouns which lack number; a few are singularia tantum and lack a plural (e.g. hærūm lips), other ones are plural only - most notably these include all ethnicities (e.g. chlǣvānem, which is also an irregular plural). The singular is made by using the genitive form attributed to lila (person), e.g. chlǣvānumi lila (a Chlouvānem).

Chlouvānem does not have grammatical gender, and there are only a few natural gender terms. There are thirteen different noun declensions, but most of them only have few small differences. Chlouvānem declensions are predictable from the ending of the direct case noun, and they're categorized depending on their endings as s-, m-, or h-nouns[1]: inside these broad categories, different declensions are distinguished by the thematic vowel of the suffix: a, u, or i for s- and m-nouns, and a, e, u, i for h-nouns.

S-nouns - Sasą lā halenī

There are some traits which are common to all nominal declensions: the vocative is only distinct in the singular; in the dual there is also no distinction between translative and dative, essive and locative, and between exessive, ablative, and instrumental. In the plural, the exessive and ablative also share the same form, as do the essive plural and the ergative dual.

1-s (-as, -ās)
Case Singular Dual Plural
Direct prātas
"wind"
prātāt prāte
Vocative prātau
Accusative prātu prātāṣa prataih
Ergative prātei prātāya prātān
Genitive prāti prāteva prātumi
Translative prātan prātaus prātāmān
Exessive prātat prātābhan prātenīs
Essive prātą prātigin prātāya
Dative prātom prātaus prātasām
Ablative prātų prātābhan prātenīs
Locative prāte prātigin prātilīm
Instrumental prātap prātābhan prātenīka

2-s (-us, -ūs)
Case Singular Dual Plural
Direct haɂrus
"squid"
haɂrūt haɂraus
Vocative haɂru
Accusative haɂravu haɂrūṣa haɂravih
Ergative haɂrave haɂrūya haɂrūn
Genitive haɂravi haɂragva haɂrǣmi
Translative haɂrun haɂrugus haɂromān
Exessive haɂrut haɂrobhan haɂruṇīs1
Essive haɂrą haɂrugin haɂrūya
Dative haɂravom haɂrugus haɂrusām
Ablative haɂrų haɂrobhan haɂruṇīs1
Locative haɂrave haɂrugin haɂrulīm
Instrumental haɂrup haɂrobhan haɂruṇīka1

3-s (-is, -īs)
Case Singular Dual Plural
Direct ḍhogis
"monument"
ḍhogīt ḍhogais
Vocative ḍhogi
Accusative ḍhogayu ḍhogīṣa ḍhogaih
Ergative ḍhogaye ḍhogīya ḍhogīn
Genitive ḍhogayi ḍhogajña ḍhogyumi
Translative ḍhogin ḍhogigus ḍhogemān
Exessive ḍhogit ḍhogebhan ḍhogenīs
Essive ḍhogę ḍhogigin ḍhogīya
Dative ḍhogayom ḍhogigus ḍhogisām
Ablative ḍhogyų ḍhogebhan ḍhogenīs
Locative ḍhogaye ḍhogigin ḍhogilīm
Instrumental ḍhogip ḍhogebhan ḍhoginīka

Table notes:

  1. The ending is -unīs/-unīka; the n shift is a case of regular saṃdhi.

Also note that modern borrowings ending in [s] typically add a further case ending, e.g. Skyrdagor valtasz (nunatak) becomes Chlouvānem valtasas (same meaning), declining as valtasau, valtasu, valtasei...

M-nouns - Mamą lā halenī

1-m (-am, -ām)
Case Singular Dual Plural
Direct yujam
"lotus"
yujivā yujāk
Vocative yujā
Accusative yujamu yujmes yujmaih
Ergative yujmæ yujmyan yujamūn
Genitive yujami yujmeva yujaṃrān
Translative yujaman yujmį yujamān
Exessive yujamat yujabhan yujmenīs
Essive yujmą yujmenne yujmyan
Dative yujamom yujmį yujaṃsām
Ablative yujamų yujabhan yujmenīs
Locative yujaṃrye yujmenne yujmilīm
Instrumental yujamap yujabhan yujaṃrīka

2-m (-um, -ūm)
Case Singular Dual Plural
Direct tūlum
"worm"
tūlvivā tūlūk
Vocative tūlve
Accusative tūlumu tūlves tūluyih
Ergative tūluga tūlvyan tūlumūn
Genitive tūlumi tūlveva tūluṃrān
Translative tūluman tūlvį tūlumān
Exessive tūlumat tūlubhan tūlvenīs
Essive tūlų tūlunne tūlvyan
Dative tūlumom tūlvį tūluṃsām
Ablative tūlumų tūlubhan tūlvenīs
Locative tūluṃrye tūlunne tūlulīm
Instrumental tūlumap tūlubhan tūluṃrīka

3-m (-im, -īm)
Case Singular Dual Plural
Direct jāyim
"girl"
jāyīvā jāyīk
Vocative jāyī
Accusative jāyimu jājñes1 jāyīh
Ergative jājña1 jāyiyan jāyimūn
Genitive jāyimi jājñeva1 jāyiṃran
Translative jāyiman jāyį jāyimān
Exessive jāyimat jāyibhan jājñenīs1
Essive jāyį jāyinne jāyiyan
Dative jāyimom jāyį jāyiṃsam
Ablative jāyimų jāyibhan jājñenīs1
Locative jāyiṃrye jāyinne jāyilīm
Instrumental jāyimap jāyibhan jāyiṃrīka

{ Table notes:

  1. Such forms with -jñ- are underlyingly -y-y- (e.g. jāy-y-esjājñes).

H-nouns - Hahą lā halenī

1-h (-a, -ā, (-ah, -āh), -o1)
Case Singular Dual Plural
Direct māra
"mango"
mārāt mārai
Vocative māre
Accusative māru mārāṣa māraih
Ergative mārei mārāra mārān
Genitive māri2 māreva mārumi
Translative māran mārarį māremān
Exessive mārat mārabhan mārenīs
Essive māręs māranne mārāra
Dative mārom mārarį māresām
Ablative mārų mārabhan mārenīs
Locative māre māranne mārelīm
Instrumental mārap mārabhan mārenīka

2-h (-ē, -eh, -ǣh3)
Case Singular Dual Plural
Direct javileh
"apple"
javilyāt javilyai
Vocative javilei
Accusative javilyu javilēṣa javileih
Ergative javilei javilyāra javilyān
Genitive javili javileva4 javilyumi
Translative javilen javilerį javilemān
Exessive javilet javilebhan javilenīs
Essive javilęs javilenne javilyāra
Dative javilyom javilerį javilesām
Ablative javilyų javilebhan javilenīs
Locative javilye javilenne javilelīm
Instrumental javilep javilebhan javilenīka

3-h (-uh, -ūh, -u5)
Case Singular Dual Plural
Direct ñaɂuh
"fruit skin"
ñaɂūt ñaɂūvi
Vocative ñaɂū
Accusative ñaɂunu ñaɂūṣa ñaɂuyih
Ergative ñaɂuyei ñaɂura ñaɂun
Genitive ñaɂuyi ñaɂuva ñaɂūmi
Translative ñaɂun ñaɂurį ñaɂumān
Exessive ñaɂut ñaɂubhan ñaɂunīs
Essive ñaɂųs ñaɂunne ñaɂura
Dative ñaɂuvom ñaɂurį ñaɂusām
Ablative ñaɂuvų ñaɂubhan ñaɂunīs
Locative ñaɂuve ñaɂunne ñaɂulīm
Instrumental ñaɂup ñaɂubhan ñaɂunīka

4-m (-ih, -īh, -i6)
Case Singular Dual Plural
Direct ghārṭih
"arrow"
ghārṭīt ghārṭeyi
Vocative ghārṭī
Accusative ghārṭyu ghārṭīṣa ghārṭeyih
Ergative ghārṭyei ghārṭira ghārṭin
Genitive ghārṭīyi ghārṭiva ghārṭyumi
Translative ghārṭin ghārṭirį ghārṭimān
Exessive ghārṭit ghārṭibhan ghārṭinīs
Essive ghārṭįs ghārṭinne ghārṭira
Dative ghārṭyom ghārṭirį ghārṭisām
Ablative ghārṭyų ghārṭibhan ghārṭinīs
Locative ghārṭye ghārṭinne ghārṭilīm
Instrumental ghārṭip ghārṭibhan ghārṭinīka

1-h (h-paradigm)
Case Singular Dual Plural
Direct raiṇah
"(piece of) cloth"
raiṇāt raiṇai
Vocative raiṇe
Accusative raiṇu raiṇāṣa raiṇaih
Ergative raiṇei raiṇāra raiṇān
Genitive raiṇi2 raiṇeva raiṇumi
Translative raiṇan raiṇarį raiṇamān
Exessive raiṇat raiṇabhan raiṇenīs
Essive raiṇęs raiṇanne raiṇāra
Dative raiṇom raiṇarį raiṇasām
Ablative raiṇų raiṇabhan raiṇanīs
Locative raiṇe raiṇanne raiṇalīm
Instrumental raiṇap raiṇabhan raiṇanīka

The h-paradigm used by nouns in -ah and -āh is substantially identical to the regular 1-h one, except for the exessive, dative, ablative, locative, and instrumental plural which have -a- instead of -e- as a linking vowel and, for some nouns, the genitive singular (see table note 2).

Table notes:

  1. -o nouns are mostly toponyms of Toyubeshian origins; they decline like -a nouns, with their ending being treated as *-a-u, with the -a part of the stem; e.g. Paramito, locative Paramitai (underlying form Paramit-a-e).
  2. -ya, and -yā nouns form the genitive singular in -ei (e.g. lalyā "night" → lalei). Nouns in -yah, and -yāh, however, have the regular ending (e.g. yamyah "fog" → yamyi).
  3. All -ǣh nouns are of Lällshag origin, and are mostly toponyms (like Laikunanǣh), with some exceptions like the two lunar days kælyaunænǣh and yeicapænǣh. Note that such nouns have their genitive singular in -ǣyi and not in .
  4. In older texts -eiva (e.g. javileiva), today only used in literature for an archaïzing effect or to mark a character speaking with a Northern Plain pronunciation (where this form survives in the spoken language).
  5. Mostly regional Western words of Dabuke origin.
  6. Non-productive with borrowings, but common in native words.

Special declensions

Ablaut declension
Case Singular Dual Plural
Direct lila
"person"
lilāt lelyē
Vocative
Accusative lilu lilāṣa lelyu
Ergative lilei lilāra lelyei
Genitive leli lileva laili
Translative lilan lilarį lelyan
Exessive lilat lilabhan lelyat
Essive liląs lilanne lailąs
Dative lilom lilarį lelyom
Ablative lilų lilabhan lelyų
Locative lile lilanne laile
Instrumental lilap lilabhan lelyap

-oe declension
Case Singular Dual Plural
Direct haloe
"name"
halenāt halenī
Vocative
Accusative halenu halenāṣa halenaih
Ergative halenei halenāya halenān
Genitive haleni halemva haloemi
Translative halenan halenaus haloemān
Exessive halenat haloebhan haloenīs
Essive halen haloegin halenāya
Dative halenom halenaus haloesām
Ablative halenų haloebhan haloenīs
Locative halenye haloegin halenilīm
Instrumental halenap haloebhan haloenīka

-ai declension
Case Singular Dual Plural
Direct lunai
"tea"
lunaiva lunāye
Vocative
Accusative lunāyu lunāyes lunāyaih
Ergative lunǣ lunāyēn lunāyūn
Genitive lunāyi lunaiva lunāyān
Translative lunain lunāyį lunaimān
Exessive lunait lunaibhan lunǣnīs
Essive lunąis lunainne lunāyēn
Dative lunāyom lunāyį lunaisām
Ablative lunāyų lunaibhan lunǣnīs
Locative lunāye lunainne lunailīm
Instrumental lunaip lunaibhan lunainīka

The ablaut declension is in the singular (except for the vocative and essive) and dual the same as the 1-h one, including the -ei rule for the genitive singular (e.g. rinya "ceiling", gen.sg. renei), except for the fact that the genitive singular has a middle-grade vowel. The plural has mostly the same endings as the singular but with middle-grade vowels in most forms (genitive, essive, and locative have a higher-grade one). -y- is inserted between the stem and the ending, but not for nouns ending in -ya (rinyarenyē).
The vowel that undergoes ablaut is usually the penultimate (e.g. plušamila "Office of the Inquisition", plural plušamelyē), but in some cases it's the first (e.g. kimeda (a type of panther), plural kemedyē).

Hypocoristic forms of male names, which end in -em and are only used in the singular, are declined following a mix of the 1-m and 1-h patterns. In fact, they follow the 1-m pattern (the -am paradigm) except for the ergative (in -emei instead of *-(e)mæ) and the essive (in -ęs instead of *-(e)mą). For example the hypocoristicon Kælem has ergative Kælemei and essive Kælęs.

Singularia and pluralia tantum

Pluralia tantum in Chlouvānem include the following words or categories of words:

  1. many collective nouns:

    pārāk "hair", kāraṇḍhai "guts", yūgure "limbs", agṇyaucai "sons and daughters", vailašaus "cutlery", šūlyakāše "dishes"
  2. things that are heterogeneous in form but considered as a single entity:
    katanai "clutter", dūḍhvai "banquet, buffet", vārṇaigīk (a type of sandals made from straw rope), ḍheṃlatiryai "streaming"[2], ltælime "magic", ṣrūḍhais "savings", dāyārṣe "resin", ḍåtvāk "fat", tadmāltsāk "controller"
  3. certain actions and processes that involve multiple people:
    vāgdilanai "elections", viṣlonai "protest, riot", jāṃrice "traffic jam", grembātatālunai "hide-and-seek" (sometimes also found as dual)
  4. nouns denoting certain time spans, festivals, or holidays:
    saṃlallai "afternoon", Bhaivyāvāṣaryai (the most important Yunyalīlti festivity), Kūlħanarai (a winter festival of Kenengyry origin)
  5. a few illnesses and health conditions or disorders:
    nirganai "urticaria", nañvai "autism", paṣadårbhai "influenza"
  6. some locations, including large delimited areas as well as many toponyms:
    aryai "square", cahåtaibāk "tropics"
    Rīkalīnai, Mūnnakṣalte
  7. all ethnonyms:
    chlǣvānem "Chlouvānem", ṣurṭāgyai "Skyrdegan(s)", bronyai "Bronic(s)", sairghīṭyai "Cerian(s)", nivrahīrai "Nivarese"

A few nouns do not have a singular, but can have a dual and a plural form. Their citation form is usually the dual:

maihadhūt "parents", grembātatālunāt "hide-and-seek" (most commonly a plurale tantum)

Counted among pluralia tantums are certain words which are not defective in number, but whose plural forms have an additional meaning alongside the one of the singular form, like in the following examples:

hamvyenī "nursery" (hamvyoe "cradle"), įsmirte "playground" (įsmirtas "swing"), nacai "clothes" (naca "cloth"), garaṇai "clock, watch" (garaṇa "hour), lairusī "galaxy" (lairē "sky, air"), ilēneyi "universe" (ilēni "space, invisible sky").

Unlike ethnonyms, nouns formed with the suffix -yūs, generally identifying a person from a certain city (e.g. līlasuṃghāṇyūs, ajāɂilbādhyūs) – but note yacvānyūs "Westerner" – are not pluralia tantum and have regularly-formed plurals (in -yaus).

Some words are singularia tantum:

  1. many collective nouns:
    nūlastām "money", maula "breasts [pair of]", mæchlišam "leafy greens" (and particular types, e.g. mæcichā "spinach), bågras "legumes" (and particular types, e.g. dīlla "peas", mahīra "lentils"), lāsīm "cereals", båltis "free time"
  2. feelings and sensations:
    lācāh "romantic love", læchlyoe "fun", ǣlna "sadness"
  3. nouns denoting certain uncountable things:
    paɂeh "dust", kanai "spices", nāmvāvi "powder, dust made from crushing something", ḍolam "ice", narmis "ash"
  4. certain illnesses and health conditions:
    badarauga "blue plague", kloppa "cough" (cf. pluralizable kloppukāram "a single instance of coughing"), nadirṣas "runny nose"
  5. proper nouns referring to certain concepts:
    yunya, lillamurḍhyā, mulipenai "the Eastern Bloc's 'Internet'", tulbaiganim "the Eastern Bloc's 'Olympics'"
    individual sports, such as tēyakaitsūh, ḍaṣaras, lairhiṃħa, yalkhaitah
    cardinal points, pūrjayuñca "North", nalejñuñca "East"..., including relative ones such as smrāṇyuñca "upstream" or memājñuñca "downstream"
    musical genres, such as laneika, mūṃjas, kerachomā, tūnisus
    specialistic terminology made with suffixes and related to sciences (-tarlā, -nātra), diseases (-ræṣka, -yūtam, -ītsun, -gulas), and political/philosophical currents (-nātra, -lija)
  6. Most toponyms:
    Murkadhānāvi "the Inquisition", Kaiṣamā, Ṣurṭāgah "Skyrdagor", Sairghīṭa "Ceria", Kuyugvajitava "Kŭyŭgwažtov"

Irregular plurals

A few Chlouvānem nouns have irregular plurals:

  • The word chlǣvānem itself is plural-only (like all ethnonyms) and irregular; direct and vocative are in -em, but all other cases decline as a standard plural 1h noun (e.g. accusative chlǣvānānu, ergative chlǣvānān, genitive chlǣvānumi);
  • hulineh "woman" has the suppletive plural hulūne "women", which is declined as a regular 1s declension noun.
  • maila “water” does not have a dual form outside of colloquial use (where mailāt is used with the meaning of “two glasses of water”) and has the irregular plural mailusī, declined as the plural of an -oe noun, with -us- instead of -en- or -oe- throughout the declension (but note genitive mailūsmi and not mailusmi). This plural form is actually common, used when talking about bodies of water in an area, water layers, glasses of water, and a few minor idiomatic uses (e.g. taili mailusilīm hilælulke, lit. “to arrive by crossing many waters”, meaning “to have had much experience”).
    The -usī semantic plural is also used for the word damītah when used for "petals" (damītusī; the meaning of "nails" has the regular plural damītai), and lairē (lairusī, which does not mean "skies" or "days" but "galaxy").
  • Nouns with non-standard final endings (except chlǣvānem) are declined by unpacking the vowel through regular saṃdhi and applying the resulting declension to the newfound root, with regular saṃdhi. The most common such nouns are gos "ford, crossing of a small river" (ga-us; gen.sg. ge (ga-i), pl. gaus (ga-aus)) and khaim "goose" (khā-im; pl. khaik (khā-īk)).
  • švas "animal (including humans)" pluralizes as švai, as if it were a h-noun; all cases except for direct and vocative are however regular.

Irregular vocatives

Five very common words have common, irregular, vocative forms:

  • ñæltah "(male's) sister" — ñæli or ñæl
  • glūkam "(female's) brother" — galū
  • meinā "mother" — or
  • bunā "father" — or
  • udhyāras "Comrade" — udhyā (rarely udhyār)

Use of the plural

Chlouvānem sometimes uses the singular in contexts where English uses the plural:

  • Nouns are always singular after numerals (except, optionally, dani (two), which they can also be dual after), sora (some), grāṇa (any), gu (no), guviṣam (no other), taili (many, much), širē (more), kaili (most), and ṣubha (few, little).
    • After yaiva, the difference in the noun's number expresses a distinction much like the one between English "every" and "all": yaiva kita "every house", yaiva kitai "all houses".
  • When referring to existence or availability of something, that something is always singular, e.g. dvārma širēmįs virā "there are chairs in the room". It may be plural if topicalized, but the overall meaning of the sentence changes - e.g. širēmeyi mæn dvārma virā "the chairs are in the room".
  • When referring to a single person, dhāna (hand), mešīn (eye), and minnūlya (ear), and often also junai (foot) (more rarely for pājya (leg) and molnya (arm)) are typically singular and not dual - e.g. nanau mešīp mešute "I see it with my eyes" (lit. "with my eye"). In fact, they might be translated as "a person's hands/eyes/ears", given that dual forms are often used to mean e.g. "both hands of two people" and the plural ones for e.g. "many people's hands".
  • junyoe (indoor slippers), rapūda ((thick) shoes), mæska (boots), and all types of shoes are also used in the singular to refer to a pair of them. The main exception is varṇaigīk (straw rope sandals), which is a plurale tantum.

Duals and plurals of given names have the meaning of an associative plural, i.e. Kālomījñai "Kālomīyeh and people in/of her group".

Verbs (daradhaus)

Main article: Chlouvānem verbs

The Chlouvānem verb (daradhūs, pl. daradhaus) is the most inflected part of speech; its most basic forms are fusional, but many more specific formations are more agglutinative due to their origin from old Proto-Lahob particles or participles.

Pronouns (hailihalenī)

The system of personal pronouns of modern Standard Chlouvānem is quite complex due to the honorific system. In modern Chlouvānem, the category of "pronouns" isn't actually syntactically differentiated from other nouns (except for being used anaphorically), and only some of them - the inherited pronouns from Proto-Lahob and Archaic Chlouvānem - follow a declension different from the one of nouns.

The main reason for the complexity of the pronominal system is that there are many possible variants for each person, depending on the formality of the context, the two-way rank difference between speaker and listener, or the three-way rank difference between the speaker, the listener, and the addressee. Some particular forms are also chosen depending on gender.

The fact that there is no syntactical difference between the morphological pronouns and those that are nouns also means that every word used pronominally, including given names, requires that person's verbal concord, i.e. a given name used as a second-person pronoun will be used in concordance with a second-person verb. In the following list, words not marked as being inflected according to pronominal declension are inflected as nouns. However, yamei and lāma are honorific adpositions which do not decline; the title or given name used with them declines instead.

List of personal pronouns and pronoun-equivalents

First person singular (I, me)

  • lili (pronominal declension): the morphological inherited pronoun and the most neutral. It is overall the most used, especially in the non-direct cases, but there are alternatives for very informal, childish, slang, and humble speech.
  • emmā: the humble speech word for "person", sometimes used in humble speech.
  • demi (pronominal declension): literally "oneself", the reflexive pronoun; used in informal speech but conveying a sense of distance.
  • Given name: used in childish speech and in certain slang forms, considered rude or uneducated otherwise.
  • lilyā hulineh: literally "my woman", informal or semi-formal, implies superiority.
  • paralonį emmā: literally "the person [humble] who is a disciple" or "I, [your] disciple". Used almost exclusively in writing, by students or pupils when talking to their professors or teachers.
  • lilyā jāyim (in Archaic Chlouvānem only); literally "my girl", implying humbleness. Notably used by the Chlamiṣvatrā to refer to herself throughout the Holy Books.

Second person singular (You)

  • Given name plus lāma: the general polite form. lāma can be replaced by an appropriate title.
  • yamei + given name + lāma: similar to the above, but more polite, typically used for people of much higher rank or public officials.
  • yamei + title: very polite, alternative to the above two.
  • Appropriate honorific formula: the most polite usage, usually progressively reduced to (yamei) given name + lāma or yamei + title during the course of a conversation[3].
  • Given name + tanta: same politeness as lāma, used respectfully towards lower-ranked people, for example workers and colleague with less experience, soldiers of lower rank, employees, apprentices, and (from seventh class onwards) by teachers towards their students.
  • Given name alone: used in semi-formal speech between (equal ranked) colleagues and friends with a moderate degree of acquaintance. Can be or is rude otherwise. Note that it is considered especially rude to use the given name (or any other form of the personal name) towards older family members, or family members of the same generation who are not siblings (e.g. brothers/sisters-in-law, unless they're close friends).
  • Informal name: used in informal speech among friends, siblings (and possibly cousins[4]), partners, and all family members of a younger generation.
  • Kinship term alone: used for older family members or non-siblings (excluding cousins) of the same generation.
  • sāmi (pronominal declension): the morphological pronoun used in informal speech. Often replaced by the given name or by the hypocoristic form.
  • nami (pronominal declension): the morphological pronoun of formal speech towards higher ranked people. Often used (and even more often in non-core forms such as the genitive namyā), but it is also common to use the given name + lāma formula instead.
  • tami (pronominal declension): morphological pronoun of formal speech towards equal ranked people. Often used alternatively to the given name (with or without lāma), even in the same conversation.
  • rami (pronominal declension): morphological formal pronoun for lower ranked people; same usage pattern as tami.
  • udhyāras: translatable as "Comrade" and introduced during the Kaiṣamā era, it is a formal second-person pronoun used for people in situations transcending social rank. It is particularly used among political activists, volunteers in any organization, or in cooperative activities distinct from one's usual work. It is also the preferred option when one has no information about the addressed person, or as a general second person pronoun not referring to any particular person.
  • ṣari: quite old-fashioned (but still actively used by older people), used by guests towards homeowners (or innkeepers) and by soldiers towards their superiors.
  • ūttuka (mostly historical except for the Northeast): similar to ṣari but mostly used by servants towards their superiors or landowners; rapidly disappeared because of the Kaiṣamā era reforms except for the Northeast, where it was used in most contexts ṣari was elsewhere.
  • blikā; an endearing term for "girl", used by sisters among themselves.
  • lorkhās; male counterpart to blikā.
  • Informal name + cuca: endearing form used in informal speech by parents towards their children.
  • nūrya, literally "kid, child": used in formal instances by parents towards their children.

The following pronouns are mostly used for specific people, and only as reductions of other formulae:

  • aveṣyotariri nami: literally "You excellent one"; extremely formal locution for non-religious superiors several ranks ahead.
  • gopūrṭham: used for public/religious and military officials.
  • gopūrṭhami brausa: used for the highest ranked Inquisitors, bishops, head monks, and the Baptist.
  • yobrausa: same as gopūrṭhami brausa.
  • lalla yobrausa: used for the Great Inquisitor.

With second-person pronouns, the possessives used are in nearly every case those of the corresponding morphological pronouns; however, in very informal speech, it is not uncommon to use the genitive of the informal name or of pronoun-equivalents such as blikā or lorkhās.

Third person singular

Chlouvānem does not have any morphological third person pronoun; the demonstratives are used instead for non-human referents. For human referents, however, it is considered extremely rude to address them using a demonstratives. The choice of pronoun in the third person is especially complex because not just the relative rank of speaker and listener should be kept in mind, but also the rank of the addressee relative to both the speaker and the listener.

All titles listed in the section "Honorific titles" may be freely used with and without names. Furthermore, it is common in not excessively formal speech to use nāḍima (honorific word for "mother") for all female older relatives - of previous generations, not older siblings - of the interlocutor and similarly tamvāram (honorific for "father") for male older relatives.

udhyāras, equivalent to "Comrade", is in contemporary Chlouvānem the least controversial third person pronoun, at least the only one that is never considered rude to use. However, depending on the situation, other pronouns may be more appropriate.

Reference table

The following table is meant as a non-exhaustive reference for the most common ways used to refer to third person human referents in different situations, excluding titles:

If... Speaker is higher than Listener Speaker is equal to Listener Speaker is lower than Listener
3SG is higher than... both Speaker and Listener yamei (name) lāma
yamei (name) suntam/sintam
(yamei) (name) suntam/sintam(/lāma) yamei (name) suntam/sintam
Listener,
but lower than or equal to Speaker
udhyāras
yamei lātiṃṣin
(name) lāma
/ /
Speaker,
but lower than or equal to Listener
/ / yamei (name) lāma
3SG is equal to... Listener udhyāras
yamei (name) tanta
(name) lāma
/ yamei (name) suntam/sintam
both Speaker and Listener / udhyāras
lātiṃṣin
(name) lāma
yamei (name) tanta
/
Speaker udhyāras
lātiṃṣin
(name) lāma
/ yamei (name) lāma
udhyāras
lātiṃṣin
3SG is lower than... Listener udhyāras
(name) tanta
/ /
both Speaker and Listener / udhyāras
(name) tanta
/
Speaker / / (name) lāma
udhyāras

Dual pronouns

Plural pronouns

Other personal pronouns

Pronominal declension

The pronominal declension has two variants: one used for the first person pronouns and another for the 2nd person ones. First person pronouns are the most archaic: they have a single-phoneme stem in all cases bar the direct, and a different stem in the direct case (lili, derived from the original pronoun *li, in the singular, and suppletive amūt and amūvi in the dual and plural respectively).
The second person pronouns are a Pre-Chlouvānem innovation, from the original short stem attached to the demonstrative ami, and therefore they follow that word's declension. However, the original short stems are kept as alternative, shorter forms, for the accusative, ergative, and dative cases. Second-person plural pronouns exist, but are virtually unused outside of Archaic Chlouvānem.

All ergative singular forms in -ei have literary variants in -eis (cf. emeis, ergative of emibe "one").

Direct Accusative Ergative Genitive Translative Exessive Essive Dative Ablative Locative Instrumental
Singular 1st person lili lei lyai
lilyā
lan lat lįs lum ląu lēn lāni
2nd person Informal sāmi sāmyū
sāmī
sei
sāmī sāmīn sāmīt sāmįs sāmūm
som
sāmų sāmǣ sāmūni
Form. sup. nami namyū
namī
nei
namī namīn namīt namįs namūm
num
namų namǣ namūni
Form. equal tami tamyū
tamī
tei
tamī tamīn tamīt tamįs tamūm
tum
tamų tamǣ tamūni
Form. inf. rami ramyū
ramī
nei
ramī ramīn ramīt ramįs ramūm
rum
ramų ramǣ ramūṇi
Reflexive pronoun demi jei jai
demyā
jen jet jįs jum jąu jēn jāni
Dual 1st person amūt lūṣa lūra lūva lūh lūbhan lūnne lūh lūbhan lūnne lūbhan
2nd person Informal sāmīt sāmīṣa
seṣa
sāmīra
sera
sāmīva sāmirį sāmibhan sāminne sāmirį
seh
sāmibhan sāminne sāmibhan
Form. sup. namīt namīṣa
nīṣa
namīra
nira
namīva namirį namibhan naminne namirį
nih
namibhan naminne namibhan
Form. equal tamīt tamīṣa
tīṣa
tamīra
tira
tamīva tamirį tamibhan taminne tamirį
tih
tamibhan taminne tamibhan
Form. inf. ramīt ramīṣa
rīṣa
ramīra
rira
ramīva ramirį ramibhan raminne ramirį
rih
ramibhan raminne ramibhan
Plural 1st person amūvi laih lān lumi lemān lenīs lāra lisām lenīs lelīm lenīka

Honorific titles

→ See also: Chlouvānem names § Using names

Chlouvānem uses many honorific titles, which are always used in non-familiar speech. The "honorific" adjective yamei is often added to many of them - especially lāma - and is mandatory in other ones.

  • lāma - used after the noun, it is the most common honorific title; almost every time someone is being addressed, lāma is used - the only exceptions being when it is already known another honorific should be used, or in familiar situations. It usually follows the given name alone (e.g. Namihūlša lāma); if the matronymic is added (sometimes done in order to disambiguate), then lāma comes between matronymic and noun (e.g. Līṭhaljāyimāvi lāma Namihūlša). All three names matronymic, surname, and given name together with lāma (e.g. Līṭhaljāyimāvi Kaleñchokah Namihūlša lāma) are only used in very formal addressing from a list of nouns; should matronymic+noun be not enough to distinguish two people, simply surname+noun is used.
  • tanta - used for people in a lower position, e.g. used towards one's employees or (usually from seventh class onwards) by teachers and professors towards their students. Also used by militars towards lower-ranked soldiers.
  • suntam (regionally also sintam) - used for people in a higher position in certain situations, most commonly towards older and more experienced colleagues (but not teachers or professors, nor work bosses if they're roughly the same age as the speaker).
  • lallāmaha - an extremely formal honorific, used for public authorities and all Inquisitors. Most often used together with yamei. Inquisitors may also be referred to as lallāmaha + matronymic + yamei + given name + murkadhāna (lāma)
  • jūlin - less formal than lāma, used for people who work in one's home but are not part of the family.
  • tallam - less formal than lāma, used by men for unmarried women whom they know somewhat well. Currently less frequently used than it was up to about 10 years ago.
  • jāmilšīreh - used in military contexts towards higher-ranked people, or by common people towards military commanders in service.
  • udhyā(ras) - neutral but respectful title of address, often used when generally speaking and without knowing who the listener is. Sometimes used, when in a plural sense, in the form yamei dāvudhyāre. In its neutralness relative to rank, it can be compared with the Soviet-era use of товарищ. It is also how high-ranked Inquisitors and most monks address the general public.
    Note that udhyāras is the direct form, udhyā the irregular vocative.
  • pūrivāla - an impersonal term of address used in written language, towards unfamiliar people never met personally. Often used as yamei [name] pūrivāla.
  • cuca is not strictly an honorific, as it pertains to more colloquial forms of speech, but it works the same way. It has a diminutive and endearing meaning, not unlike Japanese -chan. In formal speech, it is often used towards and when speaking about children.
Occupations commonly used as titles
  • camitorai — head of a company (usually as [matronymic] yamei [name] camitorai lāma)
  • kauchlærīn (voc.: kauchlærī) — professor (in universities, seminaries, institutions, and work schools)
  • tatnāmęlīn (voc.: tatnāmęlī) — teacher (in first and basic schools)
Official titles

Where not noted, the formula is [matronymic] yamei [name] [title] lāma.

  • brausamailenya — Baptist — rendered as aveṣyotārire lallāmaha [matronymic] yamei [surname + given name] brausamailenia lāma.
  • camimurkadhāna — Great Inquisitor — rendered as širē aveṣyotārire lallāmaha [matronymic] yamei [surname + given name] camimurkadhāna lāma.
  • camitorai — president (of diocesan parliaments or executives or of foreign countries). Rendered as aveṣyotārire [matronymic (if Chlouvānem)] yamei [name] camitorai lāma.
  • plušamelīs (voc.: plušamelī) — Prefect (head of an Office (plušamila) of the Inquisition). Rendered as aveṣyotārire [matronymic] yamei [name] plušamelī(s) lāma.
  • gatvā — leader/head/president/mayor — preceded by the genitive of the respective administration (ṣramāṇa "province", lalka "circuit", hālgāra "district", marta "city"…).
  • hurdagīn — Head Monk (head of a monastery) — rendered as kaili brausire yamei [name] hurdagīn lāma (+ monastery name-GEN)[5]
  • rākṣaṇa — Bishop (head of a diocese) — rendered as aveṣyotārire [matronymic] yamei [(surname +) name] rākṣaṇa lāma (+ diocese name-GEN).
  • lallaplušamelīs (voc.: lallaplušamelī) — High Prefect (head of the Table of Offices (flušamaili eṇāh, the executive branch of the Inquisition). Usually rendered as taili aveṣyotārire [matronymic] yamei [name] lallaplušamelī(s) lāma.
  • lallamurkadhāna — High Inquisitor (one of the 612 members of the Inquisitorial Conclave (murkadhānumi lanedāmeh, the legislative branch of the Inquisition). Usually rendered as aveṣyotārire [matronymic] yamei [name] lallamurkadhāna lāma.
  • ñæltryam — monk.
  • nīrvakṣari (voc.: nīrvakṣarī) — Eparch (head of an Eparchy).

Note that the full titles are used generally at the first mention only. For example, Martayināvi yamei murkadhāna Læhimausa lāma becomes afterwards either yamei murkadhāna or yamei Læhimausa lāma. With the Great Inquisitor, this does not usually get shorter than širē aveṣyotārire yamei lallāmaha ([Her] Respectable Most Excellent Highness) or širē aveṣyotārire lallāmaha camimurkadhāna ([Her] Most Excellent Highness, the Great Inquisitor).

Correlatives

Chlouvānem has a fairly regular system of correlatives, distinguishing ten types (proximal, medial, distal, interrogative, negative, assertive existential, elective existential, universal, positive alternative, and negative alternative) in eleven categories (attributive, thing, person, time, place, destination, origin, way, reason, quality, quantity).

Category ↓ / Type → Proximal Medial Distal Interrogative Negative Ass. exist. Elect. exist. Universal Positive altern. Negative altern.
Attributive nenē
(and others; see below)
this (one)
nunū
(and others; see below)
that (one) (near you)
nanā
(and others; see below)
that (one) (over there)
yanū?
what?, which (one) ?
gu
no
sora
some
grāṇa
any
yaiva
every(thing)
viṣam
another, other
guviṣam
no other
Thing gomi
nothing
sorami
something
grāṇami
anything
viṣāmi
something else
guviṣāmi
nothing else
Person ·evita
this one
·utvita
that one (near you)
·ātvita
that one (over there)
yavita?
who?
guvita
no one
soraita
someone
grāmvita
anyone
yaivita
everyone
viṣvita
someone else
guviṣvita
no one else
Time emiya
now
utiya
then
ātiya
then (remote)
yamiya?
when?
gumiya
never
soramiya
sometime, somewhen
grāmiya
anytime, whenever
yaivmiya
always, everytime
viṣmiya
sometime else
guviṣmiya
never else
Place ·ejulā
here
·uñjulā
there
·āñjulā
over there
yajulā?
where?
gujulā
nowhere
sorajulā
somewhere
grāñjulā
anywhere
yavijulā
everywhere
viñjulā
elsewhere
guviñjulā
nowhere else
Destination ·ejulyom
hither
·uñjulyom
thither
·āñjulyom
thither (remote)
yajulyom?
whither?
gujulyom
nowhither
sorajulyom
somewhither
grāñjulyom
anywhither
yavijulyom
everywhither
viñjulyom
elsewhither
guviñjulyom
nowhither else
Source ·ejulų
hence
·uñjulų
thence
·āñjulų
thence (remote)
yajulų?
whence?
gujulų
nowhence
sorajulų
somewhence
grāñjulų
anywhence
yavijulų
everywhence
viñjulų
elsewhence
guviñjulų
nowhence else
Manner elīce
thus, hereby
ūlīce
thereby
ālīce
thereby; that other way
yalīce?
how?
gulīce
no way
soralīce
somehow
grāṃlīce
anyhow
yaivlīce
everyway
viṣlīce
otherwise
guviṣlīce
no other way
Reason emena
herefore
utmena
therefore
ātmena
therefore; for that other reason
yamenat?
why?
gumena
for no reason
soramena
somewhy
grāmena
whyever, for any reason
yaivmena
for every reason
viṣmena
for another reason
guviṣmena
for no other reason
Quality esmā
this kind
utsmā
that kind
ātsmā
that other kind
yasmāt?
which kind?
gusmā
no kind
sorasmā
some kind
grāṇismā
any kind
yavismā
every kind
viṣasmā
another kind
guviṣasmā
no other kind
Quantity enūḍa
this much
utnūḍa
that much
ātnūḍa
that much (remote)
yanūḍat?
how much?
gunūḍa
none
soraṇūḍa
some of it
grāṇūḍa
any much
yaivnūḍa
all of it
viṣṇūḍa
another quantity
guviṣṇūḍa
no other quantity

Note that in common speach ālīce and ūlīce as well as ātmena and utmena are basically interchangeable. The QUALITY correlatives may take an essive argument, e.g. lajlęs grāṇismā "any kind of chair".
THING and PERSON correlatives decline for case and, in the case of evita, utvita, and ātvita, also for number (1h declension: evita, acc. sg. evitu, dir. pl. evitai, dat. pl. evitesām…). QUALITY and QUANTITY correlatives also decline for case.

Not to be confused with their literal English translations are yaivemibe (or yaiva emibe) "each, every" (literally "everyone") - which is most often attributive only in Chlouvānem - and especially sora emibe, literally "someone", which has a completely different meaning: sora emibe denotes "some single subjects, considered as single entities, hence inherently plural and taking plural verbs: sora emibe draikate "some single subjects did it" ≠ soraita dṛkte "someone did it".

Negatives, elective existentials, universals, and positive alternatives for thing and person correlatives may also take dual number:

gomīt~guvitāt "neither";
grāṇamīt~grāmvitāt "either";
yaivāt~yaivitāt "both";
viṣāmāt~viṣvitāt "the other one".

Further correlatives not included in the above table:

yambā? (whose?)
smāmi (such a...) (archaic, literary)

Positional demonstratives

Chlouvānem has a large number of demonstratives, as they are integrated with the system of positional verbs, combining a general proximal-medial-distal distinction with positional prefixes, further localizing them in space. Only a subset of 10 out of the 24 positional prefixes are used to build demonstratives; the ones with a ∅- prefix correspond to most of the unused ones, and may be translated as "this/that one in front/ahead/in the middle" when a disambiguation from another one is needed. The same ten prefixes (except for įs-) are also used together with the PERSON series (with the same logic), and with the PLACE, DESTINATION, and SOURCE correlatives, which act as adverbial anaphoras of positional and motion verbs. This results in forms like kamyejulā "here, around" or māhāñjulyom "thither (remote), rightwards".

Prefix ↓ / Type → Proximal Medial Distal
∅- (ahead) nenē
this one ahead
nunū
that one (near you) ahead
nanā
that one ahead
ān- (above) āninē
this one above
ānnū
that one (near you) above
ānnā
that one above
šu- (below) šunē
this one below
šūnū
that one (near you) below
šonā
that one below
įs- (hanging) įsinē
this one hanging
įsunū
that one (near you) hanging
įsanā
that one hanging
na(ñ)- (inside) najinē
this one inside
najunū
that one (near you) inside
najanā
that one inside
kau- (outside) kaunē
this one outside
kaunū
that one (near you) outside
kaunā
that one outside
kami- (around) kaminē
this one around
kamyunū
that one (near you) around
kamyanā
that one around
pri- (behind) prinē
this one behind
prinū
that one (near you) behind
prinā
that one behind
vai- (beside; in the corner)
(sāṭ- for the main meaning)
vainē
this one beside
vayunū
that one (near you) beside
vayanā
that one beside
vyā- (left) vyāɂinē
this one to the left
vyāɂunū
that one (near you) to the left
vyāɂanā
that one to the left
māha- (right) māhenē
this one to the right
māhonū
that one (near you) to the right
māhānā
that one to the right

The įs- forms may also be used for things lying on people's hands.

The forms for the PERSON, PLACE, DESTINATION, and SOURCE series are mostly formed through regular saṃdhi (with the partial exception of the na(ñ)- and vyā- prefixes):

Prefix ↓ / Base → ·evita
·ejulā
·ejulyom
·ejulų
·utvita
·uñjulā
·uñjulyom
·uñjulų
·ātvita
·āñjulā
·āñjulyom
·āñjulų
∅- (ahead) evita utvita ātvita
ān- (above) ānevita ānutvita ānātvita
šu- (below) švevita šūtvita švātvita
na(ñ)- (inside) naivita notvita nātvita
kau- (outside) kāvevita kāvutvita kāvātvita
kami- (around) kamyevitai kamyutvitai kamyātvitai
pri- (behind) pryevita pryutvita pryātvita
vai- (beside, in the corner) vāyevita vāyutvita vāyātvita
vyā- (left) vyāɂevita vyāɂutvita vyāɂātvita
māha- (right) māhaivita māhotvita māhātvita

Note that, in the PERSON series, the kami- forms are only used with a plural meaning, as reflected in the table above.

Declensions of correlatives and possessives

Case ā-paradigm ē-paradigm ū-paradigm t-paradigm
All possessives, nanā and other distals,
yambā?, ami, correlatives in -i[6]
nenē and other proximals nunū, and other medials, yanū? yasmāt? and yanūḍat?
Direct
Vocative
lilyā nenē nunū yasmāt
Accusative lilyau nenyu nunūyu yasmau
Ergative lilye nenye nunūye yasmātei
Genitive lilyai neniai nunūyai yasmai
Translative lilyān nenēn nunūn yasmān
Exessive lilyāt nenēt nunūt yasmātat
Essive lilyą nenę nunų yasmātą
Dative lilyåh nenǣh nunǣh yasmātom
Ablative lilyąu nenēhu nunūvu yasmąu
Locative lilǣ neniǣ nunūvǣ yasmātǣ
Instrumental lileni nenēni nunauni yasmaini


Numerals (māltsāk)

Chlouvānem is one of the few human Calemerian languages - together with all other Lahob languages and a few ones of the southern hemisphere, as well as others like Qualdomelic or vernaculars of the Inquisition which have had considerable Chlouvānem influence - with a pure duodecimal number system.

Numbers (sg māltsām, pl. māltsāk) have six different forms: cardinal, ordinal, collective, distributive, adverbial/multiplicative, and fractionary. 1-4 have separate adverbial multiplicative forms, while all other ones have an invariable form used both as adverbial and 'adjectival' multiplicatives. Cardinals from 1 to Ɛ and their compounds decline for case (see below); collectives, multiplicatives, and fractionaries always decline, while ordinals are only declined if used without an accompanying noun. Distributives do not decline.

Digit12 Base 10 Cardinal Ordinal Collective Distributive Adv./Multiplicative Fractionary
0 0 ajrā (ajrāyende) (ajrehaicē) (māgajrā)
1 1 emibe
emi
lahīla emibhaicē māgemibe (adv.)
emibarvīm
lahīlvāṭ
2 2 dani hælinaika danyatām danihaicē māgdani (adv.)
danirvīm
hælinaivāṭ
3 3 pāmvi pāmvende pāmvyatām pāmvihaicē māmpāmvi (adv.)
pāmvirvīm
pāmvendvāṭ
4 4 nęlte nęltende nęltitām nęltehaicē māgnęlte (adv.)
nęltarvīm
nęltendvāṭ
5 5 šulka šulkende šulkatām šulkhaicē šulkarvīm šulkendvāṭ
6 6 tulūɂa tulūɂende tulūɂatām tulūɂihaicē tulūrvīm tulūɂendvāṭ
7 7 chīka chīcænde chīcætām chīcihaicē chīkarvīm chīcændvāṭ
8 8 mbula mbulende mbulatām mbulhaicē mbularvīm mbulendvāṭ
9 9 moja mojende mojatām mojihaicē mojarvīm mojendvāṭ
10 tålda tåldende tåldatām tåldihaicē tåldarvīm tåldendvāṭ
Ɛ 11 vælden vældinde vælditām vældihaicē vældirvīm vældindvāṭ
10 12 māmei māminde māmintām māmeihaicē māmairvīm māmindvāṭ
11 13 emibumaye emibumayinde emibumaintām emibumaihaicē emibumairvīm emibumayindvāṭ
12 14 danimaye danimayinde danimaintām danimaihaicē danimairvim danimayindvāṭ
13 15 pamihælī pamihælīnde pamihælītām pamihælīhaicē pamihælīrvīm pamihælīndvāṭ
14 16 māminęlte māminęltende māminęltitām māminęltehaicē māminęltarvīm māmiynęltendvāṭ
15 17 māmišulka māmišulkende māmišulkatām māmišulkhaicē māmišulkarvīm māmišulkendvāṭ
16 18 māmivælka māmivælkende māmivælkatām māmivælkihaicē māmivælkarvīm māmivælkendvāṭ
17 19 māmichīka māmichīcænde māmichīcætām māmichīcihaicē māmichīkarvīm māmichīcændvāṭ
18 20 māmimbula māmimbulende māmimbulyatām māmimbulhaicē māmimbularvīm māmimbulendvāṭ
19 21 māmimoja māmimojende māmimojatām māmimojihaicē māmimojarvīm māmimojendvāṭ
1ᘔ 22 māmitålda māmitåldende māmitåldatām māmitåldihaicē māmitåldarvīm māmitåldendvāṭ
23 māmivælden māmivældinde māmivælditām māmivældihaicē māmivældirvīm māmivældindvāṭ
20 24 hælmāmei hælmāminde hælmāmintām hælmāmeihaicē hælmāmairvīm hælmāmindvāṭ

As for the two forms for one, emi is used in disjunctive counting (e.g. count-ins or countdowns) while emibe is used elsewhere. Compounds always have the full form, i.e. forms such as *hælmāmyemi do not exist.
Some compound words, especially technical and scientific ones, use Lällshag morphemes for the quantities from 1 to ᘔ (though from 5 onwards they're rarer): mån- 1, yūn- 2, lyāš- 3, alan- 4, tamb- 5, jiruṇ- or ciruṇ- 6, tulyæn- 7, neim- 8, šid- 9, abar- ᘔ.

Numbers from 2012 above are simply made by compounding teens and units with the appropriate saṃdhi changes, like 2112 (2510) hælmāmyemibe, and then hælmāmidani, hælmāmipāmvi, and so on. Note that other compounds with 6 use -tulūɂa and not -vælka as in 1612.
The other dozens are:

30 (3610) pāmvimāmei
40 (4810) nęltemāmei
50 (6010) šulkmāmei
60 (7210) vælknihæla
70 (8410) māmyāvælka (regionally chīcæmāmei, particularly in the East)
80 (9610) mbulmāmei
90 (10810) mojemāmei
ᘔ0 (12010) tåldimāmei
Ɛ0 (13210) māmimīram
and 100 (14410) nihæla.

The apparent irregularities in the words for 6012, 7012, and Ɛ012 are explained by etymology: vælka is the reflex of PLB *wewənko, which meant “half”, thus vælknihæla is “half hundred” and māmyāvælka is “twelve on half”; māmimīram is literally “twelve [less] from ahead”. 1312 originally meant "one finger/three (pāmvi, the word for three, also meant "finger" in PLB (*pāmwəj) - whence also the Chlouvānem word for "finger", pamuvis (< PLB *pamwəjis)) in the second [dozen]", where the -hælī part is a worn form of hælinaika.

Numbers from 10012 to ƐƐƐ12 are still compounds, e.g. nihælaimibe, nihæladani, and so on. Note that 16012 is most commonly nihæltulūɂa, but the more literary form nihælvælka may still be heard.
The other dozenal hundreds are:

200 (28810) daninihæla
300 (43210) pāmvinihæla
400 (57610) nęltenihæla
500 (72010) šulknihæla
600 (86410) tulūnihæla
700 (100810) chīcænihæla
800 (115210) mbulnihæla
900 (129610) mojanihæla
ᘔ00 (144010) tåldanihæla
Ɛ00 (158410) vældenihæla.

1.000 (172810) is tildhā and numbers above are separate words, without saṃdhi, e.g. 1.001 tildhā emibe, 6.2ᘔ9 (1078510) tulūɂa tildhā daninihælatåldimāmimoja.
Note that 2.00012 may be either one of tildhāt, dani tildhā, or (only emphatically) dani tildhāt.

The other divisions - numbers over ƐƐ.ƐƐƐ12 are based on groups of two digits: the two most commonly used ones in common speech are 1.00.000 (248.83210) - a raicē - and 1.00.00.000 (35.831.80810) - a lallaraicē.

The next two groups have their separate words, but are quantities rarely used in common speech: 1.00.00.00.000 (129) (5.159.780.35210) is a taiskaucis and 1.00.00.00.00.000 (1211) (743.008.370.68810) a lallataiskaucis. The words khorādi (127, i.e. synonym of lallaraicē), yaṣmūn (1211, i.e. lallataiskaucis), iriakas (1213), mairāṇa or lalleriakas (1215), nirāvah (1217), and sṝva or lallanirāvah (1219) were introduced in Classical-era texts, but are almost never used today. However, they form the base for the scientific measurement system's prefixes.

Their non-cardinal forms are all regular, with -ende (-inde after -m or for Ɛ12) for ordinals, -tām for collectives, -haicē for distributives, -rvīm for adverbials/multiplicatives (prefixed māg- for the separate adverbial forms), and -endvāṭ/-indvāṭ for the fractionaries. Compounds of 1-2 retain all irregular suppletive forms, e.g. hælmāmilahīla 2112st (2510th); hælmāmihælinaika 2212nd (2610th).

Finally, there are few other cardinals commonly used in speech: vālhælya 1½, vālpāmvya 2½, vālnęlca 3½, vālšulca 4½, and vāltulūya 5½. The forms vālchīca, vālambulya (or vālumbulya), and vālmojya are used in telling the time only and obsolete otherwise, while other similar forms are sparingly attested in older mathematical texts, but periphrastical constructions such as tulūɂa hælinaivāṭ no (or, sometimes, - vælka no) are more commonly heard and used nowadays. A form that, however, is sometimes found up to the present day is vālhælnihæla, meaning 16012 (21610), i.e. one dozenal hundred and a half.

Use of fractionary numbers

Fractionary numbers (except vāl- ones) are used to express non-integers just like any other quantity. Simple ones such as 0,6 (½) are the basic fractionary number - in this case hælinaivāṭ (note that, outside mathematics, danyāmita is the preferred term for "half", both in metaphorical (lilyā viṣam danyāmita "my other half") and non-metaphorical uses (alāvi danyāmita "half of the bottle")); other examples are 0,3 (¼) nęltendvāṭ and 0,4 (⅓) pāmvendvāṭ.
With more complex fractions, the smallest part (negative power of twelve) is stated - the three commonly found are 1/12 (māmindvāṭ), 1/144 (nihælendvāṭ), and 1/1728 (tildhaindvāṭ). For example, 0,82 is mbulmāmidani nihælendvāṭ and 0,7ᘔ6 is chīcænihælamāmimīraṃtulūɂa tildhaindvāṭ; sometimes, "0, then" (mīram) may be added: ajrā mīram mbulmāmidani nihælendvāṭ.

With a non-fractionary portion that is not zero, instead of mīram, smurā (full, integer) is used - e.g. 2,307 is usually said as dani smurā pāmvinihælchīka tildhaindvāṭ.

Declensions of cardinal numbers

Some cardinal numbers are declined for case, but this is usually only done in formal Chlouvānem. In informal Chlouvānem, either only emibe is declined, or are all numerals up to vælden, plus nihæla. Compounds of these are usually not declined. The words tildhā, (lalla)raicē, and (lalla)taiskaucis are always declined, but they are fully nouns.

Case emibe Dual paradigm i-paradigm a-paradigm en-paradigm
dani pāmvi, nęlte[7] 5 to 10[8] vælden only
Direct
Vocative
emibe dani pāmvi šulka vælden
Accusative emiyu daneṣa pāmvyu šulku vældu
Ergative emeis daneya pāmvyes šulkes vældes
Genitive emibī dañva pāmvi[9] šulki vældi
Translative emiban danaus pāmvin šulkan vældanna
Exessive emibat danebhan pāmvit šulkat vældanta
Essive emibą danīgin pāmvyą šulką vældąs
Dative emibå danaus pāmvyå šulkå vældå
Ablative emiyų danebhan pāmvyų šulkų vældų
Locative emiye danīgin pāmvye šulke vælde
Instrumental emīp danebhan pāmvip šulkip vældampa

Use of numerals

Cardinal numerals may be used in two ways, depending on whether emphasis is given to the number or to the thing counted.

  • In the most common use, the counted thing is emphasized: the numeral is put before the noun and the noun is always singular (except for "two", see below) plus the appropriate case: e.g. emibe yujam (one lotus flower); dani māra (two mango fruits); pāmvi haloe (three names), vælden ñaiṭa (eleven stars), and so on.
  • If emphasis is given to the number, then the counted thing comes first, and, if it should be in direct, ergative, or accusative case, it is in genitive singular instead; the semantic direct, ergative, or accusative case is taken by the numeral itself if it is one, two, three, or compounds. Examples: yujami emibe (one lotus flower), māri dani (two mango fruits), haleni pāmvi (three names), ñaiṭi vælden (eleven stars). In other cases, the noun follows the semantic case (but is always singular anyway), e.g. marti pāmvi (three cities) but marte pāmvye (in the three cities).
    This form is increasingly less common in everyday use.
  • "Two" may be used with either singular or dual number: dani māra or māri dani are both as correct as dani mārāt and māreva dani - note that the dual number alone, without the numeral, has the same meaning; the dual form alone does not give particular emphasis to the number, while using the numeral, at least in formal styles, already gives more emphasis (intermediate to the two abovementioned forms). Outside of literary texts, it is however more common to specify "two" with the numeral.

Note, though, the structure "nihæle + genitive of a noun + a cardinal numeral", used for expressing percentage (dozenally), e.g. nihæle laili hælmāmei "20% of people".

Ordinal numerals are regular attributive adjective-like words that precede nouns - e.g. hælinaika kita "second house". They do not decline if are used together with a noun, but they can also be used alone (e.g. hælinaika "the second one"), in which case they decline for case and number, as if they were -eh nouns (-a for 1st and 2nd), e.g. mojendesām ukulate "it has been told to those in ninth position".

Collective numerals (which decline as regular -ām nouns) are most commonly found with the meaning of "a group consisting of X ...", therefore implying greater cohesiveness than using the cardinal number implies. A common example of the subtle meaning change is between the sentences chīka lalāruṇa togāhaite (with a cardinal) and chīcætām lalāruṇa togāhaite (with a collective): both mean "seven lalāruṇai hit", but in the latter sentence the action is implied to be a coordinate act of all seven animals, while in the former they either hit randomly or the coordination of the action is not specified (or not specification-worthy). This is also the most common meaning with pluralia tantum, as commonly heard with ethnonyms (which are all plural only in Chlouvānem), e.g. šulkatām chlǣvānem "[a group of] five Chlouvānem people".
They can also be found, context-dependent, used with the meaning of "all X of..." - in a sentence such as e.g. mbulatām lejīn dilu liju lilejlaikate "all eight singers wanted to sing the same song" - or with the meaning of "X sets of" with singularia tantum - e.g. pāmvyatām hærṣūs "three pairs of lips" (but note that colloquial Chlouvānem increasingly often uses the cardinals here, e.g. pāmvi hærṣūs).
The collective numerals for 0 and 1 (ajrāṇṭām and emibutām respectively) are not included in the table above because they do not exist in practical use; however, they are sporadically found in poetry and literature, referring to people and with the meaning of "a group where only one/no one is ...", e.g. ajrāṇṭām tadhusmausīn "a group where no one is honest". Similarly, collectives for vāl- numbers (e.g. vālpāmvyantām "a group consisting of 2½ ...") exist, but are virtually unused. danyatām, like dani, may be use together with either a singular or a dual noun.

In some cases, the choice between a collective and a cardinal is stylistic. While for example concepts such as "we are..." or "I have ... children" do normally use the collective (e.g. tulūɂatām ñæltah jalim "we are six sisters/a group of six reciprocal brothers and sisters"; lili mæn nęltitām nūrya "I have four children"), even if using a cardinal isn't wrong, in a sentence such as "there are X people" both versions are found, with the collective-using sentence (e.g. dvārma vælditāmą lilęs virā "in the room there are eleven people") being perceived as more formal than the more colloquially heard cardinal-using version (i.e. dvārma vældąs lilęs virā).

Distributive numerals are indeclinable adjective-like words, and have the meaning of "X each": pāmvihaicē titē męlyāhai "three pens each are given"; lili lilyā ñæltah no tulūɂihaicē karjhañī alau ulgutarate "my sister and I have bought six bottles of kvas each" — note in both sentences the use of singular number in titē (pencil) and alūs (acc. alau) "bottle", just like after cardinal and collective numerals.

Adverbial numerals are adverbs with the meaning of "X times" and multiplicative numbers are adjective-like words (that can also be used alone) with the meaning of "X times as large"; numbers from 1 to 4 have both forms, while all other ones (except 0) have only the multiplicative one, which is used for both meanings. Examples: pāmvirvīm yąloe "triple meal/a meal three times as large"; āsena māgdani "twice a month"; āsena mbularvīm "eight times a month".
Zero only has an adverbial form (māgajrā), which is however only used in reading multiplications and powers, e.g. 3 * 0 māgajrā pāmvi, 90 māgajrā demǣ moja.

Fractionary numerals are always used in the noun.GEN numeral construction, and they are invariable in direct, vocative, accusative, and ergative case but decline with -vaḍa in all of the others (in fact, etymologically they derive from worn down forms of ordinal + vaḍa, meaning Xth part, e.g. hælinaika vaḍa (the second part) → hælinaivāṭ). Unlike ordinals, the noun is always in the genitive case. Examples: marti hælinaivāṭ "half of the city" ; alāvi nęltendvāṭ "one fourth of the bottle" ; babhrāmi tulūɂendvaḍe "in one sixth of the country".

Basic maths

  • 1 + 2 = 3
emibe širē dani pāmvyå lunade (1.DIR. more. 2.DIR. 3-DAT. go.MONODIR-IND.PRES-3DU.EXTERIOR-AGENTIVE) — rule: ADIR širē BDIR (širē ...) CDAT lunade (two addends) / lunāhai (3+ addends)
  • 3 - 2 = 1
pāmvi isan dani emibå lunade (3.DIR. minus. 2.DIR. 1-DAT go.MONODIR-IND.PRES-3DU.EXTERIOR-AGENTIVE) — rule: ADIR isan BDIR (isan ...) CDAT lunade (two addends) / lunāhai (3+ addends)
  • 3 * 2 = 6
māgdani pāmvi tulūɂå liven (2.ADV.MULTIP. 3.DIR. 6-DAT. go.MONODIR-IND.PRES-3SG.EXTERIOR-AGENTIVE) — rule: MULTIPLICATIVE.(ADV)-B ADIR CDAT liven
  • 6 : 2 = 3
hælinaivadęs tulūɂa pāmvyå liven (2.FRACTION-ESS. 6.DIR 3-DAT. go.MONODIR-IND.PRES-3SG.EXTERIOR-AGENTIVE) — rule: FRACTIONARY-BESS ADIR CDAT liven
  • 62 = 30 (3610)
māgdani demǣ tulūɂa pāmvimāmei liven (2.ADV.MULTIP. REFL.GEN-LOC. 6.DIR. 3012. go.MONODIR-IND.PRES-3SG.EXTERIOR-AGENTIVE) — rule: MULTIPLICATIVE.(ADV)-B demǣ ADIR CDAT liven

Reified numerals

Reified numerals, or numerals used as nouns, have a special form, which is actually the numeral with the common noun-forming suffix -as added (with regular saṃdhi). These numerals are used most notably for:

  • In order to refer to the digits themselves (danyas "the digit 2");
  • Things named with numbers (tulūɂās "[tram/bus/etc] number 6");
  • (in the plural) Year dozens (vælknihælē "the 6012s = the 386012s);
  • (in the plural) Age ranges by the dozen (hælmāmeyē "2012ies" = the age range from the start of one's 2012th year to the end of one's 2Ɛth);
  • School marks - note that there's no uniform system in the Inquisition (nęltayas "a grade 4" (passing grade in the most widespread system for non-higher education in the Inquisition, ranging from 1 (emibayas), worst, to 7 (chīkās), best));
  • A group of X people - a reification of collective numerals (pāmvyas "a trio").

Note that there are some terms which use numerals as roots but aren't considered reified numbers (also because of their rather inconsistent meanings); the most common examples include danyāmita (half) and māmyāmita (dozen).

Units of Measurement

Chlouvānem units of measurement (lęlgīs, pl. lęlgais) are divided in popular units (leilausirena lęlgais) and scientific units (tarlausirena lęlgais). Scientific units, while understood, are rarely found outside of scientific contexts if corresponding popular units exist, while popular units are found in daily usage. Popular units follow however a measurement standard introduced in the year 36Ɛ7 (618710) and updated several times in the following two centuries, in order to give a single understood measure for all units whose names and definitions varied across the many countries of the Chlouvānem cultural space.
It is also to be noted that Calemerian scientific units have internationally unified definitions for their base units but are substantially different between the Western and the Eastern world as Western countries use them with a decimal system, while the Eastern countries (the Inquisition, most of the former Kaiṣamā, and Greater Skyrdagor) use them with a duodecimal system.

Length

The tyuta, nakūrum, and garaṇa are known but rarely used; the vālpāmvyās is rarely written as a separate measure, but isn't uncommon in speech.

Short Name Meaning/name origin Equivalent to Metric system (approx.)
lūj lūjla (ABL) Point, tip ⅛ tyu ~3.09639 mm
tyu tyuta Short (dialectal) ⅓ ka ~2.47711 cm
ka katis Finger ⅓ mā ~7.43133 cm
mākoba Span (base unit) 22.294 cm
pājya Leg 4 mā 89.176 cm
vāl vālpāmvyās
vālpāmvya pājya
Two and a half legs 2+½ pā 2.2294 m
nak nakūrum Rod 8 pā 7.13408 m
cān cāṃtrūh Section (A. Yodhvaši) 140 (19210) pā 171.21792 m
vai vaiṣrya Plough 8 cān
ᘔ80 (153610)
1369.7434 m — 1.36974 km
gar garaṇa Hour 34 (4010) cān 6848.72 m — 6.84872 km


Temperature

Temperature measuring in the Chlouvānem world uses the Jahārāṭha scale (shortened ºj; named after scientist Ṣastirāvi Jahārāṭha Nukthalin), which is fixed with a zero degree at water freezing temperature at sea level. 100 ºj is the rough boiling temperature of water, but, being a duodecimal scale, it is 10012 (14410), thus 1 ºj equals 25/36 of a degree Celsius, or 1 ºC = 1.44 ºj.
The median body temperature of a Calemerian human (which is slightly lower than for terrestrial humans) is of 41 ºj (4910), thus ~34.0278 ºC.

Time

See also: Chlouvānem Calendar and time § the Chlouvānem calendar

English Chlouvānem Equivalent to rough Earthly approximation
Year heirah 418 Calemerian days 609.6 Earth days
Day lairē 2812 (3210) hours ~35 hours
Hour garaṇa 3 hælmāmyai
6012 (7210) railai
~65 min ~37 sec
group of "minutes" hælmāmya 2012 (2410) railai ~21 min ~52 sec
"Minute" raila (base unit) ~54.6805 sec
"Second" namišoe 1/4012 (1/4810) raila ~1.8986 sec
1/12 of a "second" (namišeni) māmendvāṭ 1/1012 (1/1210) namišoe ~0.1582 sec
1/144 of a "second" (namišeni) nihælendvāṭ 1/10012 (1/14410) namišoe ~0.0131 sec
1/1728 of a "second" (namišeni) tildhaindvāṭ 1/100012 (1/172810) namišoe ~1.0987 ms

Other units

Chlouvānem Symbol rough Earthly approximation
frequency lūnaji lnj ~0.526704 Hz
voltage chulgān chg 1 V

Particles (remīk)

Traditional Chlouvānem grammar only recognizes a single part of speech called "particles" (remīn, literally "helper(s)") which includes conjunctions, postpositions, and interjections. However, these three are recognized as subsets of particles - here translated as "conjunctive particles" (natemālāhai remīn), "accompanying particles", i.e. postpositions (ūtimāhai remīn), and "exclamatory particles" (pigdilanah nali remīn).

Many Chlouvānem particles are grammaticalized usages of other words, some of them no longer being used in their original meaning in contemporary use (e.g. varve).

Conjunctive particles

Conjunctive particles may not stand syntactically alone and, with a few exceptions, don't require any particular case of a noun. Most of them function, or are also used, as conjunctions between sentences.

  • jahān — anyway (conjunction or second position adverb)
  • lai — inclusive or
  • las — and (in incomplete listings, cf. no and sama); it follows the noun it refers to, and in listings with more than two nouns it follows every noun except for the first. Not used to conjoin sentences.
  • lenta — "together (with)", adverbial or postpositive, requiring genitive case in the latter usage. When pospositive, it is more emphatic than . Adverbially, gimmālsiṭ is more common.
  • mailiven — so, thus, therefore (grammaticalized use of go_forward.UNIDIR.PRES.IND.EXP.3SG.PATIENT.EXTERIOR.)
  • mbu — exclusive or
  • mešē — given that (grammaticalized use of see.PRES.IND-EXP-3SG.PATIENT.EXTERIOR.)
  • najelai — maybe. Originally the archaic potential form of najalle (to happen). Sentence-final, requires a verb in the subjunctive mood, e.g. yahatite najelai "maybe I'll read it".
  • nānim — almost; if used with nouns, requires essive case.
  • ni — but (in second position)
  • no — and (in complete listings, cf. las); same placement as las. Also used to conjoin sentences, but sama is preferred, especially when there are different subjects (triggered arguments).
  • nyąu — because, for, as (cf. ); amyąu in the Classical era, i.e. the ablative of the former demonstrative ami.
Used sentence-finally: aganą lā įstyāk nyąu yųlake pañcekte "as (s)he was hungry, (s)he started eating." In lone sentences, e.g. answers, is preferred: aganą lā tī įstyāk "because (s)he was hungry."
  • paṣe — furthermore
  • — if (and pūmbu "whether") - see Chlouvānem syntax § Conditional sentences
  • sama (sam before vowels) — and (between sentences only, cf. las and no)
  • širē — also, too (only between sentences, cf. tan). A different use of the adverb meaning "more".
  • tadye — despite that (between sentences), cf. tatta.
  • tan — also, too; used adverbially and between sentences (where, however, širē is more common).
  • tatta — despite, even though; requires a noun in the essive case or a subjunctive verb (e.g. gu talunīs ša tatta dadrā "even though you didn't come, it has been done."). Colloquially, it is also used anaphorically, instead of tadye; however, it is considered bad style in formal language.
  • varve — instead of; requires genitive case or subjunctive mood. Originally the locative singular of varva "form", no longer used in contemporary Chlouvānem.
    • samvarve — on the other hand, whereas
  • vivāmi — "too much", adverbial or postpositive, requiring genitive case in the latter usage.
  • væse — while, in the meantime; "during (the)" with nouns. Requires a verb in the subjunctive mood or a noun in the essive (or, meaning-dependant, exessive or translative) case.

Accompanying particles (i.e. postpositions)

These particles can never stand alone, do not conjoin sentences, and nearly always require a particular noun case.

  • bīs — between; from ... until, in expressions of time. Comes after both nouns in essive case: šurājęs nyūramyęs bīs "between Šurājah and Nyūramyah".
  • bisikita — except for; requires subjunctive mood or essive case. Grammaticalized usage of put_aside-EXP-IND.PERF.3.PATIENT.EXTERIOR. (e.g. nītedarāhai lailąs bisikita nalunya upulsma "entrance is forbidden, except for involved people" → "authorized personnel only")
  • dam — interrogative particle in polar questions, put after the verb (e.g. daltah vi dam? "is it a fish?")
  • e — like. Requires essive case with nouns and subjunctive mood with verbs.
  • ga — adpositive particle, used to join nouns in noun phrases (usually titles or proper names, but not honorifics), e.g. Līlasuṃghāṇa ga marta "Līlasuṃghāṇa city" or Tāllahārya ga maita "Tāllahārya river".
    Mostly in poetry (for metrical reasons), or Archaic and Early Classical Chlouvānem prose (e.g. in the Lileṃsasarum, or many Yunyalīlti holy books), ga is used to conjoin attributive verbs to nouns, e.g. lei imiša ga švas "the animal seen by me". Already in parts of the Lileṃsasarum the decading usage of the particle in this sense is to be noted, as often it is only used to conjoin exterior verbs to nouns, but not interior ones.
  • gu(n) ~ ša — negative circumposition used around verbs, e.g. gu yuyųlsegde ša "(s)he does not want to eat". The first element is gun before vowels; the ša element is omitted if the verb is attributive.
  • — with (comitative); requires essive case (e.g. lilyą ñæltęs lā "with my sister"). The Archaic Chlouvānem form was lapi.
  • lut — used with expressions of time: means "ago" if used with ablative case (nęlcų heirų lut "four years ago"), "for/since" if with essive case (nęlcą heiręs lut "for four years").
  • mei and go — "yes" and "no", used according to the polarity of the question; i.e. mei denotes the statement is true ("yes" to affirmative questions, "no" to negative questions), while go denotes the statement is false ("no" to affirmative questions, "yes" to negative questions).
  • mænmarks a topic which otherwise has no role in the sentence.
  • nali — benefactive marker, used with a noun in direct case; marks the benefited argument when the verb is not in benefactive-trigger voice. If used with a subjunctive verb, means "in order to", with a nuance of hope (the bare subjunctive already carries the "in order to" meaning).
  • nin — after, with ablative or subjunctive (nęlcų heirų nin "after four years")
  • pa — on, of, concerning, on the subject of, about. Requires a direct case noun (e.g. vāṇatarlā pa naviṣya "book about botany") or a subjunctive mood verb (e.g. šūñjulā drētte pa nīdhāḍirdya "the two of us are talking about what (s)he did down there").
  • ras — antibenefactive marker, used with a noun in direct case; marks the anti-benefited argument when the verb is not in antibenefactive-trigger voice. If used with a subjunctive verb, means "to avoid X".
  • sām — different meanings depending on case:
ablative, in expressions of time: "in ... time" (at the end of a certain period), or "by": nęlcų heirų sām "in four years' time, four years for now"; šurājų sām "by Šurājah";
translative (rarely essive), in expressions of time: "in/for/until" (within, during a certain period): nęltin heiran sām "for the coming four years" (or nęlcą heiręs sām); ājvan sām "until dawn";
dative case, with places: "until, as far as": līlasuṃghāṇa ṣrāvamaila ga keikom sām "as far as Līlasuṃghāṇa Ṣrāvamaila Station")
subjunctive verb: "until": primęlirī sām "until he/she/it comes back".
  • šut — before, with ablative or subjunctive (nęlcų heirų šut "four years before").
  • vādį — without, with essive or subjunctive. Unlike English, it cannot be used anaphorically.

Correlative particles

Chlouvānem does not have correlative conjunctions as English does, because they are translated in different ways:

  • English "both... and..." is most commonly translated as X Y no tan ("X, and also Y"), e.g. jādāh lañekaica no tan nanau draikate "both Jādāh and Lañekaica did that".
    Alternatively, the forms X Y no peiṃsiṭ ("X, and the same for Y") or X ..., Y peiṃsiṭ ("X ..., and Y the same") are also widespread, e.g. jādāh lañekaica no peiṃsiṭ nanau draikate; nāneh lei uyųla, māra peiṃsiṭ "I have eaten both the bread and the mango".
  • English "neither... nor..." is translated by the same structures as "both... and...", but negative. In the most common usage, tan is omitted:
    jādāh lañekaica no (tan) nanau gu draikate ša "neither Jādāh nor Lañekaica did that"; nāneh lei gun uyųla ša, māra peiṃsiṭ "I have eaten neither the bread nor the mango".
  • "either... or..." is easily translated by the exclusive or (mbu). It is commonly only used after the second term, but it can be put after every term for emphasis:
    jādāh (mbu) lañekaica mbu nanau dṛkte – either Jādah or Lañekaica did it. (note the singular verb)

Emphatic particles

A few particles are used (usually sentence-finally) in order to convey particular feelings of the speaker about the statement:

  • anā is an introductory particle (e.g. "so")
  • å expresses either surprise (at the beginning of a sentence) or that the fact is considered annoying (at the end), e.g. å vikṣiṭ dadrāte "wow, (s)he's done it again!" / vikṣiṭ dadrā å "oh no, (s)he's done it again!"
  • gives the sentence, especially a command or a proposition, an informal tone - cf. German "mal" or Italian "un po'", e.g. najire nanau mešute dā "I'll just see what happens"; peithos dā "just calm down and take a walk around here."
  • e is a basic declarative particle when used word-finally, and is often used as an introduction (much like "you know, ...") or as a generic filler.
  • eri means "even", marking a positive emphasis (e.g. hūnakumi dhāḍan eri dhāḍire "(s)he even speaks Hūnakumi[10]")
  • gāri means "not even", being the opposite of eri, marking a negative emphasis (e.g. hulābdān chlǣvānumi dhāḍan gāri dhāḍire "(s)he doesn't even speak correct Chlouvānem")
  • , a generic filler (cf. "I mean"), often combined with e. e.g. nā (e) nenēt nāṭ tarliru! "I mean, I already know this!"
  • nane is a tag question, e.g. camiyūs vi dam nane? "you're from Cami, aren't you?"
  • nimā is an introductory particle, same as anā.
  • naihā is a tag question much like nane, but is used when the speaker is in doubt and/or expects a contradictory answer, e.g. lære draute dam naihā? "did I do it yesterday, or...?"
  • pos is a filler with a meaning similar to tau, but it is more properly translated as emphasizing that the speaker considers the statement as a general truth or a widely accepted thing, e.g. ālīce jeldegde pos "yeah, everybody knows (s)he acts that way/does that kind of things."
  • sāṭ expresses the speaker's doubt about the honesty of the expressed action, e.g. tamye tamyu draukæ sāṭ "(s)he did it for me, but I don't believe that's what (s)he really wanted" or "as if (s)he really did it for me!"
  • tau emphasizes that the fact expressed is considered obvious, and is fairly colloquial, e.g. lārvājuṣe ēk tau "huh, I was at the temple, nothing else"; kitui vasau tau "I drove home [what else could I do?]"
  • tva puts strong emphasis on a declarative sentence; it is fairly colloquial and not polite, and thus avoided in formal speech, e.g. nenēyu daudyute tati ukulaṃte tva! "damn, I said I want that, shut up!"

Derivational morphology (vāmbeithausire maivāndarāmita)

Chlouvānem has an extensive system of derivational morphology, with many possibilities of deriving words from verbal roots and even from other nouns.

Compounds

Chlouvānem, like Sanskrit, has four main types of compound words (tadmaiva, pl. tadmaivai), called in Chlouvānem grammar emibądanīs (dvandva), ṭvādaradhausire tadmaiva (avyayībhāva), nīdhvakādhūs (tatpuruṣa), and kaudhvakādhūs (bahuvrīhi).

Dvandva (emibądanīs)

The first type of compounds is emibądanīs type (also called no ga tadmaiva), corresponding to dvandva compounds. In emibądanais, all words in the compound are taken with the concrete idea they represent. As hinted to by the alternative name, these compounds effectively substitute an "X Y no" (X and Y), compressing it into a single word.

tēneh ukyā no "a branch and a trunk" → tēnayukyāt "branch and trunk"

Dvandva compounds are formed by removing the direct case -s or -h marker from the word, lengthening all resulting final vowels (i.e. for all words not ending in -oe, -ai, -m, or -n), and joining with saṃdhi the second word; the second word is then inflected in the dual (if the word semantically refers to two things) or in the plural (if it refers to three or more things - see the next example).

tēneh nūlyai no "a branch and leaves" → tēnēnūlyai "branch(es) and leaves"

Note that, if the dvandva is plural, there is no indication of how many elements of each component are present:

lalāruṇāt voltām no "two lalāruṇai (DU) and a sheep (SG)" → lalāruṇāvoltāk "lalāruṇai and sheep" (PL)
lalāruṇai voltām no "lalāruṇai (PL) and a sheep (SG)" → lalāruṇāvoltāk "lalāruṇai and sheep" (PL)
lalāruṇa voltāk no "a lalāruṇa (SG) and sheep (PL)" → lalāruṇāvoltāk "lalāruṇai and sheep" (PL)

The identification of how many individual lalāruṇai and sheep is lost in the compound, however, we know from the plural number that there must be at least three animals; otherwise, the dvandva would be dual:

lalāruṇa voltām no "a lalāruṇa (SG) and a sheep (SG)" → lalāruṇāvoltīvā "lalāruṇai and sheep" (DU)

Dvandva made of three or more elements can, obviously, only be plural:

lalāruṇa voltām no jorai no "a lalāruṇa, a sheep, and a goat" → lalāruṇāvoltāñjorāye "lalārunai, sheep, and goats"

In the most formal registers of Chlouvānem, it is not uncommon to find dvandva compounds made of several elements:

lācāh kraṣṭāmita no lillāmita no demigretas no lelyēmita no "love, fidelity, devotion, sacrifice, and family" → lācākraṣṭāmitālillāmitādemigretālelyēmitai "love, fidelity, devotion, sacrifice, and family"

Avyayībhāva (ṭvādaradhausire tadmaiva)

Avyayībhāva compounds, in Chlouvānem ṭvādaradhausirāhe tadmaivai ("adverbial compounds"), are not as productive as the other types and, in fact, except for a few words they're mostly limited to Archaic and Classical Chlouvānem; despite being based on the latter, modern Chlouvānem does not use them productively (but see nīpenai below).
These compounds generally have a first element which is a particle (or a verbal prefix), and the second element is a noun which is either left uninflected in the direct singular or, more commonly, in the two Archaic Chlouvānem adverbializing cases: the instrumental plural or the locative singular.

sam + jildas "after + act" → *sañjildas → sañjilde "consequently"
naš(e) + sṝva "full, complete + extent" → *nakṣṝva → nakṣṝve "as much as possible"
væse + vāyam "while + image, form" → væsvāyam or væsvāyaṃrīka "thus, therefore"
paṣ(e) + vāyam "beyond + image, form" → paṣvāyam "in addition, furthermore"
maibu + jallas "enough + condition" → *maibujallas → maibujalle "as needed"
+ penai "within + net" → nīpenai "online" (generally considered the only modern Chlouvānem avyayībhāva)

A particular kind of avyayībhāva is the -ṣati class, whose particularity derives from having a first element which is a declinable word (a possessive determiner); however, they're still adverbs and therefore uninflected:

lilyā ṣati "my way" → lilyāṣati "from my point of view; in my opinion; my way"
sāmyā ṣati "your way" → sāmyāṣati "from your point of view; in your opinion; your way"

Tatpuruṣa (nīdhvakādhūs)

Tatpuruṣa compounds (nīdhvakādhūs "with meaning inside", pl. nīdhvakādhaus) are likely the most common overall in Chlouvānem, and are the preferred way of crafting new words. These are endocentric compounds, the last element, the head of the compound, is modified by the previous element(s), which can be of any part of speech. Usually, the tatpuruṣa replaces genitive "X of Y", agentive "X which does Y", benefactive "X for Y", locative "X in Y", instrumental "X with Y", or sometimes copular structures "X which is (also) Y" (corresponding to Sanskrit karmadhāraya compounds) or "X made of Y".
The determining elements are generally uninflected.

vāṇumi tarlā "study of plants" → vāṇatarlā "botany"
vāṇatarlom kaminairīveyē lila "a person studying botany" (semantic agent) → vāṇatarlālila "botanist"
mordhē cūlla "carriage that flies" → mordhacūlla "airplane"
aṣṭre nali hatsunā "brush for teeth" → aṣṭṛhatsunā "toothbrush"
nanāye līlta "path in the jungle" → nanailīlta "jungle path"
nijogāp konanah "shooting with bow" → nijogākonanah "archery"
munnęs ḍūṇā "a telephone which is a computer" → munnaḍūṇā "smartphone"
javilenīs mayābi "wine made from apples" → javilmayābi "cider"

Bahuvrīhi (kaudhvakādhūs)

Bahuvrīhi compounds (kaudhvakādhūs "with meaning outside", pl. kaudhvakādhaus) are also quite common Chlouvānem words; they are exocentric compounds where none of the elements is the head of the compound, or, all elements are qualifiers. They replace structures like "[someone/something] with X which is/are Y" or "[sm/st] whose X is/are Y"; it could even be generalized to "[sm/st] whose [tatpuruṣa compound]":

murkire dhānęs lā lila "person with black hands" → murkadhāna "Inquisitor"
yųlgis nali javyęs lā dvārma "room with fire for food" → yųljavyāh "kitchen"[11]

Noun-forming morphemes

-a (unstressed) or (stressed) is a common derivative to make basic words from verbal roots. It does not have any fixed meaning, though it's always pretty close to the root. Nouns with the unstressed suffix and an ablautable vowel usually belong to the ablauting declension. in a root is always strengthened to middle-grade.

  • dṛ (to do, to make) → dara (activity)
  • lil (to live) → lila (person; living thing)
  • tṛl (to know) → tarlā (science)

-as is another common derivative, without fixed meaning, but usually denoting objects or things done by acting. It is used to derive positions from positional verbs.

  • tug (to beat) → tugas (beat)
  • māhatyā (māhatim-) (be to the right of) → māhatimas (right)
  • āntyā (āntim-) (be above, be on) → āntimas (part above)

-ūm is another derivative without fixed meaning, overlapping with -as.

  • lgut (to buy) → lgutūm (something bought)
  • peith (to go, walk (multidirectional)) → peithūm (walk)
  • yālv (to be sweet (taste)) → yālvūm (sweet taste)

-(u)kāram is a singulative suffix, denoting either a single thing of a collective noun, or a single constituent of a broader act. Unlike the previous ones, it is most commonly applied to other nouns.
In modern coinings, it is also used to denote a division of something.

  • lun (to go, walk (monodirectional)) → lulkāram (step)
  • lil (to live) (or liloe (life)) → lilukāram (moment, instant)
  • daša (rain) → dašukāram (raindrop)
  • araṣa (atom) → araṣkāram (subatomic particle)

-anah, with middle-grade ablaut if possible, denotes an act or process, or something closely related to that.

  • dig (to pour) → deganah ((act of) pouring)
  • miš (to see) → mešanah (sight)
  • lgut (to buy) → lgotanah (shopping)

-na (-ra after t or d; -iyāna after Cy, -uvāna after Cv) with lengthening denotes a quality.

  • māl (to keep together) → mālna (union)
  • hælvē (fruit) → šaulviyāna (fertility) (morphemically //hyaulviyāna//)
  • åbdv (to swell, blow up) → åbduvāna (swollenness, bloatiness)
  • blut (to clean) → blūtra (cleanliness)
  • Lengthening is absent if the word is derived from an -aus- adjectival verb (e.g. chlæraus- ((to be) easy) → chlærausna (easiness)) and in a few exceptions.
  • Inverse-ablaut roots have the reduced vowel as a prefix (e.g. vald (to (be) open) → uvaldra (opening, state of being open)).

-išam has the same meaning as -na, but it's rarer.

  • yųlniltas (edible) → yųlniltešam (edibility)
  •  yālv (to be sweet (taste)) → yālvišam (sweetness)
  • ñailūh (ice) → ñailūvišam (coldness)
  • nevy (to model, to give a form) → nevīšam (plastic) (This word underwent a meaning shift from "modellability" to a common material with that quality, replacing the derived form nevīšandhūs previously used. "Modellability" is nyaviyāna in contemporary Chlouvānem.)

-āmita (-yāmita when used with nouns with thematic e or i), often with high-grade ablaut, is another suffix forming quality nouns, but it is often more abstract, being translatable with suffixes like English -ism.

  • lalteh (friend (female)) → laltyāmita (friendship)
  •  ēmīla (tiger) → ēmīlāmita (nobility (quality); most important people in society[12])
  • ñæltah (sister (male's)) → ñæltāmita (brotherhood)

-tsām (-utsām after ñ, š, and voiced stops except d(h)), with middle-grade ablaut, has various generic and sometimes unpredictable meanings, though typically instrumental.

  •  māl (to keep together) → māltsām (number)
  •  lij (to sing) → lejutsām (choir)
  •  dhāḍ (to speak) → dhāḍutsām (voice)
  • kul (to say) → kultsām (word) (irregular lack of middle-grade ablaut)

-rṣūs (-ṛṣūs after a consonant) denotes a tool, namely something used in doing an action.

  • yaud- (to catch) → yaudṛṣūs (trap)
  • miš- (to see) → meširṣūs (eye (literary, rare))[13]
  • nail- (to kiss) → nailṛṣūs (lips (pair of))

-gis denotes something used for doing an action, not always synonymous with -rṣūs. -t-gis becomes -ñjis.

  •  mešīn (eye) → mešīlgis (glasses (pair of))
  •  tug- (to beat) → tulgis (drumstick)
  •  lgut- (to buy) → lguñjis (money, currency)

-oe (with middle-grade ablaut) often denotes a result, but has lots of various meanings.

  •  hal- (to call) → haloe (name, noun)
  •  mbiṇḍh- (to go, walk (multidirectional)) → mbiṇḍhoe (development; the way something is carried out)
  • yųl- (to eat) → yąloe (meal)

-īn plus middle grade-ablaut denotes a doer (roughly equivalent to English -er); usually it is a person, but not always.

  • bhi- (to take care of; to care for) → bhayīn (someone who takes care; guardian)
  • tug- (to beat) → togīn (heart)
  •  lgut- (to buy) → lgotīn (buyer)

-āršis is a mostly non-productive agentive suffix like -īn, surviving in a few ancient forms as well as some colloquial pejoratives:

  • lęk- (to measure) → lękāršis (surveyor, inspector)
  • dhīl- (to be idle) → dhīlāršis (lazy ass (pejor.))
  • ēreša (teardrop) → ērešāršis (crybaby (pejor.))

-āvi denotes something derived from X. It is also used in forming matronymics.

  •  lameṣa (coconut palm) → laṃṣāvi (coconut)
  •  mešanah (sight) → mešanąvi (knowledge)
  • yųl- (to eat) → yųlāvi (strength (literary, rare))
  • It is also used with surnames of writers, usually as a plurale tantum, in order to derive words meaning "the works of...", e.g. yukahināryāvi "the works of Lileikhurāvi Yukahināri Mæmihūmya".

-āmis, with lengthening, means "made of X".

  • tāmira (rock, stone) → tāmirāmis (stone tool)
  •  tarlā (knowledge, science) → tārlāmis (wisdom)
  •  lil- (to live) → līlāmis (a blissful place)
  • Words ending in a final long vowel (plus either h, s, or m) do not lengthen any vowel in a previous syllable (e.g. ñaryāh (mountain) → ñaryāmis (mountainous area)).

-ūneh (-īneh after stems in -Cy-, -ēneh for nouns in ), with middle grade ablaut (rarely strong grade), has various meanings, often somewhat abstract, intensive, or related to highly valued things/roles.

  •  daša (rain) → dašūneh (monsoon)
  •  nail- (to kiss) → nailūneh (love (literary, rare))
  • yaiva (all) + lairē (day) → yaivlairēṇeh (everyday life)
  • lalāruṇa (giant domestic lizard) → lalārauṇūneh (knight mounting a lalāruṇa)

-dhūs means "having X".

  • dara (activity) → daradhūs (verb)
  • šaṇṭrās (field, soil) → šaṇṭrādhūs (countryside)
  • hælvē (fruit) → hælvidhūs (fruiting tree; literary: pregnant woman)

-bān and -ūrah are two roughly equivalent suffixes used for locations. The first one is generally used after vowels, the second after consonants, but it's no strict rule.

  • hælvē (fruit) → hælvēbān (orchard)
  • lil (to live) → lilūrah (world)
  • peith (to go, to walk (multidirectional)) → peithūrah (passage)

-(l)āṇa forms a true collective noun:

  • lalteh (friend (female)) → laltelāṇa (group of friends)
  • jīma (character, symbol, letter) → jīmalāṇa (writing system)
  • maiva (word) → maivalāṇa (lexicon)

-(l)ænah denotes a tree or a plant having a certain fruit[14].

  •  haisah (pineapple) → haisænah (pineapple tree)
  •  maɂika (uncooked rice) → maɂikænah (rice plant)
  • šikālas (prickly pear) → šikālænah (prickly pear cactus)

-yūs is used with toponyms and is one of the most common ways to form demonyms. As many of the nouns these words are derived from are proper nouns and of non-Chlouvānem origin, there are often irregular formations, e.g. using only a part of the original word.

  • Līlasuṃghāṇalīlasuṃghāṇyūs
  • Camicamiyūs
  • Ajāɂilbādhiajāɂilbādhyūs

-mana (-ana after CC clusters) is often found with the meaning of "that has to be X"; usually, a synonymous word may be formed by -s derivation from a necessitative stem, but some -mana words have their own specialized meaning:

  • ṭvur- (to believe) → ṭvurmaṇa (miracle)
  • miš- (to see) → mišmana (attraction) (also memikṣūs)
  • tṛl- (to know, understand) → tṛlmana (rule) (not synonymous with tartṛlsūs, meaning "needed knowledge, prerequisite")

-yai (often with lengthening) forms nouns with the meaning of "pertaining to", generally applied to nouns denoting inanimate (but usually concrete) concepts. Such nouns are found in literature with an anaphorical use.
It is commonly found in Chlouvānem surnames. In chemistry, it denotes binary compounds, usually with a dvandva stem.

  • vīhatam (farm) → vīhātyai (farmer; farm's)
  • svāṣṭa (armor) → svāṣṭyai (armored knight)
  • bilumbida (sodium) + talyelīm (chlorine) → bilumbītalyelīyai (sodium chloride)

-ceh, -cænah, and -cañīh (all often with palatalization of the last consonant) are three different (but with roughly the same meaning) diminutive-forming suffixes; some of them have developed distinct meanings. They can also be compounded, as in -cæñ-cañīh:

  • nūrya (child) → nūricænah (little child)
  • ēmīla (tiger) → ēmīlcañīh (cat)
  • pǣka (taste) → pǣcicænah (hors d'œuvre, entrée)

Similarly, -rarā (a likely Laiputaši borrowing) is used as an augmentative, but is only found in informal styles.

  • dårṣa (cool, nice) → dårṣararā (fantastic)
  • jāmṝṣa (dam) → jāmṝṣararā (a huge dam)
  • alūs (bottle) → alūrarā (a big bottle)

Verb-forming morphemes

Denominal verbs, in Chlouvānem, are not formed with derivational suffixes; a "light verb" is attached to the semantic root instead; the semantic root remains invariable but the light verb is conjugated (as a prefixed one). The light verb used are especially dṛke (to do, make), but also jilde (to do an action), jānake (to feel (physical)), and gyake (to be). Some examples:

  • āmaya (collection) → āmayadṛke (to collect)
  • språma (glue) → språñjilde (to glue)
  • jålkha (cold (sensation)) → jålkhajānake (to be/feel cold)
  • ñailūh (ice) → tæñailūgyake (to freeze) (note the tæ- dynamic prefix).

The other basic derived formation is the frequentative verb, formed with reduplication (with a long vowel) and -ve(y)- (-vi(y)- in the past tense[15]). -ṛ reduplicates as , but becomes a in the root.
Due to the common use of this form in modern Chlouvānem, some grammarians consider it as an inflectional category instead of a derivation. Note though that for motion verbs only multidirectional ones have a frequentative form (with iterative meaning); the multidirectionals already act as frequentative forms of the monodirectionals.

  • dṛ- (to do) → dṝdave- (to repetitively do)
  • na-jaly- (to happen) → najājlive- (to keep happening; to regularly happen, to occur)[16] (jaly- reduplicates as jā-jli-, with the i from the root y).
  • -jaly- (to be) + various prefixes → bījājlive- (to cease to be); galajājlive- (to remain in one place; to visit; to keep being)
  • tvorg- (to fear) → totvargve- (to fear over and over again) (tvo- reduplicates as to- instead of tva-).
  • låvy- (to slip) → laulavive- (to slip around here and there) (-å- reduplicates as -au- and becomes a in the root).

Note that nairīveke conjugates as a frequentative verb, but is not frequentative and does not have frequentative forms.
Frequentative perfect stems have the ablauted vowel in the reduplication and a long one in the root (cf. miš-, bare frequentative mīmišve-, perfect frequentative memīšve-); both vowels are long for non-ablauted stems (cf. nāmv-, nānamve-, nānāmve-).
Inverse ablauting roots have similar rules: the bare frequentative uses the reduplication of the nonreduced root and the reduced vowel in the root itself (vald- → va-uld-ve- → voldve-); the frequentative perfect is like the normal frequentative of other verbs, with the long vowel in the reduplication only (vald-vāvaldve-).

In many cases, frequentatives are used with an iterative meaning; the latter, if needed for disambiguation, may be specified by the particle dīdān.

Adjectival verbs

Adjectival verbs, however, do have some ways to be derived from other parts of speech.

-ūk-ke is the most common adjectival verb-forming suffix, denoting something strictly related to an object or a verb. Note that they are all thematic verbs, even if their infinitive is contracted (Archaic Chl. -ūkake → Classical and Modern -ūkke). Often they are interchangeable with the genitive form of the noun they derived from:

  • avyāṣa (time) → avyāṣūkke ([to be] temporal)
  • chlærūm (light) → chlærūkke (of the light)
  • daša (rain) → dašūkke (rainy, concerning rain)

-uy-a-ke is a rarer variant of -ūk-ke, most commonly found for qualities related to people, but not exclusively (see third example):

  • jāyim (girl) → jāyimuyake (girly, girlish)
  • saṃhāram (boy) → saṃhāruyake (boyish)
  • irūtākalam (atom) → irūtāruyake (atomic) (the -r is etymological from Ancient Kūṣṛmāṭhi)

-aus-a-ke (rarely -us-a-ke) forms adjectival verbs related to a quality that is applied to some object, but more abstractly related than those formed with -ūkke; sometimes they are only figurative:

  • chlærūm (light) → chlærausake (easy)
  • pāṇi (side) → pāṇyausake (peripheral, less important)
  • namęlь (to make an effort, to apply oneself, to work harder) → namęliausake (Stakhanovite)
  • Nouns ending in typically only add -sь- (-si-ke):
    • laikā (innocence) → laikāsike (innocent)

-nilt-a-ke translates English -able, and the circumfix uṣ- -niltake translates to "un- -able" or, sometimes, "difficult to X". The rare ñǣ- -niltake translates as "easy to X".
The uṣ- prefix has the allomorphs ū- (before voiced stops), uš- (before c and ch), and u- (before l+consonant); uṣ- plus any sibilant becomes ukṣ-.

  • tṛl (to know, understand) → tṛlniltake (understandable) → uṣṭṛlniltake (uncomprehensible; difficult to understand) / ñǣtṛlniltake (easy to understand)
  • yųl (to eat) → yųlniltake (edible) → uṣyųlniltake (unedible)
  • lgut (to buy) → lgutniltake (buyable) → ulgutniltake (not buyable)

-ṣeni-ke (morph. seny-ke, all root verbs) translates "having X as a quality", usually added to nouns, or "X-like" in some cases; it may be synonymous with the -dhūs derivative. u- and i- stems (thus -uh, -ih, -us...) lengthen that vowel before the suffix.

  • rahēlah (health) → rahēlṣenike (healthy)
  • nakṣuma (music) → nakṣuṃṣenike (having a musical talent)
  • migmairuh (emerald) → migmairūṣenike (emeraldine, emerald-like)

Compound verbs

Chlouvānem uses compound verbs as its main method of deriving verbs from nouns. Such "verbs" are actually a nominal root which does not decline followed by a conjugating verb. The verb used influences the meaning that the compound will have:

  • dṛke (to do) is probably the most commonly used, and may have a meaning of using something (denoted by the nominal root) to treat something else (cf. bikṣurdṛke "to deodorize" < bikṣurga "deodorant"), of moving or acting like the nominal root (yināṃdṛke "to protect" < yinām "protection"), or of simply having or creating something (āmayadṛke "to collect" < āmaya "collection").
  • kitte (to put) is used for a meaning of addition of the nominal root or its characteristics to something (cf. nāmṛkitte "to add salt" < nāṃra "salt).
  • męlike (to give) is sometimes used with the same meaning as kitte (cf. junyāmęlike "to plant flowers" < junyā "flower").
  • jilde (to act) is used for subjects "emitting" or "giving off" something (cf. lāhajilde "to judge" < lāham "judgement"), also for subjects possessing (dhokajilde "to mean" < dhokam "meaning") or undergoing something (lañšijilde "to marry" < lañši (arch.) braid, wedding), and also for weather phenomena[17] (dašajilde "to rain" < daša "rain").
  • gyake (to be) is used, like in one meaning of dṛke, for moving or acting like the nominal root. Typically, it is more for states than actions (the prototypical and most common example is pṛšcāṃgyake "to be pleasing" < pṛšcām "something pleasing"[18]).
  • jānake (to feel) has a meaning partially overlapping with jalle (and dṛke), particularly marking the "feeling" of a (usually uncontrollable) condition (jålkhajānake "to be cold" < jålkha "cold").
  • milke (to take) has a varied range of meaning: getting or gathering something (vīrādhmilke "to adopt" < vīrādhen "orphan"; mailьlut(a)milke "to take advantage" < mailьluta "advantage"), also the opposite, taking something away (cf. rantamilke "to peel (fruits)" < rantas "peel"), and also overlapping partially with kitte and męlike in marking the addition of something or, more, properly, the act of bringing something (prātamilke "to get windy; (figur.) to accelerate" < prātas "wind" - cf. prātajilde "to be windy").
  • bismilke (to take away) and bīdṛke (to destroy) are used, more commonly than milke, for the meaning of removing or taking something away: (ssūbismilke "to calm down" < ssūgis "something that worries"; lilembīdṛke "(euphem.) to kill" < liloe "life").

Sometimes, the most meaningful element of a compound verb is not otherwise found as a standalone word in Chlouvānem, as in pṛšcāṃjalle (to like), or hārlājmęlike (to prefer).

Prefixes

Prefixes are a major part of Chlouvānem derivational morphology. Most of them are the same as for positional and motion verbs — for their formation and use, see the related section. Most prefixes are used with verbs, and are found with nouns only in derived forms; some of them, however, can be used also or exclusively with nouns and adjectives. Prefixes derive usually from Proto-Lahob, but a few chiefly nominal ones are from Ancient Kūṣṛmāthi words.
Here follows a complete list of all prefixes used in Chlouvānem and their meaning. When two prefixes are divided by a wave dash, the first is lative and the second is ablative; NOM marks meanings of nouns derived with that prefix.

Positional and motional prefixes

  • ta- 〜 tų- - generic direction

  • ān- 〜 yana- - on, above
  • šu- 〜 šer- - under, below
  • ṭvā- 〜 ṭus- - between
  • gin- 〜 ją- - among
  • nī- 〜 ani- - within/from within inside
  • ū(b)- 〜 yom- - close to
  • bis- 〜 bara- - far, away
  • tad- (tata- before l) 〜 tasi- - attached to; against
  • įs- 〜 įṣu- - hanging
  • na(ñ)- 〜 nani- - inside
  • kau- 〜 kuvi- - outside
  • viṣ- 〜 vyeṣa- - opposite; somewhere else
  • kami- 〜 kara- - around
  • pri- 〜 prā- - behind
  • mai- 〜 mīram- - in front of
  • vai- 〜 vǣ- - in a corner; bordering; at the limit
  • sāṭ- 〜 ṣlū- - next to; along; on the side of
  • lā(d)- 〜 lo(d)- - in the center of
  • vyā- 〜 veši- - left
  • māha- 〜 mege- - right
  • pid- - facing (positional only)
  • nal- - towards the center; inwards; convergent movement
  • vād- - away from the center; outwards; divergent movement

Motional prefixes

  • be- 〜 ter- - along the surface
  • gala- 〜 hali- - through, across
  • naš- - completely, until the end; NOM: omni-, pan-, entirely
  • vod- - avoiding
  • paṣ- - ahead, beyond; also NOM: further, again, re-
  • sam- - movement to the following place/person/object in a set; NOM: after, post-

Verbal-only prefixes

  • tæ(m)- - inceptive/inchoative
  • raš- - to do something a bit more than needed (ral- or rar- before voiced consonants)
  • yā- - too much
  • iva- - completely, also intensive
  • nare- - applicative (nar- before another prefix, cf. the common form narta- for "to reach"-verbs)
  • min- - transitivizer of intransitive verbs

Other prefixes

  • o- - before, pre-, proto-, preceding (os- before vowels)
  • tail- - multi-, pluri-
  • emib(u)- or tūt(u)- - one, mono-, uni-, homo-
  • lani- - same, fellow
  • vre- - bad
  • demi- - self-

Specific terms

Derivational terms considered "specific" are those mostly found in certain jargons. Some of these are applied directly to a Lällshag root instead of a Chlouvānem one:

Used in politics and/or the arts:

  • -nātra has two main meanings: -ism (as in a doctrine) in a political sense, and -esque in the arts, cf. yaivcārṇātra "communism" (< yaiva "all", cār- "to have"), or lānūṣurṇātra "in the style of writer Naryejūramāvi Lānūṣurah Mæmihomah".
    • -nātryūs (← -nātra-yūs) is the term for a person that follows such a doctrine or style, cf. yaivcārṇātryūs "communist"; lānūṣurṇātryūs "someone whose writing is Lānūṣuraësque".
    • Note that lija and lejīn (lit. "song" and "singer") were formerly alternatives to these. They notably remain in nāɂahilūṃlija "politico-religious doctrine inspired by Great Inquisitor Kælahīmāvi Nāɂahilūma Martayinām; Yunyalīlti religious extremism" and nāɂahilūṃlejīn, as well as in arāmilija "pacifism".

Used for medical terminology:

  • -gulas usually translates "-philia" or "-mania", particularly in medical contexts, e.g. ryukagulas "masochism" from ryuka "pain".
    • -gulašålyē is the related term for someone who has that (thus "-philiac" or "-maniac"), e.g. ryukagulašålyē "masochist".
  • -rauga is a generic term used in medicine for names of illnesses or conditions affecting health, e.g. gåtnirauga "obesity" from gåtnake "to vomit"; skañcrauga "insomnia" from skañcake (to be awake at night).
    • -raugotis is the term for someone affected by a -rauga, e.g. skañcraugotis "insomniac".
  • -ītsun is a rarer alternative to -ræṣka, e.g. vrayobulītsun "asplenia" (vre- (bad) + obula (spleen)), or lagukītsun "paralysis" (the latter with the root of Lällshag gahoke (still)).
    • -ītsunis is the corresponding term for affected organisms, e.g. vrayobulītsunis "aspleniac", lagukītsunis "paralyzed".
  • -måkṣan is used for inflammatory diseases, cf. "-itis", like ṇīṭmåkṣan (dermatitis) or āḍhyāsnūlimåkṣan (meningitis).

Compounding

  • tarlā (knowledge) is used as the head element of compounds, with a meaning like -logy in English. Sometimes the meaning is only abstracted (see second example) or has changed with time (see third example):
    • babhrām (land) → babhrātarlā (geography)
    • smoḍ- (to count, to enumerate) → smoṇḍarlā (mathematics)
    • ladragyalah (inn) → ladragyaltarlā (economics)

See also

Notes

  1. ^ These are the remnants of a former gender system present in Proto-Lahob, still evident in other Lahob languages; unlike others in the family, Chlouvānem did not become genderless because of losing gender marking on nouns, but because it lost concordance anywhere else.
  2. ^ The word latiryai is the plural of latirē (wave, ray), but this compound does not have a singular form.
  3. ^ This is due to many honorific formulae being quite long - for example, the standard honorific formula when talking to an Inquisitor is (lallāmaha) [matronymic] yamei murkadhāna [given name] lāma.
  4. ^ With cousins, whether the informal or the given name is used depends on how close they are; with first cousins using the informal name is nearly universal, while with farther cousins the given name may be more common.
  5. ^ Many head monks have their own unique titles based on their monastery. For example the head monk of the Vādhaṃšvāti Lake Monastery is not referred as […] hurdagīn lāma vādhaṃšvāti ga gūltayi but as […] laliājuniāmiti jāṇi camilālta lāma, literally "Great Guardian of the Field of the Night Bloom".
  6. ^ e.g. sorami, grāṇami
  7. ^ nęlte has the stem nęlc- wherever pāmvi has -vy-, i.e. accusatives pāmvyu, nęlcu.
  8. ^ chīka has the stem chīcæ- before consonants.
  9. ^ nęlte has the form nęlci.
  10. ^ Language of an ethnic minority (but titular ethnicity) in the diocese of Hūnakañjaiṭa.
  11. ^ Synchronically, this analysis is correct; however, this word was likely first crafted as a tatpuruṣa, i.e. "a fire for food" (yųlgis nali javyāh), before kitchens were rooms.
  12. ^ Chlouvānem society lacked a true noble class; this term applies to the most influential people in society. Tigers are considered among the noblest animals.
  13. ^ Middle-grade ablaut is specific to this root.
  14. ^ As for all living things, being Calémere a different planet, the given translation is the one of the closest equivalent on Earth.
  15. ^ Ex.: dṝdaveyute "I repetitively do" vs. dṝdaviyaute "I repetitively did"
  16. ^ The verb "to happen" does not exist as an iterative.
  17. ^ Rain, specifically, is more commonly used as the subject of the verb buñjñake, meaning "to run" for water (in Chl. rain runs just like a river does).
  18. ^ The word pṛšcām alone is almost never used in contemporary Chlouvānem.